Table of Contents
- GS3700/XGS3700 Series
- User’s Guide
- Technical Reference
- ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
- Basic Setting
- 6.1 System Information
- 6.2 General Setup
- 6.3 Introduction to VLANs
- 6.4 Switch Setup
- 6.5 IP Setup
- 6.6 Port Setup
- 6.7 PoE
- 6.8 Interface Setup
- 6.9 IPv6
- 6.9.1 IPv6 Interface Status
- 6.9.2 IPv6 Configuration
- 6.9.3 IPv6 Global Setup
- 6.9.4 IPv6 Interface Setup
- 6.9.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
- 6.9.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup
- 6.9.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
- 6.9.8 IPv6 Router Discovery Setup
- 6.9.9 IPv6 Prefix Setup
- 6.9.10 IPv6 Neighbor Setup
- 6.9.11 DHCPv6 Client Setup
- 6.10 Stacking
- 6.11 DNS
- VLAN
- Static MAC Forward Setup
- Static Multicast Forward Setup
- Filtering
- Spanning Tree Protocol
- 11.1 STP/RSTP Overview
- 11.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen
- 11.3 Spanning Tree Configuration
- 11.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
- 11.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 11.6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
- 11.7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- 11.8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
- 11.9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status
- Bandwidth Control
- Broadcast Storm Control
- Mirroring
- Link Aggregation
- Port Authentication
- Port Security
- Time Range
- Classifier
- Policy Rule
- Queuing Method
- VLAN Stacking
- Multicast
- AAA
- IP Source Guard
- 25.1 IP Source Guard Overview
- 25.2 IP Source Guard
- 25.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup
- 25.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding
- 25.5 DHCP Snooping
- 25.6 DHCP Snooping Configure
- 25.7 ARP Inspection Status
- 25.8 ARP Inspection Configure
- 25.9 IPv6 Source Guard Overview
- 25.10 IPv6 Source Binding Status
- 25.11 IPv6 Static Binding Setup
- 25.12 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
- 25.13 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
- 25.14 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
- 25.15 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
- 25.16 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
- 25.17 Technical Reference
- Loop Guard
- VLAN Mapping
- Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
- sFlow
- PPPoE
- Error Disable
- MAC Pinning
- Private VLAN
- Green Ethernet
- Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
- Anti-Arpscan
- BPDU Guard
- OAM
- ZULD
- Static Route
- Policy Routing
- Differentiated Services
- DHCP
- VRRP
- Load Sharing
- ARP Setup
- Maintenance
- Access Control
- Diagnostic
- System Log
- Syslog Setup
- Cluster Management
- MAC Table
- IP Table
- ARP Table
- Routing Table
- Path MTU Table
- Configure Clone
- IPv6 Neighbor Table
- Troubleshooting
- Common Services
- IPv6
- Customer Support
- Legal Information
- Index
Zyxel GS3700-48 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for GS3700-48 by Zyxel which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Quick Start Guide
www.zyxel.com
GS3700/XGS3700 Series
GbE L2+ Switch
Ve rsion 4.30
Edition 1, 10/2015
Copyright © 2015 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
User’s Guide
Default Login Details
IP Address http://192.168.0.1 (Out-
of-band MGMT port)
http://192.168.1.1 (In-
band ports)
User Name admin
Password 1234
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
2
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Note: This guide is a reference for a series of products. Therefore some features or
options in this guide may not be available in your product.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in
your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• CLI Reference Guide
This guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) to configure the Switch.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary
information.
•More Information
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Switch.
Contents Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
3
Contents Overview
User’ s Guide .............................................................................. ........... ........... .......... .........................20
Getting to Know Your Switch ...................................................................................................................21
Hardware Installation and Connection ....................................................................................................26
Hardware Overview .................................................................................................................................30
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................37
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................46
ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status ......................................................................47
Basic Setting ..........................................................................................................................................56
VLAN .....................................................................................................................................................101
Static MAC Forward Setup ....................................................................................................................124
Static Multicast Forward Setup ..............................................................................................................127
Filtering .................................................................................................................................................130
Spanning Tree Protocol .........................................................................................................................132
Bandwidth Control .................................................................................................................................157
Broadcast Storm Control .......................................................................................................................160
Mirroring ................................................................................................................................................162
Link Aggregation ...................................................................................................................................175
Port Authentication ................................................................................................................................185
Port Security ..........................................................................................................................................195
Time Range ...........................................................................................................................................199
Classifier ...............................................................................................................................................201
Policy Rule ...........................................................................................................................................210
Queuing Method ....................................................................................................................................215
VLAN Stacking ......................................................................................................................................219
Multicast ................................................................................................................................................227
AAA .......................................................................................................................................................253
IP Source Guard ...................................................................................................................................265
Loop Guard ...........................................................................................................................................299
VLAN Mapping ......................................................................................................................................303
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ...................................................................................................................307
sFlow .....................................................................................................................................................312
PPPoE ...................................................................................................................................................316
Error Disable .........................................................................................................................................325
MAC Pinning .........................................................................................................................................333
Private VLAN .........................................................................................................................................336
Green Ethernet ......................................................................................................................................340
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ..................................................................................................343
Contents Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
4
Anti-Arpscan ..........................................................................................................................................372
BPDU Guard .........................................................................................................................................378
OAM ......................................................................................................................................................381
ZULD .....................................................................................................................................................390
Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................396
Policy Routing .......................................................................................................................................400
Differentiated Services ..........................................................................................................................404
DHCP ....................................................................................................................................................413
VRRP ....................................................................................................................................................430
Load Sharing .........................................................................................................................................439
ARP Setup ............................................................................................................................................441
Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................447
Access Control ......................................................................................................................................458
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................482
System Log ...........................................................................................................................................485
Syslog Setup .........................................................................................................................................486
Cluster Management .............................................................................................................................489
MAC Table .............................................................................................................................................495
IP Table .................................................................................................................................................498
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................500
Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................502
Path MTU Table ....................................................................................................................................503
Configure Clone ....................................................................................................................................504
IPv6 Neighbor Table ..............................................................................................................................508
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................510
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
5
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide .........................................................................................20
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your Switch.............................................................................................................21
1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................21
1.1.1 Bridging Example ....................................................................................................................22
1.1.2 High Performance Switching Example ....................................................................................22
1.1.3 Gigabit Ethernet to the Desktop ..............................................................................................23
1.1.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Example ................................................................................23
1.1.5 IPv6 Support ............................................................................................................................24
1.2 Ways to Manage the Switch ..............................................................................................................24
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch ...............................................................................................25
Chapter 2
Hardware Installation and Connection .............................................................................................26
2.1 Freestanding Installation ..................................................................................................................26
2.2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack ........................................................................................................27
2.3 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................................27
2.3.1 Precautions .............................................................................................................................27
2.4 Attaching the Brackets to the Switch .................................................................................................27
2.5 Mounting the Switch on a Rack .........................................................................................................28
2.6 Power Module Installation .................................................................................................................29
Chapter 3
Hardware Overview ............................................................................................................................30
3.1 Front Panel Connections ..................................................................................................................30
3.1.1 Ethernet Ports ..........................................................................................................................31
3.1.2 SFP/SFP+ Slots ......................................................................................................................32
3.1.3 Management Port ....................................................................................................................33
3.1.4 Console Port ...........................................................................................................................33
3.2 Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................................34
3.2.1 Removing and Installing the Fan Module ................................................................................34
3.2.2 Power Connection ...................................................................................................................34
3.3 LEDs .............................................................................................................................................35
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
6
Chapter 4
The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................37
4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................37
4.2 System Login .................................................................................................................................37
4.3 The Web Configurator Layout .........................................................................................................38
4.3.1 Change Your Password ........................................................................................................42
4.4 Saving Your Configuration ................................................................................................................43
4.5 Switch Lockout ................................................................................................................................43
4.6 Resetting the Switch ......................................................................................................................44
4.6.1 Reload the Configuration File .................................................................................................44
4.7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator ..............................................................................................45
4.8 Help ..................................................................................................................................................45
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................46
Chapter 5
ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status...............................................................47
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................47
5.2 Status ................................................................................................................................................47
5.3 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Utility Screen .......................................................................................49
5.4 ZON Neighbor Management Screen ................................................................................................49
5.5 Port Status .......................................................................................................................................51
5.5.1 Port Details ...........................................................................................................................52
Chapter 6
Basic Setting ......................................................................................................................................56
6.1 System Information ........................................................................................................................56
6.1.1 System Information Stacking Hardware Monitor ....................................................................59
6.2 General Setup .................................................................................................................................61
6.3 Introduction to VLANs ......................................................................................................................63
6.4 Switch Setup ....................................................................................................................................63
6.5 IP Setup .........................................................................................................................................65
6.5.1 IP Interfaces ...........................................................................................................................65
6.5.2 IP Status Details .....................................................................................................................66
6.5.3 IP Configuration ......................................................................................................................67
6.6 Port Setup ........................................................................................................................................69
6.7 PoE ..................................................................................................................................................72
6.7.1 PoE Time Range Status ..........................................................................................................75
6.7.2 PoE Setup ...............................................................................................................................76
6.8 Interface Setup ..................................................................................................................................79
6.9 IPv6 ...................................................................................................................................................80
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
7
6.9.1 IPv6 Interface Status ...............................................................................................................80
6.9.2 IPv6 Configuration ...................................................................................................................83
6.9.3 IPv6 Global Setup ....................................................................................................................83
6.9.4 IPv6 Interface Setup ................................................................................................................84
6.9.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup ...............................................................................................85
6.9.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup .....................................................................................................86
6.9.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup ...............................................................................................87
6.9.8 IPv6 Router Discovery Setup ..................................................................................................88
6.9.9 IPv6 Prefix Setup .....................................................................................................................89
6.9.10 IPv6 Neighbor Setup .............................................................................................................91
6.9.11 DHCPv6 Client Setup ............................................................................................................92
6.10 Stacking ...........................................................................................................................................93
6.10.1 Stacking Status ......................................................................................................................94
6.10.2 Stacking Slot .........................................................................................................................95
6.10.3 Stacking Configuration ...........................................................................................................97
6.11 DNS .................................................................................................................................................99
Chapter 7
VLAN..................................................................................................................................................101
7.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs .............................................................................101
7.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames ...........................................................................101
7.2 Automatic VLAN Registration .........................................................................................................102
7.2.1 GARP ....................................................................................................................................102
7.2.2 GVRP ....................................................................................................................................102
7.3 Port VLAN Trunking .......................................................................................................................103
7.4 Select the VLAN Type ....................................................................................................................103
7.5 802.1Q Static VLAN ........................................................................................................................103
7.5.1 VLAN Status .........................................................................................................................104
7.5.2 VLAN Details .........................................................................................................................105
7.6 Private VLAN Status .......................................................................................................................106
7.7 VLAN Configuration .......................................................................................................................106
7.7.1 Configure a Static VLAN ...................................................................................................107
7.7.2 Configure VLAN Port Settings ...........................................................................................109
7.7.3 Subnet Based VLANs ........................................................................................................... 111
7.7.4 Protocol Based VLANs ......................................................................................................... 114
7.8 Port-based VLAN Setup (Standalone Mode) .............................................................................. 117
7.8.1 Configure a Port-based VLAN .............................................................................................. 117
7.9 Voice VLAN ....................................................................................................................................120
7.10 MAC Based VLAN .........................................................................................................................122
Chapter 8
Static MAC Forward Setup...............................................................................................................124
8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................124
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
8
8.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding ...........................................................................................124
Chapter 9
Static Multicast Forward Setup .......................................................................................................127
9.1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview .............................................................................................127
9.2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding ..........................................................................................128
Chapter 10
Filtering..............................................................................................................................................130
10.1 Configure a Filtering Rule ...........................................................................................................130
Chapter 11
Spanning Tree Protocol....................................................................................................................132
11.1 STP/RSTP Overview ...................................................................................................................132
11.1.1 STP Terminology .................................................................................................................132
11.1.2 How STP Works ..................................................................................................................133
11.1.3 STP Port States ..................................................................................................................133
11.1.4 Multiple RSTP ....................................................................................................................133
11.1.5 Multiple STP .........................................................................................................................134
11.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen ..........................................................................................136
11.3 Spanning Tree Configuration ........................................................................................................137
11.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ...................................................................................138
11.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status .........................................................................................141
11.6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ......................................................................142
11.7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status ........................................................................145
11.8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol ................................................................................147
11.8.1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration ...........................................................151
11.9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status ...................................................................................154
Chapter 12
Bandwid th Control..................................................................... ........... ........... .......... .......................157
12.1 Bandwidth Control Overview .......................................................................................................157
12.1.1 CIR and PIR ........................................................................................................................157
12.2 Bandwidth Control Setup ..............................................................................................................157
Chapter 13
Broadcast Storm Control.................................................................................................................160
13.1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup ....................................................................................................160
Chapter 14
Mirroring............................................................................................................................................162
14.1 Port Mirroring ...............................................................................................................................162
14.1.1 Local Port Mirroring .............................................................................................................165
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
9
14.1.2 Remote Port Mirroring .........................................................................................................167
14.1.3 Source .................................................................................................................................168
14.1.4 Destination ...........................................................................................................................170
14.1.5 Connected Port ....................................................................................................................171
Chapter 15
Link Aggregation ..............................................................................................................................175
15.1 Link Aggregation Overview ..........................................................................................................175
15.2 Dynamic Link Aggregation ...........................................................................................................175
15.2.1 Link Aggregation ID ............................................................................................................176
15.3 Link Aggregation Status ...............................................................................................................176
15.4 Link Aggregation Setting ..............................................................................................................177
15.5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol .............................................................................................180
15.6 Static Trunking Example ...............................................................................................................183
Chapter 16
Port Authentication ..........................................................................................................................185
16.1 Port Authentication Overview .......................................................................................................185
16.1.1 IEEE 802.1x Authentication .................................................................................................185
16.1.2 MAC Authentication .............................................................................................................186
16.2 Port Authentication Configuration .................................................................................................187
16.2.1 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security .........................................................................................187
16.2.2 Guest VLAN ........................................................................................................................189
16.2.3 Activate MAC Authentication ..............................................................................................192
Chapter 17
Port Security .....................................................................................................................................195
17.1 About Port Security .......................................................................................................................195
17.2 Port Security Setup .......................................................................................................................195
17.3 VLAN MAC Address Limit ............................................................................................................197
Chapter 18
Time Range .......................................................................................................................................199
18.1 About Time Range ........................................................................................................................199
18.2 Time Range Setup ........................................................................................................................199
Chapter 19
Classifier............................................................................................................................................201
19.1 About the Classifier and QoS ........................................................................................................201
19.2 Classifier Status ............................................................................................................................201
19.3 Classifier Configuration .................................................................................................................202
19.3.1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration .......................................................................206
19.4 Classifier Global Setting Configuration .........................................................................................207
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
10
19.5 Classifier Example ........................................................................................................................208
Chapter 20
Policy Rule .......................................................................................................................................210
20.1 Policy Rules Overview .................................................................................................................210
20.1.1 DiffServ ................................................................................................................................210
20.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior ..............................................................................................210
20.2 Configuring Policy Rules ...............................................................................................................210
20.3 Policy Example ..............................................................................................................................213
Chapter 21
Queuing Method ...............................................................................................................................215
21.1 Queuing Method Overview ...........................................................................................................215
21.1.1 Strictly Priority ......................................................................................................................215
21.1.2 Weighted Fair Queuing ........................................................................................................215
21.1.3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) .........................................................................216
21.2 Configuring Queuing .....................................................................................................................216
Chapter 22
VLAN Stacking ..................................................................................................................................219
22.1 VLAN Stacking Overview .............................................................................................................219
22.1.1 VLAN Stacking Example ......................................................................................................219
22.2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles ............................................................................................................220
22.3 VLAN Tag Format ..........................................................................................................................220
22.3.1 Frame Format ......................................................................................................................221
22.4 Configuring VLAN Stacking ...........................................................................................................221
22.4.1 Port-based Q-in-Q ...............................................................................................................223
22.4.2 Selective Q-in-Q .................................................................................................................225
Chapter 23
Multicast ............................................................................................................................................227
23.1 Multicast Overview .......................................................................................................................227
23.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses ........................................................................................................227
23.1.2 IGMP Filtering ......................................................................................................................227
23.1.3 IGMP Snooping ..................................................................................................................228
23.1.4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs ................................................................................................228
23.1.5 MLD Snooping-Proxy ..........................................................................................................228
23.1.6 MLD Messages ....................................................................................................................229
23.2 Multicast Setup .............................................................................................................................229
23.3 IPv4 Multicast Status ....................................................................................................................230
23.3.1 IGMP Snooping ..................................................................................................................230
23.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN ........................................................................................................234
23.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile .........................................................................................................235
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
11
23.4 IPv6 Multicast Status ....................................................................................................................236
23.4.1 MLD Snooping-proxy ..........................................................................................................237
23.4.2 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN ...............................................................................................237
23.4.3 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN Port Role Setting ...................................................................239
23.4.4 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering ............................................................................................241
23.4.5 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering Profile .................................................................................243
23.5 MVR Overview .............................................................................................................................244
23.5.1 Types of MVR Ports .............................................................................................................245
23.5.2 MVR Modes .........................................................................................................................245
23.5.3 How MVR Works .................................................................................................................245
23.6 General MVR Configuration ..........................................................................................................246
23.6.1 MVR Group Configuration ..................................................................................................248
23.6.2 MVR Configuration Example ...............................................................................................250
Chapter 24
AAA....................................................................................................................................................253
24.1 Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) ....................................................................253
24.1.1 Local User Accounts ............................................................................................................253
24.1.2 RADIUS and TACACS+ ......................................................................................................254
24.2 AAA Screens .................................................................................................................................254
24.2.1 RADIUS Server Setup .......................................................................................................254
24.2.2 TACACS+ Server Setup ..................................................................................................256
24.2.3 AAA Setup ...........................................................................................................................257
24.2.4 Vendor Specific Attribute .....................................................................................................260
24.2.5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute .....................................................................................................261
24.3 Supported RADIUS Attributes .......................................................................................................261
24.3.1 Attributes Used for Authentication .......................................................................................262
24.3.2 Attributes Used for Accounting ............................................................................................262
Chapter 25
IP Source Guard................................................................................................................................265
25.1 IP Source Guard Overview ...........................................................................................................265
25.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................265
25.1.2 What You Need to Know .....................................................................................................266
25.2 IP Source Guard ...........................................................................................................................267
25.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup ............................................................................................................268
25.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding .................................................................................................269
25.5 DHCP Snooping ............................................................................................................................271
25.6 DHCP Snooping Configure ...........................................................................................................273
25.6.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure ..........................................................................................275
25.6.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure .......................................................................................277
25.6.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure ................................................................................278
25.7 ARP Inspection Status ..................................................................................................................279
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
12
25.7.1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status ..............................................................................................280
25.7.2 ARP Inspection Log Status ..................................................................................................281
25.8 ARP Inspection Configure .............................................................................................................282
25.8.1 ARP Inspection Port Configure ............................................................................................284
25.8.2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure .........................................................................................286
25.9 IPv6 Source Guard Overview .......................................................................................................287
25.10 IPv6 Source Binding Status .........................................................................................................287
25.11 IPv6 Static Binding Setup ...........................................................................................................288
25.12 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup ................................................................................................290
25.13 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup ...................................................................................................291
25.14 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup .......................................................................................................292
25.15 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup .......................................................................................................293
25.16 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup .............................................................................................................294
25.17 Technical Reference ....................................................................................................................295
25.17.1 DHCP Snooping Overview ................................................................................................295
25.17.2 ARP Inspection Overview ..................................................................................................297
Chapter 26
Loop Guard .......................................................................................................................................299
26.1 Loop Guard Overview ..................................................................................................................299
26.2 Loop Guard Setup .........................................................................................................................301
Chapter 27
VLAN Mapping ..................................................................................................................................303
27.1 VLAN Mapping Overview .............................................................................................................303
27.1.1 VLAN Mapping Example .....................................................................................................303
27.2 Enabling VLAN Mapping ...............................................................................................................303
27.3 Configuring VLAN Mapping ...........................................................................................................305
Chapter 28
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling..............................................................................................................307
28.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview ..........................................................................................307
28.1.1 Layer-2 Protocol Tunneling Mode ........................................................................................308
28.2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ........................................................................................308
Chapter 29
sFlow..................................................................................................................................................312
29.1 sFlow Overview .............................................................................................................................312
29.2 sFlow Port Configuration ...............................................................................................................312
29.2.1 sFlow Collector Configuration ..............................................................................................314
Chapter 30
PPPoE................................................................................................................................................316
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
13
30.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview ..........................................................................................316
30.1.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format ..............................................................................316
30.1.2 Sub-Option Format ..............................................................................................................316
30.1.3 Port State .............................................................................................................................317
30.2 The PPPoE Screen .......................................................................................................................318
30.3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent ..........................................................................................................318
30.3.1 PPPoE IA Per-Port .............................................................................................................320
30.3.2 PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN ............................................................................................322
30.3.3 PPPoE IA for VLAN ............................................................................................................323
Chapter 31
Error Disable .....................................................................................................................................325
31.1 Error Disable Overview ................................................................................................................325
31.1.1 CPU Protection Overview ....................................................................................................325
31.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview .......................................................................................325
31.1.3 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................325
31.2 The Error Disable Screen ..............................................................................................................326
31.3 Error-Disable Status .....................................................................................................................326
31.4 CPU Protection Configuration ......................................................................................................328
31.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration ..............................................................................................330
31.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration .........................................................................................331
Chapter 32
MAC Pinning .....................................................................................................................................333
32.1 MAC Pinning Overview ................................................................................................................333
32.2 MAC Pinning Configuration ...........................................................................................................333
Chapter 33
Private VLAN.....................................................................................................................................336
33.1 Private VLAN Overview ................................................................................................................336
33.1.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................337
Chapter 34
Green Ethernet..................................................................................................................................340
34.1 Green Ethernet Overview .............................................................................................................340
34.2 Configuring Green Ethernet ..........................................................................................................340
Chapter 35
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) ...........................................................................................343
35.1 LLDP Overview .............................................................................................................................343
35.2 LLDP-MED Overview ....................................................................................................................344
35.3 LLDP Screens ...............................................................................................................................345
35.4 LLDP Local Status ........................................................................................................................346
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
14
35.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail ............................................................................................348
35.5 LLDP Remote Status ....................................................................................................................352
35.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail ........................................................................................352
35.6 LLDP Configuration ......................................................................................................................358
35.6.1 LLDP Configuration Basic TLV Setting ...............................................................................361
35.6.2 LLDP Configuration Basic Org-specific TLV Setting ...........................................................362
35.7 LLDP-MED Configuration .............................................................................................................364
35.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy .........................................................................................................366
35.9 LLDP-MED Location ...................................................................................................................368
Chapter 36
Anti-Arpscan .....................................................................................................................................372
36.1 Anti-Arpscan Overview .................................................................................................................372
36.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................372
36.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................372
36.2 Anti-Arpscan Status ......................................................................................................................373
36.3 Anti-Arpscan Host Status .............................................................................................................374
36.4 Anti-Arpscan Trust Host ...............................................................................................................374
36.5 Anti-Arpscan Configure ................................................................................................................375
Chapter 37
BPDU Guard............................................................................... ........... ........... .......... .......................378
37.1 BPDU Guard Overview ................................................................................................................378
37.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................378
37.2 BPDU Guard Status ......................................................................................................................378
37.3 BPDU Guard Configuration ...........................................................................................................379
Chapter 38
OAM ...................................................................................................................................................381
38.1 OAM Overview .............................................................................................................................381
38.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................381
38.2 OAM Status ...................................................................................................................................381
38.2.1 OAM Details ........................................................................................................................383
38.3 OAM Configuration ........................................................................................................................387
38.4 OAM Remote Loopback ................................................................................................................389
Chapter 39
ZULD ..................................................................................................................................................390
39.1 ZULD Overview ............................................................................................................................390
39.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................390
39.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................390
39.2 ZULD Status ..................................................................................................................................391
39.3 ZULD Configuration .....................................................................................................................393
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
15
Chapter 40
Static Route.......................................................................................................................................396
40.1 Static Routing Overview ..............................................................................................................396
40.2 Static Routing ................................................................................................................................396
40.3 Configuring IPv4 Static Routing ..................................................................................................397
40.4 Configuring IPv6 Static Routing ..................................................................................................398
Chapter 41
Policy Routing...................................................................................................................................400
41.1 Policy Route Overview .................................................................................................................400
41.1.1 Benefits ................................................................................................................................400
41.2 Configuring Policy Routing Profile .................................................................................................400
41.2.1 Policy Routing Rule Configuration ......................................................................................401
Chapter 42
Differentiated Services.....................................................................................................................404
42.1 DiffServ Overview ........................................................................................................................404
42.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior ..............................................................................................404
42.1.2 DiffServ Network Example ..................................................................................................404
42.2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing ..............................................................................405
42.2.1 TRTCM - Color-blind Mode ..................................................................................................406
42.2.2 TRTCM - Color-aware Mode ...............................................................................................406
42.3 Activating DiffServ ........................................................................................................................406
42.3.1 Configuring 2-Rate 3 Color Marker Settings .......................................................................408
42.3.2 DSCP Profile ......................................................................................................................410
42.4 DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p Priority Settings ................................................................................... 411
42.4.1 Configuring DSCP Settings .................................................................................................412
Chapter 43
DHCP..................................................................................................................................................413
43.1 DHCP Overview ...........................................................................................................................413
43.1.1 DHCP Modes ......................................................................................................................413
43.1.2 DHCP Configuration Options ...............................................................................................413
43.2 DHCP Configuration ......................................................................................................................413
43.3 DHCPv4 Status ............................................................................................................................414
43.3.1 DHCPv4 Server Status Detail .............................................................................................414
43.4 DHCPv4 Relay .............................................................................................................................415
43.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information .......................................................................................416
43.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile ...................................................................................................416
43.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay ......................................................................................418
43.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure ................................................................................418
43.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example .......................................................................420
43.5 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings .............................................................................................420
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
16
43.5.1 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure ...........................................................................................422
43.5.2 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs ...............................................................................423
43.6 DHCPv6 Status ............................................................................................................................424
43.7 DHCPv6 Information .....................................................................................................................425
43.8 DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation ............................................................................................................426
43.9 DHCPv6 Relay ..............................................................................................................................428
Chapter 44
VRRP..................................................................................................................................................430
44.1 VRRP Overview ...........................................................................................................................430
44.2 VRRP Status .................................................................................................................................431
44.3 VRRP Configuration .....................................................................................................................431
44.3.1 IP Interface Setup ...............................................................................................................431
44.3.2 VRRP Parameters ..............................................................................................................433
44.3.3 Configuring VRRP Parameters ............................................................................................433
44.3.4 Viewing VRRP Summary .....................................................................................................434
44.4 VRRP Configuration Examples ....................................................................................................435
44.4.1 One Subnet Network Example ...........................................................................................435
44.4.2 Two Subnets Example .........................................................................................................436
Chapter 45
Load Sharing.....................................................................................................................................439
45.1 Load Sharing Overview ................................................................................................................439
45.2 Configuring Load Sharing .............................................................................................................439
Chapter 46
ARP Setup .........................................................................................................................................441
46.1 ARP Overview ..............................................................................................................................441
46.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................441
46.1.2 ARP Learning Mode ............................................................................................................441
46.2 ARP Setup ....................................................................................................................................443
46.2.1 ARP Learning .....................................................................................................................443
46.2.2 Static ARP ...........................................................................................................................445
Chapter 47
Maintenance......................................................................................................................................447
47.1 The Maintenance Screen ..............................................................................................................447
47.2 Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................................................448
47.3 Restore a Configuration File .........................................................................................................450
47.4 Backup a Configuration File ..........................................................................................................451
47.5 Erase Running-Configuration ......................................................................................................451
47.6 Save Configuration ........................................................................................................................452
47.7 Reboot System ..............................................................................................................................452
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
17
47.7.1 Load Stacking Default .........................................................................................................452
47.7.2 Load Factory Default ..........................................................................................................453
47.8 Tech-Support ................................................................................................................................453
47.9 FTP Command Line ......................................................................................................................455
47.9.1 Filename Conventions ........................................................................................................455
47.9.2 FTP Command Line Procedure ..........................................................................................456
47.9.3 GUI-based FTP Clients ........................................................................................................456
47.9.4 FTP Restrictions .................................................................................................................457
Chapter 48
Access Control .................................................................................................................................458
48.1 Access Control Overview ..........................................................................................................458
48.1.1 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................458
48.2 The Access Control Main Screen ..................................................................................................458
48.3 About SNMP ...............................................................................................................................459
48.3.1 SNMP v3 and Security ........................................................................................................460
48.3.2 Supported MIBs .................................................................................................................460
48.3.3 SNMP Traps ........................................................................................................................461
48.3.4 Configuring SNMP ............................................................................................................465
48.3.5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group .........................................................................................466
48.3.6 Enabling/Disabling Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port ........................................................467
48.3.7 Configuring SNMP User ...................................................................................................469
48.4 Setting Up Login Accounts ..........................................................................................................471
48.5 SSH Overview ...............................................................................................................................472
48.6 How SSH works ............................................................................................................................473
48.7 SSH Implementation on the Switch ...............................................................................................474
48.7.1 Requirements for Using SSH ...............................................................................................474
48.8 Introduction to HTTPS ...................................................................................................................474
48.9 HTTPS Example ...........................................................................................................................475
48.9.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ..................................................................................475
48.9.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages ......................................................................................477
48.9.3 The Main Screen .................................................................................................................478
48.10 Service Access Control ............................................................................................................479
48.11 Remote Management .............................................................................................................480
Chapter 49
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................482
49.1 Diagnostic ....................................................................................................................................482
Chapter 50
System Log .......................................................................................................................................485
50.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................485
50.2 System Log ...................................................................................................................................485
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
18
Chapter 51
Syslog Setup.....................................................................................................................................486
51.1 Syslog Overview ...........................................................................................................................486
51.2 Syslog Setup ................................................................................................................................486
Chapter 52
Cluster Management ........................................................................................................................489
52.1 Clustering Management Status Overview ....................................................................................489
52.2 Cluster Management Status .........................................................................................................490
52.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management ................................................................................491
52.3 Clustering Management Configuration ........................................................................................493
Chapter 53
MAC Table .........................................................................................................................................495
53.1 MAC Table Overview ....................................................................................................................495
53.2 Viewing the MAC Table .................................................................................................................496
Chapter 54
IP Table ..............................................................................................................................................498
54.1 IP Table Overview ........................................................................................................................498
54.2 Viewing the IP Table ......................................................................................................................499
Chapter 55
ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................500
55.1 ARP Table Overview ....................................................................................................................500
55.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................500
55.2 The ARP Table Screen .................................................................................................................500
Chapter 56
Routing Table....................................................................................................................................502
56.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................502
56.2 Viewing the Routing Table Status .................................................................................................502
Chapter 57
Path MTU Table .................................................................................................................................503
57.1 Path MTU Overview .....................................................................................................................503
57.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table .........................................................................................................503
Chapter 58
Configure Clone................................................................................................................................504
58.1 Configure Clone ...........................................................................................................................504
Table of Contents
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
19
Chapter 59
IPv6 Neighbor Table..........................................................................................................................508
59.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview .....................................................................................................508
59.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table ..................................................................................................508
Chapter 60
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................510
60.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................510
60.2 Switch Access and Login .............................................................................................................. 511
60.3 Switch Configuration .....................................................................................................................513
Appendix A Common Services ........................................................................................................514
Appendix B IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................517
Appendix C Customer Support ........................................................................................................526
Appendix D Legal Information .........................................................................................................533
Index ..................................................................................................................................................539
20
PART I
User’s Guide
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
21
CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch.
1.1 Introduction
Your Switch is a layer 2+, Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) switch with two power slots for hot-swappable
RPS300 or RPS600-HP power modules. The Switch provides four SFP or SFP+ slots for uplink. By
integrating router functions, the Switch performs wire-speed layer-3 routing in addition to layer-2
switching.
This User’s Guide covers the following models: GS3700-24, GS3700-24HP, GS3700-48, GS3700-
48HP, XGS3700-24, XGS3700-24HP, XGS3700-48, and XGS3700-48HP.
With its built-in web configurator, including the ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Neighbor Management
feature (Section 5.4 on page 49), viewing, managing and configuring the Switch and its
neighboring devices is easy. In addition, the Switch can also be managed via Telnet, any terminal
emulator program on the console port, or third-party SNMP management.
In addition, Z yXEL offers a proprietary software program called Z yXEL One Network (Z ON) Utility, it
is a utility tool that assists you to set up and maintain network devices in a more simple and
efficient way. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC. For more
information on ZON Utility see Section 5.3 on page 49.
See the datasheet for a full list of software features available on the Switch.
Table 1 Switch Comparison Table
PORT/SWITCH DETAILS GS3700-
24 GS3700-
24HP GS3700-
48 GS3700-
48HP XGS3700
-24 XGS3700
-24HP XGS3700
-48 XGS3700
-48HP
24 10/100/1000Base-T
Ethernet ports
48 10/100/1000Base-T
Ethernet ports
4 1GbE SFP slots
4 10GbE SFP+ slots
Supports IEEE 802.3af and
IEEE 802.3at PoE standards
Supports IEEE 802.3az EEE
Energy Efficient Ethernet
(EEE)
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
22
1.1.1 Bridging Example
In this example the Switch connects different company departments (RD and Sales) to the
corporate backbone. It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network
bottlenecks. All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high-speed department servers via
the Switch. You can provide a super-fast uplink connection by using the optional 10 Gigabit uplink
module on the Switch.
Figure 1 Bridging Application
1.1.2 High Performance Switching Example
The Switch is ideal for connecting two geographically dispersed networks that need high bandwidth.
In the following example, a company uses the optional 10 Gigabit uplink modules to connect the
headquarters to a branch office network. Within the headquarters network, a company can use
trunking to group several physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. Trunking can be used
if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize a high-speed,
but more costly, single-port link.
Backbone
RD Sales
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
23
Figure 2 High Performance Switching
1.1.3 Gigabit Ethernet to the Desktop
The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks which demand high bandwidth for a group of
heavy tr affic users. You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch’s port or connect
other switches to the Switch. Use the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module to provide high speed
access to a data server and the Internet. The uplink module supports a fiber-optic connection which
alleviates the distance limitations of copper cabling.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server and access the
Internet. To expand the network, simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers,
computers, print servers and so on.
Figure 3 Gigabit to the Desktop
1.1.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Example
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a ph ysical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups. With VLAN, a station cannot
directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group(s) unless such traffic first goes
through a router.
HQ
Branch
10 Gbps
Trunk
Internet
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
24
For more information on VLANs, refer to Chapter 7 on page 101.
1.1.4.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain, thus increasing network
performance by reducing broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding,
moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server. In the
following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1. Ports can
belong to other VLAN groups too.
Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example
1.1.5 IPv6 Support
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses. At the time of writing, the Switch supports the following features.
• Static address assignment and stateless auto-configuration
• Neighbor Discovery Protocol (a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices in a network)
• Remote Management using ping SNMP, telnet, HTTP and FTP services
• ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions, such
as "ping”
• IPv4/IPv6 dual stack; the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time
• DHCPv6 client and relay
• Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping and proxy
For more information on IPv6, refer to Appendix B on page 517 and the CLI Reference Guide.
1.2 Ways to Manage the Switch
Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
25
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a
(supported) web browser. See Chapter 4 on page 37.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may
be necessary to configure advanced features. See the CLI Reference Guide.
• FTP. Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore . See
Section 47.9 on page 455.
• SNMP. The device can be monitored and/or managed by an SNMP manager. See Section 48.3 on
page 459.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch
Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more
effectively.
• Change the password . Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configur ation file, you would not have to totally re-configure the S witch. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
26
CHAPTER 2
Hardware Installation and Connection
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch.
2.1 Freestanding Installation
1Make sure the Switch is clean and dry.
2Set the Switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and
the connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
3Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment
of cables and the power cord.
4Remo ve the adhesiv e backing from the rubber feet.
5Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch. These rubber feet help protect
the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking.
Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet
Note: Do NOT block the ventilation holes. Leave space between devices when st ack i ng .
Note: For proper ventilation, allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of clearance at the front and
3.4 inches (8 cm) at the back of the Switch. This is espec ial l y importan t f o r
enclosed rack installations.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
27
2.2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation
steps of how to mount the Switch in a 19-inch rack with the included rack mounting kit.
Note: ZyXEL provides extensible rear mounting brackets (RM400) to install the Switch in
a 21-inch, 23-inch or 24-inch rack. See the RM400 Hardware Installation
Guide.
2.3 Installation Requirements
• Two front mounting brackets (short), two sliding rails and two rear mounting brackets.
• Eight M4 metric screws with large heads and a #2 Philips screwdriver for attaching the brackets
to the Switch.
• Four M4 metric screws with small heads and a #2 Philips screwdriver for attaching the sliding
rails to the Switch.
• Eight M6 metric rack screws and a screwdriver for attaching the Switch (with attached brackets)
to the rack. Rack depth can be from 90 to 120 cm.
Note: Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
2.3.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains. The
maximum weight a bracket can hold is 27 Kg.
• Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all
necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
2.4 Attaching the Brackets to the Switch
Use the M4 screws (smaller than the rack screws) to attach the brackets to the Switch.
1Po sition the smaller front mounting bracket on one si de of the Switch, lining up the four screw holes
on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch.
2Use a #2 Philips screwdriver to install the M4 screws with large heads through the mounting
bracket holes into the Switch.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second front mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch.
4Position a sliding rail on one side at the rear of the Switch, lining up the two screw holes on the
sliding rail with the screw holes on the side of the Switch.
5Use a screwdriver to install the M4 screws with small heads through the sliding rail holes into the
Switch.
6Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second sliding rail on the other side of the Switch.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
28
7Slide the rear bracket along the r ail and set the bracket in place depending on the depth of the rack .
The rear brackets can be used with a 19-inch rack.
You may now mount the Switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.5 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
Use the M6 rack screws (larger than the M4 screws) to mount the S witch with brackets on the r ack.
1Position a front mounting bracket (that is already attached to the Switch) on one side of the rack,
lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes at the front of the rack.
2Use a screwdriver to install the rack screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack.
3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the other front mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
4Position a rear mounting bracket (that is already attached to the Switch) on one side of the rack,
lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes at the rear of the rack.
5Use a screwdriver to install the rack screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack.
6Repeat steps 4 and 5 to attach the other rear mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
Front Bracket
Sliding Rail
Rear Bracket
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
29
2.6 Power Module Installation
There is one power module installed in the first power slot of the Switch by default. See the Power
Module Hardware Installation Guide for how to install a second power module or remove the
power module.
Rear
Front
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
30
CHAPTER 3
Hardware Overview
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the
hardware connections.
3.1 Front Panel Connections
The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch.
Figure 6 Front Panel: GS3700 Series
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
31
Figure 7 Front Panel: XGS3700 Series
The following table describes the ports.
3.1.1 Ethernet Ports
The Switch has 1000Base-T auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports. In 10/100/1000 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet, the speed can be 10Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps. The duplex mode can be both
half or full duplex at 100 Mbps and full duplex only at 1000 Mbps.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100/1000
Mbps) and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI - X) port automatically works with a str aight-through or crossover
Ethernet cable.
3.1.1.1 Default Ethernet Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are:
Table 2 Panel Connections
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
24 or 48 10/
100/1000Base-T
RJ-45 Ethernet
Ports
Connect these ports to a computer, a hub, an Ethernet switch or router.
4 SFP or SFP+
Slots Use Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) or SFP+ transceivers in these ports for fiber-optic
or copper connections to a computer, a hub, an Ethernet switch or router. You can also
insert an SFP+ Direct Attach Copper (DAC) in the SFP+ slot.
RJ-45 out-of-
band
Management
Port
Connect to a computer using an RJ-45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the Switch.
Console Port Only connect this port to your computer (using an RS-232 cable) if you want to configure
the Switch using the command line interface (CLI) via the console po rt.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
32
• Speed: Auto
•Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: Off
• Dual Personality Interface: Fiber-optic module first
3.1.2 SFP/SFP+ Slots
These are four slots for Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) or SFP+ modules, such as an SFP/SFP+
transceiver. The SFP+ (SFP Plus) is an enhanced version of the SFP and supports data rates of 10
Gbps. A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver. Use a transceiver to
connect a fiber-optic cable to the Switch. The Switch does not come with transceivers. You must
use transceivers that comply with the Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Transceiver MultiSource
Agreement (MSA). See the SFF committee’s INF-8074i specificat ion Rev 1.0 for details.
You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to
connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic connectors.
• Type: SFP or SFP+ connection interface
• Connection speed: 1 or 10 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating fiber-optic
module’s connectors.
3.1.2.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a transceiver.
1Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
Figure 8 Transceiver Installation Example
2Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is
functioning properly.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
33
Figure 9 Installed Transceiver
3.1.2.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a transceiver.
1Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
Figure 10 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
2Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
Figure 11 Transceiver Removal Example
3.1.3 Management Port
The 100Base- T Ethernet MGMT (management) port is used for local management. Connect directly
to this port using an Ethernet cable. You can configure the Switch via Te lnet or the web
configurator.
The default IP address of the management port is 192.168.0.1 with a subnet mask of
255.255.255.0.
3.1.4 Console Port
For local management, y ou can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the
following parameters:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 9600 bps
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
34
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Connect the male 9-pin end of the RS-232 console cable to the console port of the S witch. Connect
the female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.
3.2 Rear Panel
The following figures show the rear panels of the Switch. The rear panels contain:
• A slot for a fan module (A)
• Two slots for power modules with power receptacles (B and C)
Figure 12 Rear Panel
3.2.1 Removing and Installing the Fan Module
See the Fan Module Hardware Installation Guide to see how to install the fan module in the
Switch.
3.2.2 Power Connection
Make sure you are using the correct power source and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the
fans.
The Switch uses two power supply modules, one of which is redundant, so if one power module fails
the system can operate on the remaining module.
Connecting the Power
Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it in
a rack.
Note: Use the included power cord for the AC power connection.
1Connect the female end of the power cord to the AC power socket.
2Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet.
Disconnecting the Power
The power input connectors can be disconnected from the power source individually.
C
AB
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
35
1Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2Disconnect the power cord from the AC power socket.
3.3 LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 3 LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR1
(Power 1) Green On The system is receiving power from the power module in the first
power slot.
Off The system is not receiving power from the power module in the first
power slot.
Amber On The power module in the first power slot fails to supply power or its
fan is not functioning at a proper speed.
PWR2
(Power 2) Green On The system is receiving power from the power module in the second
power slot.
Off The system is not receiving power from the power module in the
second power slot.
Amber On The power module in the second power slot fai ls to supply power or its
fan is not functioning at a proper speed.
SYS
(System) Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.
On The system is on and functioning properly.
Off The power is off or the system is not ready or malfunctioning.
ALM
(Alarm) Red On There is a hardware failure, such as high device temperature, wrong
voltage and abnormal fan speed.
Off The system is functioning normally.
MAST
(Master) Green On The Switch is acting as a standalone switch or the mast er in stacking.
Off The Switch is acting as a non-master member in a stack or it is in
standalone mode.
10/100/1000Base-T Ports
1-24 or 1-
48
LNK/ACT
(Left)
Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 10 or 1000 Mbps.
On The port has a successful 10 or 1000 Mbps connection.
Amber Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data 100 Mbps.
On The port has a successful 100 Mbps connection.
Off This link is disconnected or the port is disabled.
PoE 10/100/1000Base-T Ports
1-24 or 1-
48
LNK/ACT
(Left)
Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 10 or 1000 Mbps.
On The port has a successful 10 or 1000 Mbps connection.
Amber Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data 100 Mbps.
On The port has a successful 100 Mbps connection.
Off This link is disconnected or the port is disabled.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
36
1-24 or 1-
48
POE (Right)
Green On Power is supplied to the PoE port.
Off Power is not supplied to the PoE port.
1G SFP Slots
25-28 or
49-52
LNK/ACT
Green
(Right)
Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 1 Gbps.
On The port has a successful 1 Gbps connection.
Off This link is disconnected.
1G/10G SFP+ Slots
25-28 or
49-52
LNK/ACT
Green
(Right)
Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 1 Gbps.
On The port has a successful 1 Gbps connection.
Blue
(Left)
Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data 10 Gbps.
On The port has a successful 10 Gbps connection.
Off This link is disconnected.
STACK ID The LED is showing the Stack ID number of the Switch.
ID 0 means it is a standalone Switch.
MGMT
(Manageme
nt)
Green Blinking The system is transmitting or re ceiving to/from an Ethernet device at
10 Mbps through the MGMT port.
On The MGMT port is connected at 10 Mbps.
Off The MGMT port is not connected at 10 Mbps, to an Ethernet device, or
the port is disabled.
Amber Blinking The system is transmitting or receiving to/from an Ethernet device at
100 Mbps through the MGMT port.
On The MGMT port is connected at 100 Mbps.
Off The MGMT port is not connected at 100 Mbps, to an Ethernet device,
or the port is disabled.
Table 3 LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
37
CHAPTER 4
The Web Configurator
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.
4.1 Introduction
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and
management via Internet browser. Supported browsers at the time of writing are:
•IE 8 or later
• Chrome 34.0.1847.131 or later
• Firefox 29.0.1 or later
•Opera 21.0 or later
• Safari 5.1.7 or later
The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator
you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device . Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default i n
some browsers.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Jav a pe rmission s (en a bled by default).
4.2 System Login
1Start your web browser.
2Type “http://” and the IP address of the Switch (for example, the default management IP address is
192.168.1.1 through an in-band (non-MGMT) port and 192.168.0.1 through the MGMT port) in the
Location or Address field. Press [ENTER]. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to
access this website address.
3The login screen appears. The default username is admin and associated default password is
1234. The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually
entered a time and date in the General Setup screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
38
Figure 13 Web Configurator: Login
4Click OK to view the first web configurator screen.
4.3 The Web Configurator Layout
The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator. This guide
uses the XGS3700-48HP screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Figure 14 The Web Configurator Layout
A - Click the menu items to open submenu links, and then click on a submenu link to open the
screen in the main window.
B, C, D, E, F- These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which
screen you are currently working in.
B - Click this link to update the information in the screen you are viewing currently.
A
G
BCD
EF
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
39
C - Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch’s nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile
memory is saved in the configur ation file from which the S witch booted from and it stays the same
even if the Switch’s power is turned off. See Section 47.6 on page 452 for information on saving
your settings to a specific configuration file.
D - Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch.
E - Click this link to log out of the web configurator.
F - Click this link to display web help pages. The help pages provide descriptions for all of the
configuration screens.
G - Click this link to go to the ZON Neighbor Management screen where y ou can see and man age
neighbor devices learned by the Switch.
In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.
Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING ADVANCED
APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
40
The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
Basic Settings
System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring
information.
General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information
and time settings for the Switch.
Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as
VLAN type, MAC address learning, GARP and priority queues.
IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address, subnet mask
(necessary for Switch management) and set up to 128 IP routing domains.
Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed, flow control an d priority
settings for individual Switch ports.
PoE Setup For PoE model(s).
This link takes you to a screen where you can set priorities, PoE power-up settings and
schedule so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Interface Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can create IPv6 interfaces on the Switch.
IPv6 This link takes you to a screen where you can enable an IPv6 interface and configure the
IPv6 settings on the Switch.
Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can view and configure stacking system for the
Switch.
DNS This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DNS (domain name server) IP
addresses.
Advanced Application
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q VLAN
(depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu) . You can also configure a
protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens.
Static MAC
Forwarding This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port.
These static MAC addresses do not age out.
Static Multicast
Forwarding This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses
for port(s). These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out.
Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
Spanning Tree
Protocol This link t akes yo u to screens w here you ca n configure the RSTP/MRSTP/MSTP to prevent
network loops.
Bandwidth Control This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum ba ndwidth allowed on a
port.
Broadcast Storm
Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters.
Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to
another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without
interference.
Link Aggregation This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one
logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Port
Authentication This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802.1x port authentication
as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch.
Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the
maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port.
Time Range This link takes you to a screen where you can configure time range for time-oriented
features like Classifier.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
41
Classifier This link takes you to screens where you can configure the Switch to group packets based
on the specified criteria.
Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special
treatment on the grouped packets.
Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue
weights for each port.
VLAN Stacking This link ta kes you to screens where you c a n activate and configure VLAN stacking.
Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features, IGM P
snooping, MLD snooping-proxy and create multicast VLANs.
AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication, authorization and
accounting services via external servers. The external servers can be either RADIUS
(Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) or TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller
Access-Control System Plus).
IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and
ARP packets in your network.
Loop Guard This link tak es yo u to a screen whe re you can confi gure prote ction aga inst ne twork loops
that occur on the edge of your network.
VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the
Switch.
Layer 2 Protocol
Tunneling Th is link takes yo u to a screen where yo u can configure L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling)
settings on the Switch.
sFlow This link takes you to screens where you can configure sFlow settings on the Switch.
PPPoE This link ta kes you to screens where you can configure how the Switch gives a PPPoE
termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify
and authenticate a PPPoE client.
Errdisa ble This link takes you to a screens where you can view errdisable status and configure
errdisable settings in CPU protection, errdisable detect, and errdisable recovery.
MAC Pinning This link takes you to a screen where you can set specific ports to have priority over other
ports in MAC address learning.
Private VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the
Switch.
Green Ethern et This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to reduce port power
consumption.
LLDP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure LLDP settings.
Anti-Arpscan This link takes you to screens where you can enable anti-arpscan on the Switch and
ports, and view the port state. You can also create trusted hosts, view blocked hosts and
unblock them.
BPDU Guard This link takes you to screens where you can enable BPDU guard on the Switch and ports,
and view the port state.
OAM This link takes you to screens where you can enable Ethernet OAM on th e Swit ch, view
the configuration of ports on which Ethernet OAM is enabled and perform remote-
loopback tests.
ZULD This link takes you to screens where you can enable ZULD on a port and configure related
settigns.
IP Application
Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes. A static route
defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP/IP parameters
manually.
Policy Routing This link takes you to screens where you can co nfigure policy routing rules.
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
42
4.3.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator
password. Click Management > Access Control > Logins to display the next screen.
DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ , configure marking rules and
set DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mappings.
DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the D H CP settings.
VRRP This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for your
network.
Load Sharing This link takes you to a screen where you can enable Equal-Cost MultiPath (ECMP) routing
and set the cr iteria the Switch uses to determine the routing path for a packet.
ARP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ARP learning mode on a per-port
basis and create st atic ARP entries which do not age out.
Management
Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file
maintenance as well as reboot the system.
Access Control This link takes you to scree ns where you can change the system login password and
configure SNMP and remote management.
Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can ping IP addresses, run traceroute, test
port(s).
System Log This link ta kes you to a screen where you can view system logs.
Syslog Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can setup system logs and a system log server.
Cluster
Management This link tak es y ou to a s creen where y ou can configur e cluste ring mana gement and view
its status.
MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a
device attach to a port. You can also view what kind of MAC address it is.
IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and VLAN ID of a
device attached to a port.You can also view what kind of device it is.
ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address – IP address
resolution table.
Routing Table This link takes you to a sc reen where you can view the routing table.
Path MTU Ta ble This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IPv6 path MTU table.
Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to (an)other
port(s).
IPv6 Neighbor
Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table.
Port Status This link takes you to a screen where you can view the port statistics.
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
43
Figure 15 Change Administrator Login Password
4.4 Saving Your Configuration
When you are done modifying the settings in a screen, click Apply to save your changes back to
the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost w hen th e S wi tch’s power is turned
off.
Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your
configuration to nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch’s storage that
remains even if the Switch’s power is turned off .
Note: Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session.
4.5 Switch Lockout
You could block yourself (and all others) from using in-band-management (managing through the
data ports) if you do one of the following:
1Delete the management VLAN (default is VLAN 1).
2Delete all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the management
port of the Switch.
3Filter all traffic to the CPU port.
4Disable all ports.
5Misconfigure the text configuration file.
6F orge t the passw ord and/or IP address.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
44
7Prevent all services from accessing the Switch.
8Change a service port number but forget it.
Note: Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch. If you do lock y o urself
out, try using out-of-band management (via the management port) to configure
the Switch.
4.6 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) from the Switch or forget the administrator password, you will
need to reload the factory -def ault configur ation file or reset the S w itch back to the factory defaults.
4.6.1 Reload the Configuration File
Uploading the factory-default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the
factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the
speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit, no parity, one stop
bit and flow control set to none. The password will also be reset to “1234” and the IP address to
192.168.1.1.
To upload the configuration file, do the following:
1Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emu lation software. See Section 3.2 on
page 34 for details.
2Disconnect and reconnect the Switch’s power to begin a session. When you reconnect the Switch’s
power, you will see the initial screen.
3When you see the message “Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds ...” press
any key to enter debug mode.
4Type atlc after the “Enter Debug Mode” message.
5Wait for the “Starting XMODEM upload” message before activating XMODEM upload on your
terminal.
6After a configuration file upload, type atgo to restart the Switch.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
45
Figure 16 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port
The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of
“1234”.
4.7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again
after you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons.
Figure 17 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
4.8 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary
information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen.
Bootbase Version: V1.00 | 12/11/2012 13:49:40
RAM: Size = 524288 Kbytes
DRAM POST: Testing: 524288K
OK
DRAM Test SUCCESS !
ZyNOS Version: V4.10(AAGF.5)b1 | 6/5/2014 20:10:8
Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds.
.....................................
Enter Debug Mode
ras> atlc
Starting XMODEM upload (CRC mode)....
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Total 393216 bytes received.
Erasing..
................................................................
OK
ras> atgo
46
PART II
Technical Reference
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
47
CHAPTER 5
ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and
Port Status
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the screens for System St atus, ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management, Port
Status and Port Details.
5.2 Status
The Status screen displays when you log into the Switch or click Status at the top right corner of
the web configurator. The Status screen displays general device information, system status, and its
IP addresses.
Figure 18 Status
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
48
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 6 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Information
Device Type This field displays the model name of t his Switch.
System Name This field displays the name used to identify the Switch on any network.
Boot Version This field displays the ve rsion number and date of the boot module that is currently on
the Switch .
System Location This field dis p lays the geographic location of your Switch. You can change the setting
in the Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Firmware V ersion This field displa ys the version number and date of the firmw are th e Sw itch i s curren tly
running.
System Time This field displays the current date and time in the UAG. The format is mm-dd-yyyy
hh:mm:ss.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of this Switch. The serial number is used for
device tracking and control.
System Up Time This field displays how long the Switch has been running since it la st restarted or was
turned on.
MAC Address Th is field displays the MAC addresses of the Switch.
Login Timeout This field displays how many minutes a ma nagement sessi on can be left idl e before the
session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again.
Stacking topology
(Stacking mode) Th is field displays whether the current topology is Chain or Ring.
Detail Click this link to go to the Basic Setting > System Info screen to check other
detailed information, such as sys tem res o ur ce us age an d the Switch temperature, fan
speeds or voltage.
IP Address Information
IPv4 Address This field displays the Switch’s current IPv4 address.
Subnet Mask This field displays the Switch’s subnet mask.
Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the Switch’s default gateway.
IP Setup Click the link to go to the Basic Settin g > IP Setup screen.
IPV6 Global Unicast
Address This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 global unicast address.
IPV6 Link-Local
Address This field displays the Switch’s IPv6 link-local address.
IPv6 configuration Click the link to go to the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen.
Device Status and
Quick Configuration This section shows whether a feature is enabled or not on the Swit ch. You can click a
feature’s Setting link to go to the configuration screen for the feature.
Hover your cursor over a red exclamation mark to display information about the
feature.
Note: The Stacking Status field is displayed only on the Switch with stacking support.
Quick Links This section provides the shortcut link to a specific cofiguration screen.
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
49
5.3 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Utility Screen
ZON Utility is a program designed to help you deploy and manage a network more efficiently. It
detects devices automatically and allows you to do basic settings on devices in the network without
having to be near it.
The ZON Utility issues requests via ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP) and in response to the query,
the device responds back with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location,
system and model name in the same broadcast domain. The information is then displayed in the
ZON Utility screen and you can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch
firmware upgrade in it. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a PC.
The following figure shows the ZON Utility screen.
Figure 19 ZON Utility Screen
5.4 ZON Neighbor Management Screen
The ZON Neighbor Management screen allows you to view and manage the Switch’s neighboring
devices more conveniently. It uses Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to discover all neighbor
devices connected to the Switch including non-Zy XEL devices. You can perform tasks on the
neighboring devices like login, reboot (turn the power off and then back on again), and reset to
factory default settings in the Neighbor Management screen. For more information on LLDP, see
Section 35.2 on page 344.
Click Status > Neighbor to see the following screen.
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
50
Figure 20 Status > Neighbor
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 7 Status > Neighbor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local
Port This shows the port of the Switch, on which the neighboring device is discovered.
Desc. This shows the port description of the Switch.
PoE Draw This shows the consumption that the neighboring device connected to this port draws
from the Switch. This allows you to plan and use within the power budget of the
Switch.
Remote
Port This show the number of the neighbor device’s port which is connected to the Switch.
Desc. This shows the description of the neighbor device’s port which is conne cted to the
Switch.
Model This shows the model name of the neighbor device. This field will show “-” for non-
ZyXEL devices.
System Name This shows the system name of the neighbor device.
Location This shows the geographic location of the neighbor device.
Firmware This shows the firmware version of the neighbor device. This field will show “-” for
non-ZyXEL devices.
IP This shows the IP address of the n eighbor device. The IP address is a hyper link that
you can click to log into and manage the neighbor devi ce through it s web confi gur ator.
This field will show “-” for non-ZyXEL devices.
MAC This shows the MAC address of the neighbor device. This field will show “-” for non-
ZyXEL devices.
PWR Cycle Click the Cycle button to turn OFF the power of the neighbor device and turn it back
ON again. A count down button (from 5 to 0) starts.
Note: The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a
powered device (PD).
Note: If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Cycle button is displayed only
on the first device, others will show “-” instead.
Reset to Default Click the Reset button to reset the neighbor device to its factory default settings. A
warning message “Are you sure you want to load factory default?” appears
prompting you to confirm the action. After confirming the action a count down button
(from 5 to 0) starts.
Note: The Switch must support power sourcing (PSE) or the network device is a
powered device (PD).
Note: If multiple neighbor devices use the same port, the Reset button is not available
and will show “-” instead.
Note: You can only reset ZyXEL products.
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
51
5.5 Port Status
This screen displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details. To
view the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens and then the Port Status link
in the Quick Links section of the Status screen to display the Port Status screen as sho wn next.
You can also click Management > Port Status to see the following screen.
Figure 21 Port Status (Standalone mode)
Figure 22 Port Status (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Port Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to c hoose t he slot nu mber
of the Switch in a stack.
Port This identifies the Ethernet port. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and
the second the port number. Click a port number to display the Port Details s cre en (refer
to Figure 23 on page 53).
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
52
5.5.1 Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Port Status screen to display individual port statistics.
Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the
Switch.
Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen.
Link This field displays the speed (such as 100M for 100 Mbps, 1000M for 1000 Mbps, or 10G
for 10 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex). This field displays Down if the port is not
connected to any device.
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displa ys the STP s tate of the port. (See
Section 11.1.3 on page 133 for more information).
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays
STOP.
PD (F or P oE mode ls only) This fiel d displays whether or not a powered device (PD) is allowed to
receive power from the Switch on this port.
LACP This fields displays whether LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) has been enabled on
the port.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this po rt.
RxPkts This field sh ows the number of received frames on this port.
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s This field shows th e transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second.
Rx KB/s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been
up.
Clear Counter Select Port, type a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded
statistical information for that port, or select Any to clear statistics for all ports.
Table 8 Port Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
53
Figure 23 Port Status: Port Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 Port Status: Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Info
Port NO. This field displays the port number you are viewing. In stacking mode, the first number
represents the slot and the second the port number.
Name This field displays the name of the port.
Link This field displays the speed (such as 100M for 100Mbps, 1000M for 1000 Mbps, or 10G
for 10 Gbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex).
State If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port (see
Section 11.1.3 on page 133 for more information).
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays
STOP.
LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.
TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
54
RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port
Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KBs/s This field shows the transmission s p eed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second.
Rx KBs/s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per
second.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.
Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.
Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted.
Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
Unicast This fie ld s hows t he number of good unicast packets received.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.
Control This field shows t he number of control pack ets received (including those with CRC error) but
it does not include the 802.3x Pause packets.
TX Collision
The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting.
Single This is a count of succes sfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by
exactly one collision.
Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by
more than one collision.
Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions. Excessive
collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is
reset.
Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the packets
have already been transmitted.
Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error.
RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check)
error(s).
Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range.
Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short (shorter than 64
octets), in cluding the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64 This field shows t he number of pack ets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets
in length.
65 to 127 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that wer e between
65 and 127 octets in length.
128 to 255 This field shows the numbe r of packets (inc luding bad packets) received that wer e between
128 and 255 octets in length.
Table 9 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 ZON Utility, ZON Neighbor Management and Port Status
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
55
256 to 511 This field shows the numbe r of packets (inc luding bad packets) received that wer e between
256 and 511 octets in length.
512 to 1023 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
512 and 1023 octets in length.
1024 to
1518 This field shows the number of pack ets (includi ng bad packets) receiv ed that were between
1024 and 1518 octets in length.
Giant This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
1519 octets and the maximum frame size.
The maximum frame size varies depending on your Switch model.
Table 9 Port Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
56
CHAPTER 6
Basic Setting
This chapter describes how to configure the Basic Setting screens.
6.1 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting > System Info to display the screen as shown.
You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature, fan speeds and
voltage in this screen.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
57
Figure 24 Basic Setting > System Info (Standalone Mode)
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
58
Figure 25 Basic Setting > System Info (Stacking Mode)
The following table describes the labels in these screens.
Ta ble 10 Basic Setting > System Info (Standalone and Stacking Modes)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes.
Product Model This field displays the product model of the Switch. Use this information when searching for
firmware upgrade or looking for other support information in the website.
ZyNOS F/W
Version This field displays the version number of the Swi tch 's current firmw are including the date
created.
Ethernet
Address This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the Switch.
CPU Utilization CPU utilization quantifies how busy the system is. Current (%) displays the current
percentage of CPU utilization.
Memory
Utilization Memory Utilization shows how much DRAM memory is available and in use. It also displays
the current percentage of memory utilization.
Name This field displays the name of memory pool.
Total This field displays the total number of bytes in this memory pool.
Used This field displays the number of bytes being used in this memory pool.
Utilization This field displays the pe rcentage (%) of memory being used in this memory pool.
Hardware Monitor (Standalone Mode)
Temperature
Unit The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the
temperature rises above the threshold. Y ou may choose the temperature unit (Centigrade or
Fahrenheit) in this field.
Temperature BOARD, MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch
printed circuit board.
Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor.
MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
59
6.1.1 System Information Stacking Hardware Monitor
Click a slot number in the System Information screen to display more detailed hardware
information on a Switch.
MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this senso r.
Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
Fan Speed
(RPM) A properly functioning fan is an essential component (along with a sufficiently ventilated,
cool oper ating environmen t) in order for the device to stay within the te mperature thre shold.
Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below
the threshold shown.
Current This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MAX This field displays this fan's maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MIN This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
"<41" is displayed for speeds too small to measure (under 2000 RPM).
Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.
Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning abo ve th e minimum speed. Error indicates that
this fan is functi oning below the mi nimum speed.
Voltage(V) The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if
the voltage fall s out of the tolerance range.
Current This is the current voltage reading.
MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.
MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.
Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works.
Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point;
otherwise Error is displayed.
Power Source The power source of the Switch has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the
power source falls out of the normal status.
Status Normal indicates that the power source is within normal status. Error indicates that the
power source is not within normal status. Absent indicates that y ou do not i nser t the powe r
module. Present indicates that you insert the power module, but there is no available
power.
Hardware Status (Stacking Mode)
Slot This number identifies the Switch in the st ack. Click the number to see more detailed
information on the Switch.
Name This is the system name of the Switch in the stack.
Voltage This shows if the power suppl y voltage sensor is withi n normal tolerance range.
Temperature This shows if the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board are within normal
tolerance range.
Fan This shows if the fan sensors are within normal tolerance range.
Power Source This shows whether the power sources are within normal status or not. Error indicates that
the power source is not within normal status. Otherwise, Normal is displayed. You can click
the index number in the Slot field to view the details.
Ta ble 10 Basic Setting > System Info (Standalone and Stacking Modes) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
60
Figure 26 Basic Setting > System Info > Hardware Monitor (Stacking Mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Basic Setting > System Info > Hardware Monitor (Stacking Mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SLOT This number identifies the Switch in the stack.
Temperature
Unit The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the
temperature rises above the threshold. You may choose the temperature unit (Centigrade
or Fahrenheit) in this field.
Temperature BOARD, PHY, CPU and MAC refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch
printed circuit board.
Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor.
MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.
Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
Fan Speed
(RPM) A properly functioning fan is an essential compon ent (along with a sufficiently ventilated,
cool operating environment) in order for the device to stay within the temperature
threshold. Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed
falls below th e threshold shown.
Current This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
MAX This field displays this fan's maximum speed meas ured in RPM.
MIN This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in RPM. “<41" is displayed for
speeds too small to measure (under 2000 RPM).
Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.
Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed. Error indicates
that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
61
6.2 General Setup
Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time. Click Basic
Setting > General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 27 Basic Setting > General Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
V oltage (V) The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if
the voltage falls out of the tolerance range.
Current This is the current voltage reading.
MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.
MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.
Threshold This field dis pla ys th e percen tage tol er a nce o f the voltage with which the S wit ch st ill work s.
Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point;
otherwise Error is displayed.
Power Source The power source of the Switch has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if
the power source falls out of the normal status.
Status Normal indicates that the power source is within normal status. Error indicates that the
power source is not within normal status. Absent indicates that you do not insert the
power module. Present indicates that you insert the power module, but there is no
available power.
Table 11 Basic Setting > System Info > Hardware Monitor (Stacking Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 12 Basic Setting > General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name Type a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to 64
printable ASCII characters; spaces are allowed.
Location Ty pe the geographic location of your Switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII
characters; spaces are allowed.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
62
Contact Person's
Name Type the name of the person in charge of this Switch. You can use up to 32 printable
ASCII characters; spaces are allowed.
Use Time Server
when Bootup Type the time service protocol that your timeserver uses. Not all time servers support all
protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main
differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the Switch displays the day, month,
year and time with no time zone adjustme nt. When you use this format, it is
recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds
since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter th e time manually. Each time you turn on the Switch,
the time and date will be reset to 1970-1-1 0:0.
Time Server IP
Address Type the IP address of your timeserver. The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to
60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then t his screen will appear
locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
New Time
(hh:min:ss) Enter the new tim e in hour, minute and sec ond format. The new time th en appears in the
Current Time field after you click Apply.
Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu.
New Date (yyyy-
mm-dd) Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the
Current Date field after you click Apply.
Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as
GMT, Greenwich Mean Time ) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Daylight Saving
Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their
clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight
Saving Time. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. S o i n the United States yo u would select Second, Sunday, March and 2:00.
Daylig ht Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the
time zones in the Europe an Unio n start usin g Dayligh t Saving Ti me at the s ame moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March
and the last field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select
2:00 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight
Saving Time. The time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time
zone in the United States st ops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the
United States you would select First, Sunday, November and 2:00.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of
the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M . GMT or UTC). So in the European Union y ou would select Last, Sunday,
October and the last field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you
would select 2:00 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC
(GMT+1).
Ta ble 12 Basic Setting > General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
63
6.3 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a ph ysical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user on the same network.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Note: VLAN is unidirecti onal; it only governs outgoing traffic.
See Chapter 7 on page 101 for information on port-based and 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
6.4 Switch Setup
Click Basic Setting > Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. The
VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q or Port Based in the VLAN
Type field in this screen (in Standalone mode). Refer to the chapter on VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are don e
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 12 Basic Setting > General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
64
Figure 28 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 13 Basic Setting > Switch Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type
(Standalone
mode only)
Choose 802.1Q or Port Based. The VLAN Se tup screen changes depending on whether
you choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Ba sed VLAN type in this screen. See Chapter 7 on
page 101 for more information. The Switch does not have port-based VLAN available in
stacking mode (Active is enabled in Basic Setting > Stacking > Configuration), so
this field does not display in stacking mode.
Bridge Control
Protocol
Transparency
Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols (STP, for example).
You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen.
MAC Address
Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address learning to
occur on a port, the port must be active.
Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC
addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
ARP Aging Time
Aging Time Enter a time from 60 to 1000000 seconds. This is how long dynamically learned ARP
entries remain in the ARP table before they age out (and must be relearned). The setting
here applies to ARP entries which are newly added in the ARP table after you click Apply.
GARP Timer : Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join me ssage
using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all
registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values. See Chapter 7 on page 101 for more background
information.
Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port
has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535
milliseconds; the default is 200 milliseconds. See Chapter 7 on page 101 for more
background information.
Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each
port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join
Timer; the default is 600 milliseconds.
Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave
Timer.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
65
6.5 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device, the default domain name server
and add IP domains.
6.5.1 IP Interfaces
The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP
address is 192.168.1.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
On the Switch, an IP address is not bound to any physical ports. Since each IP address on the
Switch must be in a separate subnet, the configured IP address is also known as IP interface (or
routing domain). In addition, this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without
additional routers.
You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for
the domains do not overlap. To change the IP address of the Switch in a routing domain, simply add
a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-la yer frame that contains
bits to define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the
ingress port. Use the following fields to configure the pri ority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels . On the Switch, tr affic assigned
to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard
(which incorporates the 802.1p).
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in
delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitiv e traffic such as SNA (S ys tems Network
Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important
business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are
allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turne d off or loses po wer, so use the Save link on the top n avigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 13 Basic Setting > Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
66
You can configure up to 128 IP domains which are used to access and manage the Switch from the
ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s).
Note: You must configure a VLAN first. Each VLAN can only have one management IP
address.
Figure 29 Basic Setting > IP Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.5.2 IP Status Details
Use this screen to view IP status details. Click a number in the Index column in the IP Status
screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 30 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Status Details: Static
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 14 Basic Setting > IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domai n.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain.
VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch.
Type This shows whether this IP address is dynamically assigned from a DHCP server or
manually assigned (Static).
Renew Click this to renew the dynamic IP address.
Release Click this to release the dynamic IP address.
Ta ble 15 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Status Details: Static
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type This shows whether ths IP address is dynamically assigned from a DHCP server or manually
assigned (Static or DHCP).
VID This is the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs.
IP Address This is the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192.168.1.1.
IP Subnet Mask This is the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
67
Figure 31 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Status Details: DHCP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.5.3 IP Configuration
Use this screen to configure the default gateway device, the default domain name server and add IP
domains.
Ta ble 16 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Status Details: DHCP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type This shows whether ths IP address is dynamically assigned from a DHCP server or manually
assigned (Static or DHCP).
VID This is the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs.
IP Address This is the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192.168.1.1.
IP Subnet Mask This is the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Lease Time This displays the length of time in seconds that this interfac e can use the current dynamic
IP address from the DHCP server.
Rene w Time This displays the length of time from the leas e start that the Switch will request to renew its
current dynamic IP address from the DHCP server.
Rebind Time This displays the length of time from the lease start that the Switch will request to get any
dynamic IP address from the DHCP server.
Lease Time
Start This displays the date and time that the current dynamic IP address assignment from the
DHCP server began. You should configure date and time in Basic Setting > General
Setup.
Lease Time End This displays the date and time that the current dynamic IP address assignmen t from the
DHCP server will end. You should configure date and time in Basic Setting > General
Setup.
Default Gateway This displays the IP address of the default gateway assigned by the DHCP server. 0.0.0.0
means no gateway is assigned.
DNS Server This displays the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS servers assign ed by the
DHCP server. 0.0.0.0 means no DNS server is assigned.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
68
Figure 32 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 17 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Gateway Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example 192.168.1.254.
Default
Management Specify which traffic flow (In-Band or Out-of-band) the Switch is to send packets
originating from itself (such as SNMP traps) or packets with unknown so urce.
Select Out-of-band to have the Switch send the packets to the management port labelled
MGMT. This means that device(s) connected to the other port(s) do not receive these
packets.
Select In-Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the management
port (labelled MGMT) to which connected device(s) do not receive these packets.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Out-of-band Management IP Address
Use these fields to set the settings for the out-of-band management port.
IP Address Enter the out-of-band management IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation.
For example, 192.168.0.1.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation, for example,
255.255.255.0.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
69
6.6 Port Setup
Use this screen to configure Switch port settings. Click Basic Setting > Port Setup in the
navigation panel to display the configuration screen.
Default
Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for
example, 192.168.0.254
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
IP Interface
Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the Switch.
DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address,
subnet mask, a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address
automatically.
Static IP
Address Select this option if you don’t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address
information to the Switch. Y ou need to fill in the following fields when you select this option.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1.
This is the IP address of the Switch in an IP routing domain.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal notation, for example,
255.255.255.0.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domai n.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain.
VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch.
Type This field displays the type of IP address status.
Select an entry’s check box t o select a specific en try. Otherwise, se lect the check bo x in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Note: Deleting all IP subnets locks you out of the Switch.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 17 Basic Setting > IP Setup > IP Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
70
Figure 33 Basic Setting > Port Setup (GS3700 Series)
Figure 34 Basic Setting > Port Setup (XGS3700 Series: Standalone mode)
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
71
Figure 35 Basic Setting > Port Setup (XGS3700 Series: Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 18 Basic Setting > Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port This is the port index number. In stacking mode, the first number is the slot ID and the
second is the port number. * means all ports.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the co mmon settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port
must be enabled for data transmission to occur.
Name Type a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can enter up to 64 alpha-numerical
characters.
Note: Due to space limitations, the port name may be truncated in some web configurator
screens.
Type This field displays 10M /100M/1000M for a 1000Base-T connection, 1000M for a
1000Base-X connection, and 10G for a 10 Gigabit connection (available only on the Switch
that has a 10 Gigabit interface).
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
72
6.7 PoE
Note: The PoE function and the following screens are available for models ending in “HP”
only.
Speed/Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port. The choices
are Auto, 10M/Half Duplex, 10M/Full Duplex, 100M/Half Duplex and 100M/Full
Duplex for a 100Base-T connection. 1000M/Full Duplex is supported by both 1000Base-
T and 1000Base-X connections. 10G/Full Duplex is supported by the 10 Gigabit Ethernet
connections on the Switch that has a 10 Gigabit interface.
Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port
automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer
automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does
not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the Switch determines the connection
speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the Switch’s
auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when
making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are
the same in order t o connect.
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory
causing packet discards and frame losses. Fl ow Contro l is used to r egulate transmi ssion of
signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The Switch uses IEEE 802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control
in half duplex mode.
IEEE 802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending
port, causing it to tempor arily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers
fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal
to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to
temporarily stop sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag. See
Priority Queue Assignment in Table 13 on page 64 for more information.
BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port. You must activate bridging control
protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen fi rst.
Select Peer to process any BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received on this port.
Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port.
Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port.
Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU.
Media Type On the Switch that has a 10 Gigabit interface, such as t he SFP+ slot, you can insert either
an SFP+ transceiver or an SFP+ Direct Attach Copper (DAC). An SFP+ Direct Attach Copper
(DAC) is an SFP+ housing tha t has no optical module but uses a fixed-length passive copper
cable assembly, which reduces cost and power significantly.
Select the media type (sfp_plus or dac10g) of the SFP+ module th at is attached to the 10
Gigabit interface.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done co nfiguring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 18 Basic Setting > Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
73
The Switch supports both the IEEE 802.3af P ower over Ethernet (PoE) and IEEE 802.3at High Power
over Ethernet (PoE) standards. The Switch is Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) because it provides
a source of power via its Ethernet ports, and each device that receives power through an Ethernet
port is a Powered Device (PD).
In the figure below, the IP camer a and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch. Aside
from minimizing the need for cables and wires, PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby
electric outlet to power up devices.
Figure 36 Powered Device Examples
You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs.
Note: The PoE devices t h at su pp l y or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables
must all be completely indoors.
To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch, click Basic Setting >
PoE Setup.
Figure 37 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (Standalone mode)
PSE
PD PD
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
74
Figure 38 Basic Setting > PoE Setup (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 19 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Status
PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch, whether it is in
Classification or Consumption mode.
Total Power (W) This field di splays the total powe r the Switch can provide to the connected P oE-enabled
devices on the PoE ports.
Consuming Power
(W) This field disp lays the total amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the
connected PoE-enabled devices.
Allocated Power (W) This field displays the total amount of power the Switch has reserved for PoE after
negotiating with the connected PoE device(s).
Consuming Power (W) can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated
Power (W).
Remaining Power
(W) This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE.
Note: The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply power
to a PoE device, even if the PoE device needs less than 16 W.
Port (Stan dalone
and stacking mode) This is the port index number.
State This field shows which ports can receive power from the Switch. Y ou can set this in the
Basic Setting > PoE Setup screen.
•Disable - The PD connected to this port cannot get power.
•Enable - The PD connected to this port can receive power.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
75
6.7.1 PoE Time Range Status
Use this screen to see whether PoE is scheduled to be enabled on a port. Click the PoE Time
Range Status link in the Basic Setting > PoE Status screen. The following screen opens.
Figure 39 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Status
Class This shows the power classification of the PD.
This is a number from 0 to 4, where each value represents a range of power (W) and
current (mA) that the PD requires to function. The ranges are as follows.
• Class 0 - Default, 0.44 to 12.94
• Class 1 - Optional, 0.44 to 3.84
• Class 2 - Optional, 3.84 to 6.49
• Class 3 - Optional, 6.49 to 12.95
• Class 4 - R eserved (PSEs classify as Class 0) in a switch that supports IEEE 802.3af
only. Optional, 12.95 to 25.50 in a switch that supports IEEE 802.3at.
PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total P oE power budget on the
Switch, you can se t the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with
higher priority first.
•Critical has the highest priority.
•High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are
served.
•Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports
are served.
Power-Up
(Standalone mode) This field displays the PoE standard the Switch uses to provide power on this port.
Consuming Power
(mW) This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch
on this port.
Max Power (mW) This field displays the maximum amo unt of power the PD could use from the Switch on
this port.
Ta ble 19 Basic Setting > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
76
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.7.2 PoE Setup
Use this screen to set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs.
Click Basic Setting > PoE Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 40 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup (Standalone mode)
Ta ble 20 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Time Range Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the number of the port on the Switch.
Time Range This field di splays the name of th e schedule which is applied to the port. PoE is en abled
at the specified time/date.
state This field displays whether the port can receive power from the Switch (In) or not
(Out) currently.
It shows - if there is no schedule applied to the port.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
77
Figure 41 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 21 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use.
•Classification - Select this if you wan t the Switch to reserve the Max P ower (mW)
to each PD according to the power classification of the PD. If the total power supply
available is not enough to supply all connected PDs, then PDs with lower priority do
not get power to function.
•Consumption - Select this if you want the Switch to manage the total power
supply so that each connected PD gets a resource. However, the power allocated by
the Switch may be less than the Max Power (mW) of the PD. PDs with higher
priority also get more power than those with lower priority levels.
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
Stacking mode) This is the port index number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch).
PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port.
If left unchecked, the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
78
Note: If the priority settings for two or more PoE ports are the same and the power
budget is not enough, the ports will shut down randomly. We strongly recommend
you set the priority for each PoE port to make sure the high priority ports get
power.
PD Priority This field is not available for the SFP or SFP+ ports.
When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total P oE power budget on the
Switch, you can se t the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with
higher priority.
Select Critical to give the PD connected to this port the highest priority.
Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical
priority ports are served.
Select Low to set the S witch to assign the remain ing power to the port after all critical
and high priority ports are served.
Power-Up
(Standalone mode) Set how the Switch provides power to a connected PD at power-up.
802.3af - the Switch follows the IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet standard to supply
power to the connected PDs during power-up.
Legacy - the Switch can provide power to the connected PDs that require high inrush
currents at power-up. Inrush current is the maximum, instantan eous in put curre nt
drawn by the PD when first turned on.
Pre-802.3at - the Switch initially offers power on the port according to the IEEE
802.3af standard, and then switches to support the IEEE 802.3at standard within 75
milliseconds after a PD is connected to the port. Select this option if the Switch is
performing 2-event Layer-1 classifica tion (PoE+ hardware classification) or the
connected PD is NOT performing Layer 2 power classification using Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
802.3at - the Switch supports the IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet standard
and can supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port. IEEE 802.3at is also known as
PoE+ or PoE Plus. An IEEE 802.3at compatible device is referred to as Type 2. Power
Class 4 (High Power) can only be used by Type 2 devices. If the connected PD requires
a Class 4 current when it is turned on, it will be powered up in this mode.
Max Power (mW) Set the maximum amount of power (from 1000 to 33000) the PD could use from the
Switch on this port. Otherwise, leave the field blank to allow the connected PD to use
power up to 33W in Consumption mode and 30W in Classification mode.
Time Range
(Standalone mode) Select a pre-defined schedule (created using the Advanced Application > Time
Range screen) to control when the Switch enables PoE to provide power on the port.
If you leave this field blank, PoE is disabled on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 21 Basic Setting > PoE Setup > PoE Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
79
Note: The total power available varies by Switch. Use t he show pwr command to see the
total power av ailabl e for y our S witch. The number of ports that can be powered by
PoE is the (total power av ailable) / (maximum power av ailable per port).
In Consumption mode the power available per port is from 1 to 33 watts.
Configure the maximum power av ailable per port in the Max Power (mW) field in
Basic Setting > PoE Status > PoE Setup.
In Classification mode the power available per port is from 1 to 30 watts. The
maximum power available per port depends on the the power classification of the
connected PD - see the Class field in Basic Setting > PoE Status > PoE Setup.
6.8 Interface Setup
An IPv6 address is configured on a per-interface ba sis. The interface can be a physical interface (for
example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, a VLAN). The Switch supports the
VLAN interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Use this screen to set IPv6 interfaces on which you can configure an IPv6 address to access and
manage the Switch. Click Basic Setting > Interface Setup in the navigation panel to displa y the
configuration screen.
Figure 42 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 22 Basic Setting > Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports the
VLAN interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification num ber (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
Note: To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same ID
number in the Advanced Setup > VLAN screens.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This save s your changes to the S w it ch ’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these ch ange s
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to th e non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
80
6.9 IPv6
Use this screen to view the IPv6 interface status and configure Switch’s management IPv6
addresses. See Appendix B on page 517 for more information about IPv6.
Click Basic Setting > IPv6 in the navigation panel to display the IPv6 status screen as shown
next.
Figure 43 Basic Setting > IPv6 Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.9.1 IPv6 Interface Status
Use this screen to view a specific IPv6 interface status and detailed information. Click an interface
index number in the Basic Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
Interface Type This field displays the type of interface.
Interface ID This field displays the identification number of the interface.
Interface This field displays the interface’s descriptive name which is generated automatically by the
Switch. The name is from a combination of the interface type and ID number.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 22 Basic Setting > Interface Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 23 Basic Setting > IPv6 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an IPv6 interface. Click on an index number to view
more interface details.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
81
Figure 44 Basic Setting > IPv6 Interface Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 24 Basic Setting > IPv6 Interface Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
MTU Size This field di splays the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IPv6 packets on this
interface.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Bucket
Size
This field displays the maximum number of ICMPv6 error messages which are allowed to
transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error messages are
suppressed.
ICMPv6 Rate
Limit Error
Interval
This field displays the time period (in mill iseconds) during which ICMPv6 error messages of
up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Stateless
Address
Autoconfig
This field displays whether the Switch’s interface can automatically generate a link-local
address via stateless autoconfiguration.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
82
Link Local
Address This field displays the Switch’ s link -l ocal IP address and prefix generate d by the interface . It
also shows whether the IP address is preferred, which means it is a valid address and can
be used as a sender or receiver address.
Global Unicast
Address(es) This field displays the Switch’s global unicast address to identify this interface.
Joined Group
Address(es) This field displays the IPv6 multicast addresses of groups the Switch’s interface joins.
ND DAD Active This field displays whether Neighbor Discovery (ND) Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is
enabled on the interface.
Number of DAD
Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends for this
interface.
NS-Interval
(millisecond) This field displays the time interval (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are re-
sent for this interface.
ND Reachable
Time
(millisecond)
This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for this
interface.
DHCPv6 Client
Active This field displays whether the Switch acts as a DHCPv6 client to get an IPv6 address from
a DHCPv6 server.
Identity
Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through
which the server and clien t can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be
associated with exactly one interface.
IA Type The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA
means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity
association for temporary addresses.
IAID Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information.
T1 This field displays the DHCPv6 T1 timer. After T1, the Switch sends the DHCPv6 server a
Re new messag e.
An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6
server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client co ntacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire.
T2 This field displays the DHCPv6 T2 timer. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not
respond, the Switch sends a Rebind message to any available server.
State This field displays the state of the TA. It shows
•Active when the Switch obtains addresses from a DHCpv6 server and the TA is created.
•Renew when the TA’s address lifetime expires and the Switch sends out a Renew
message.
•Rebind when the Switch doesn’t receive a response from the original DHCPv6 server
and sends out a Rebind message to another DHCPv6 server.
SID This field displays the DHCPv6 server’s unique ID.
Address This field displays the Switch’s global address which is assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Preferred
Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address remains preferred.
Valid
Lifetime This field displays how long (in seconds) that the global address is valid.
DNS This field displays the DNS server address assigned by the DHCPv6 server.
Domain List This field displays the address record when the Switch queries the DNS server to resolve
domain names.
Restart DHCPv6
Client Click Click Here to send a new DHCP request to the DHCPv6 server and update the IPv6
address and DNS inf ormation for this interface.
Ta ble 24 Basic Setting > IPv6 Interface Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
83
6.9.2 IPv6 Configuration
Use this screen to configure IPv6 settings on the Switch. Click the IPv6 Configuration link in the
Basic Setting > IPv6 screen. The following screen opens.
Figure 45 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.9.3 IPv6 Global Setup
Use this screen to configure the global IPv6 settings. Click the link next to IPv6 Global Setup in
the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Ta ble 25 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Global Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the global IPv6 settings on the
Switch.
IPv6 Interface Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can enable an IPv6 interface on the Switch.
IPv6 Addressing
IPv6 Link-Local
Address Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 link-local address for
an interface.
IPv6 Global
Address Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 global address for an
interface.
IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery
IPv6 Neighb or
Discovery Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 neighbor discovery
settings.
IPv6 Router
Discovery Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the IPv6 router discovery
settings.
IPv6 Prefix Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the Switch’s IPv6 prefix list.
IPv6 Neighbor Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the
Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table.
DHCPv6 Client Setup Click the link to go to a screen where you can configure the Switch DHCP settings.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
84
Figure 46 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.9.4 IPv6 Interface Setup
Use this screen to turn on or off an IPv6 interface and enable stateless autoconfiguration on it. Click
the link next to IPv6 Interface Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 47 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Interface Setup
Ta ble 26 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Hop Limit Specify the maximum n umber of hops (from 1 to 255) in router advertisements. This
is the maximum number of hops on which an IPv6 pack et is allo wed to tr ansmit before
it is discarded by an IPv6 router, which is similar to the TTL field in IPv4.
ICMPv6 Rate Limit
Bucket Size Specify the maximum n umber of ICMPv6 error messages (from 1 to 200) which are
allowed to transmit in a given time interval. If the bucket is full, subsequent error
messages are suppres sed.
ICMPv6 Rate Limit
Error Interval Specify the time period (from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds) during which ICMPv6
error messages of up to the bucket size can be transmitted. 0 means no limit.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
85
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.9.5 IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10.
Use this screen to configure the interface’s link-local address and default gateway. Click the link
next to IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen
as shown next.
Figure 48 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 27 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 C onfiguration > IPv6 Interface Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Active Select this option to enable the interface.
Address Autoconfig Select t his option to allow t he interface to autom atically generate a link-local address
via stateless autoconfiguration.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Active This field displays whether the IPv6 interface is activated or not.
Address Autoconfig This field displays whether stateless autoconfiguration is enabled on the interface.
Ta ble 28 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 C onfiguration > IPv6 Link-Local Address Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Link-Local Address Manually configure a static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
86
6.9.6 IPv6 Global Address Setup
Use this screen to configure the interface’s IPv6 global address. Click the link next to IPv6 Global
Address Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 49 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Global Address Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Default Gateway Set the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface. When an interface cannot find
a routing information for a frame’s destination, it forwards the packet to the default
gateway.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Link-Local
Address This is the static IPv6 link-local address for the interface.
IPv6 Default
Gateway This is the default gateway IPv6 address for the interface.
Ta ble 28 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Link-Local Add ress Setup (c ontinued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 29 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Globa l Address Set up
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IPv6 Global Address Manually configure a static IPv6 global address for the interface.
Prefix Length Specify an IPv6 pr efix le ngth that specif ies how man y mo st si gnific ant bi ts (st art from
the left) in the address compose the network address.
EUI-64 Select this option to have the interface ID be generated automatically using the EUI-
64 format.
Add Click Add to create a new entry or update an existing one.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
87
6.9.7 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
Use this screen to configure neighbor discovery settings for each interface. Click the link next to
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 50 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IPv6 Global Address/
Prefix Length This field displays the IPv6 global address and prefix length for the interface.
EUI-64 This shows whether the interface ID of the global address is generated using the EUI-
64 format.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box
in the table heading row to select all ent ries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 29 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Globa l Address Set up (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 30 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
DAD Attempts The Switch uses Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) with neighbor solicitation and
advertisement mess ages to check whether an IPv6 address is already in use before
assigning it to an interface, such as the link-local address it create s through stateless
address autoconfiguration.
Specify the number of consec utive neighbor solicitations (from 0 to 600) the Switch
sends for this interface. Enter 0 to turn off DAD.
NS Interval Specify the time interval (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) at which neighbor
solicitations are re-sent for this interface.
Reachable Time Specify how long (from 1000 to 3600000 milliseconds) a neighbor is considered
reachable for this interface.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
88
6.9.8 IPv6 Router Discovery Setup
Use this screen to configure router discovery settings for each interface. Click the link next to IPv6
Router Discovery Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 51 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Router Discovery Setup
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
DAD Attempts This field displays the number of consecutive neighbor solicitations the Switch sends
for this interface.
NS Interval This field displays the time interv al (in milliseconds) at which neighbor solicitations are
re-sent for this interface.
Reachable Time This field displays how long (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable for
this interface.
Ta ble 30 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Setu p ( continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
89
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.9.9 IPv6 Prefix Setup
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s IPv6 prefix list for each interface. Click the link next to
IPv6 Prefix Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Ta ble 31 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 C onfiguration > IPv6 Router Discovery Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Flags Select the Managed Config Flag option to ha ve the Switch set th e “managed address
configuration” flag (the M flag) to 1 in IPv6 router advertisements, which means IPv6
hosts use DHCPv6 to obtain IPv6 stateful addresses. Deselect the option to set the flag
to 0 and the host will not use DHCPv6 to obtain IPv6 stateful addresses.
Select the Other Config Flag option to have the Switch set the “Other stateful
configuration” flag (the O flag) to 1 in IPv6 router advertisements, which means IPv6
hosts use DHCPv6 to obtain additional configuration settings, such as DNS
information. Deselect the option to set the flag to 0 and the host will not use DHCPv6
to obtain additional configuration settings.
Minimum Interval Specify the minimum time interval (from 3 to 1350 seconds) at which the Switch
sends router advertisements for this interface.
Note: The minimum time interval cannot be greater than three-quarters of the maximum
time interval.
Maximum Interval Specify the maximum time interval (from 4 to 1800 seconds) at which the Switch
sends router advertisements for this interface.
Lifetime Specify how long (from 0 to 90 00 seconds) the router in router advertisements can be
used as a default router for this interface.
Suppress Select this o ption to set the Switch to not send router advertisements and responses
to router solicitations on this interface.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Flags This field displays whether IPv6 hosts use DHCPv6 to obtain IPv6 stateful addresses
(M) and/or additional configuration settings (O).
Minimum Interval This field displays the minimum time interval at which the Switch sends router
advertisements for this interface.
Maximum Interval This field displays the maximum time interval at which the Switch sends router
advertisements for this interface.
Lifetime This field displays how long the router in router advertisements can be used as a
default router for this interface.
Suppress This field displays whether the Switch sends router advertis ements and responses to
router solicitations on this interface (No) or not (Yes).
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
90
Figure 52 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Prefix Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 32 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Prefix Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
Prefix Set the IPv6 prefix that the Switch includes in router advertisements for this interface.
Prefix Length Set the prefix length that the Switch includes in router advertisements for this
interface.
Valid Lifetime Specify how long (from 0 to 4294967295 seconds) the prefix is valid for on-link
determination.
Preferred Lifetime Specify how long (from 0 to 4294967 295 seconds) that addresses generated from the
prefix via stateless address autoconfiguration remain preferred.
The preferred lifetime cannot exceed the valid lifetime.
Flags Select No-Autoconfig Flag to not allow IPv6 hosts to use this prefix for stateless
address autoconfiguration.
Select No-Onlink Flag to not allow the specified prefix to be used for on-link
determination.
Select No-Advertise Flag to set the Switch to not include the specified IPv6 prefix,
prefix length in router advertisements for this interface.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Prefix/Prefix Length This field displays the IPv6 prefix and prefix length that the Switch includes in router
advertisements for this interface.
Valid Lifetime This field displays the IPv6 prefix valid lifetime.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
91
6.9.10 IPv6 Neighbor Setup
Use this screen to create a static IPv6 neighbor entry in the Switch’s IPv6 neighbor table to store
the neighbor information permanently. Click the link next to IPv6 Neighbor Setup in the IPv6
Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 53 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Preferred Lifetime This field displays the preferred lifetime of an IPv6 address generated from the prefix.
Delete Check the entry (ies) that you want to re move in the Delete column and then click
Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
Ta ble 32 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Pref ix Setup (cont i nued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 33 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Type Select the type of IPv6 interface for which you want to configure. The Switch supports
the VLAN interface type for IPv6 at the time of writing.
Interface ID Specify a unique identification number (from 1 to 4094) for the interface.
Note: A static IPv6 neighbor entry displays in the Management > Neighbor Table
screen only when the interface ID is also created in the Basic Setup > Interface
Setup screen.
Note: To have IPv6 function properly, you should configure a static VLAN with the same
ID number in the Advanced Setup > VLAN screens.
Neighbor Address Specify the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
MAC Specify the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached through the
interface.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
92
6.9.11 DHCPv6 Client Setup
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s DHCP settings when it is acting as a DHCPv6 client. Click
the link next to IPv6 Neighbor Setup in the IPv6 Configuration screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 54 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuration > DHCPv6 Client Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
Neighbor Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the neighboring device which can be reached
through the interface
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the neighboring device which can be reached
through the interface.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box
in the table heading row to select all ent ries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click Delete to remove the
selected entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 33 Bas ic Setting > I Pv6 > IPv6 Conf iguration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup (co nt inued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 34 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 C onfiguratio n > DHCPv6 Client Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the IPv6 interface you want to configure.
IA Type Select IA-NA to set the Switch to get a non-temp orary IP address from the DHCPv6
server for this interface.
Optionally, you can also select Rapid-Commit to have the Switch send its DHCPv6
Solicit message with a Rapid Commit option to obtain information from the DHCPv6
server by a rapid two-message exchange. The Switch discards any Reply messages
that do not include a Rapid Commit option. The DHCPv6 server should also support the
Rapid Commit option to have it work well.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
93
6.10 Stacking
Stacking is directly connecting Switches to form a larger system that behaves as a single Switch or
a virtual chassis with increased port density.
Figure 55 Switch Stacking Concept
The last two SFP ports of your Switch are dedicated for Switch stacking. These are the Switches
that support stacking at the time of writing.
Options Select DNS to have the Switch obtain DNS server IPv6 addresses and/or select
Domain-List to have the Switch obtain a list of domain names from the DHCP server.
Information Refresh
Minimum Specify the time interval (from 600 to 4294967295 seconds) at which the Switch
exchanges other configuration information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the interface index number. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Interface This is the name of the IPv6 interface you created.
IA-NA This field displays whether the Switch obtains a non-temporary IP address from the
DHCPv6 server.
Rapid-Commit This field displays whether the Switch obtains inform ation from the DHCPv6 server by
a rapid two-message exchange.
DNS This field displays whether the Switch obtains DNS server IPv6 addresses from the
DHCPv6 server.
Domain-List This field displays whether the Switch obtains a list of domain names from the DHCP
server.
Information Refresh
Minimum This field displays the time interval (in seconds) at which the Switch exchan ges other
configuration information with a DHCPv6 server again.
Ta ble 34 Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6 Configuratio n > DHCPv6 Clie nt Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 35 Switch Stacking
MODELS WITH STACKING SUPPORT
XGS3700-24
XGS3700-24HP
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
94
Note: Up to 8 Switches per stack are allowed.
You can manage each Switch in the stack from a master Switch using its web configurator or
console. Each Switch supports up to two stacking channels. Use the master S witch to assign a ‘slot
ID’ for each ‘linecard’ non-master Switch. ‘Slot’ refers to a Switch in the the ‘virtual chassis’ stack.
The advantages of stacking are:
• High port density - for example, two 24-port Switches can become one 48-port logical Switch
• Centralized management - log into a single IP address of the master switch to control all
Switches in the stacking system using the web configurator, CLI, SNMP or FTP
• Redundancy - Data redundancy allows traffic to be forwarded even if one Switch in the stack
fails. Management redundancy lets you still manage the stack even if one Switch in the stack fails
• Modularity and hot-swappable - you can add, remove, or replace Switches to increase or
decrease the stack with minimum disruption to ongoing network traffic.
You can build a Switch stack using a ring or chain topology. In a ring topology, the last Switch is
connected to the first.
Figure 56 Stacking Topology
6.10.1 Stacking Status
Click Basic Setting > Stacking in the navigation panel to display the Stacking Status screen as
shown next.
XGS3700-48
XGS3700-48HP
Ta ble 35 Switch Stacking
MODELS WITH STACKING SUPPORT
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
95
Figure 57 Basic Setting > Stacking Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.10.2 Stacking Slot
Click Basic Setting > Stacking > Stacking Status > Slot number in the navigation panel to
display the Stacking Slot Status screen as shown next.
Ta ble 36 Basic Setting > Stacking > Stacking Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot ‘Slot’ refers to a Switch in the the ‘virtual chassis’ stack. This field displays the slot ID of the
stacked Switch. You can click the ID number t o go t o the Stacking Slot Status screen.
Name This field displays the model name of the stacked Switch.
Status This field displays whether the stacked Switch is active or inactive in a stack system. Init
means the slot ID is initialized by the master Switch.
MAC address This field displays the MAC address of the stacked Switch.
Role This field displays whether the Switch is a master, backup or linecard. There’s only one
master and one backup Switc h in the stacking model; all others are linecard Switches.
Stacking Topology: Ring/Chain
Slot No. This field displays the slot ID number of th e stacked Switch.
Stacking Channel1
Neighbor This field displays the neighbor Switch that is connected using slot channel 1 of the Switch.
Speed This field displ ays the Ethernet speed of stacking channel 1 of the Switch.
Stacking Channel2
Neighbor This field displays the neighbor Switch that is connected to slot channel 2 o f the Switch.
Speed This field displ ays the Ethernet speed of stacking channel 2 of the Switch.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
96
Figure 58 Basic Setting > Stacking > Stacking Status > Slot number
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 37 Basic Setting > Stacking > Stacking Status > Slot number
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot This field displays the slot ID of the Switch.
Stacking This field displays whether the Switch is active in the stacking system.
Role This field displays whether the stacked Switch is a master or linecard Switch.
Force Master
Mode This field displays whether the Force Master Mode is enabled or disabled on this Switch. The
Active Force Master Mode forces this Switch to become a master Switch. This Switch will
have the highest priority over all other Switch in the stack. If two Switches are set as
masters, they will have the same priority level, but the Switch that has the longest active
run-time will be selected as the master Switch automatically.
Priority This field displays the priority level of the Switch. A higher number represents higher
priority.
Slot ID After
Reboot This field displays the slot ID of the Switch after a reboot. You can save the slot ID of the
Switch after a reboot by clicking Freeze in the Stacking Configuration screen. See
Section 6.10.3 on page 97.
Stacking Status This field displays whether the stacked Switch is active or inactive in a stack. Init means
the slot ID is initialized by the master Switch.
Master Capable This field displays whether the Switch has capacity to become a master Switch. Auto
means the stack system master election process will determine if the Switch can be
assigned as a master Switch.
Stacking MAC
Address This field displays the stacking Switch MAC address.
Stacking
Channel 1 This field displays the status of the port stacking channel 1 of the Switch. It will disp lay up
for active or down for inactive.
Stacking
Channel 2 This field displays the status of the port stacking channel 2 of the Switch. It will disp lay up
for active or down for inactive.
Stacking Up
Time This field displays the time that the active Switch in a stack has been running.
ZyNOS version
*Running/Flash This field displays the ZyNOS firmware that is currently running on the Switch.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
97
6.10.3 Stacking Configuration
A supported Switch can change between stacking and standalone mode by selecting the Active
check box in the Basic Setting > Stacking > Configuration screen.
Note: When you change modes, all configurations except us er accounts, but including
running configuration, config01 and config02 will be erased and the Switch will
reboot with a new config01. Therefore, you should back up previous configurati ons
if you want to reload them later.
Stacking will automatically choose a master Switch in a stack but you can overwrite that by activ ely
forcing a Switch to become a master Switch. In the Stacking Configuration screen, click Active
Force Master Mode to choose the master Switch. This master Switch will have the highest priority
over all other stacked Switches even when they have same priority value.
If two or more Switches have Active Force Master Mode enabled, then the Switch will use
System Priority to determine which is master. If they have the same System Priority, then the
Switch with the longest up-time is selected. Uptime is measured in increments of 10 minutes. The
Switch with the higher number of increments is selected. If they have the same uptime, then the
Switch with the lowest MAC address will be the master.
This is the master election priority in a stack system:
1Active Force Master Mode
2Highest Stacking Priority
3Longest System Up Time
4Lowest MAC Address
Note: Master election occurs when a stacking port link status changes (up / down). The
link status changes when (for example):
- a stacking port cable is disconnected
- a Switch in the stack reboots (as happens after you change stacking mode to
standalone)
- you add a Switch to the stack or
- a Switch in the stack shuts down.
Use the following procedure to create a stack:
1Select a Switch to be the master. Change its mode to stacking mode. Y ou will see a message asking
you to confirm the change. Click OK to confirm and the Switch will reboot automatically using a
new config01.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
98
2After reboot completes, the master LED will turn on.
3Configure the Switch stacking priority to a high value, such as 63.
4Change a second Switch to stacking mode and wait for it to finish rebooting automatically. This
master LED will also turn on.
5Connect the two Switches using the stacking ports for the Switch defined.
6The second Switch master LED will then turn off, and its Sys LED will blink while it's initializing.
Please wait until it stops blinking, indicating that it has joined the stack.
7Repeat steps 4 to 6 to connect other Switches to the stack.
When the Switch is in Stacking mode, the web configurator will change port and VLAN port settings
to support the stacking mode. See Section 6.6 on page 69 and Section 7.7 on page 106 for details
on the port settings.
Click Basic Setting > Stacking > Configuration to see the following screen.
Figure 59 Basic Setting > Stacking > Configuration
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
99
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
6.11 DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. Use the DNS screen to configure and view the default DNS servers on the Switch.
Figure 60 Basic Setting > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 38 Basic Setting > Stacking > Configurat ion
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the Active check box to put the Sw itch in stac king mode. Th is will er ase the runni ng
configuration, config01 and config02. The master Switch’s login will remain unchanged. If
you want to reload a previous configuration, please back one up first.
Apply Click Apply to activate the stacking mode.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Active check box.
Force Master
Mode Select the Force Master Mo de check box to force this Switch to become a master Switch.
System Priority Enter a number (from1 to 63) to assign a priority for the stacking Switch. The higher the
number, the higher the priority.
Apply Click Apply to save the Active Force Master Mode and System Priority fields.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Active Force Master Mode and System Priority fields.
Slot ID Freeze Click the Freeze button to have the Switch retain its slot ID after reboot.
Slot This field displays the slot or port channel of the stacked Switch.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the stacked Switch.
Type This field displays the model name of the Switch.
Slot ID After
Reboot Choose Auto to have a new slot ID assigned after reboot. If you want to keep the original
slot ID after reboot, you can click Freeze or select an ID in the Slot ID After Reboot list
box.
Apply Click Apply to save the Slot ID After reboot field.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Slot ID After reboot field.
Ta ble 39 Basic Setting > DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static Domain Name Server
Preference This is the priority of the DNS server address.
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
100
Server Address Enter a domain name server IPv6/IPv4 address in order to be able to use a domain
name instead of an IP address.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Domain Name Server Table
Index This field displays priority of the DNS server address.
Server Address This field displays the IP address of the DNS server.
Source This field displays whether the DNS server address is config ured manually (Static) or
obtained automat ically using DHCP/DHCPv6 (Dynamic).
Ta ble 39 Basic Setting > DNS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
101
CHAPTER 7
VLAN
The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup
screen which is only available in standalone mode. The Switch does not support port-based VLANs
in stacking mode. This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs.
7.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLANs
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes for the TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier, residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet
frame) and tw o bytes for the TCI (Tag Control Information, starting after the source address field of
the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Form at Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that fr ame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priorit y frame, meaning that only the priorit y
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and the value 4095 (FFF) is
reserved, so the maximum possible number of VLAN configurations is 4,094.
7.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from
an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the Switch first decides where
to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-
unaware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the Switch first decides where to forward the
frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is
VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.
A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system) is
duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port itself), thus confining
the broadcast to a specific domain.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 bits
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
102
7.2 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches.
7.2.1 GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and de-register
attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a protocol that provides
a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application, for example, GVRP.
7.2.1.1 GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message
using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message
terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
7.2.2 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registr ation Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a wa y for switches to
register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to perm it VLAN
groups beyond the local Switch.
Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802.1Q VLAN terminology.
Ta ble 40 IEEE 802.1 Q VLA N Terminology
VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually.
Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/
deregistration process.
VLAN Administrative
Control Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.
Registration
Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the
specified VLAN.
Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.
VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames
transmitted.
Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don't tag all outgoing
frame s transmitted.
VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this
port received.
Acceptable Frame
Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged
incoming frames, just tagged incoming frames or just
untagged incoming frames on a port.
Ingress filtering If set, the Swit ch discards incoming fr ames for VLANs that do
not have this port as a member.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
103
7.3 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass
through that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without ha ving to
configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
The following figure describes VLAN Trunking. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2
(V1 and V2) on devices A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and
2 on all intermediary switches C, D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN
group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you
only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow
frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches) to pass
through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Figure 61 Port VLAN Trunking
7.4 Select the VLAN Type
Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen. VLAN Type is not applicable in
Stacking mode.
Figure 62 Switch Setup: Select VLAN Type
7.5 802.1Q Static VLAN
Make sure 802.1Q is selected in the Basic Setting > Switch Setup screen.
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified
VID.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
104
7.5.1 VLAN Status
See Section 7.1 on page 101 for more information on 802.1Q VLAN. Click Advanced Application
> VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next.
Figure 63 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 41 Advanced Application > VLAN: VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Search by
VID Enter an existing VLAN ID number(s) (separated by a comma) and click Search to display
only the specified VLAN(s) in the list below.
Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch.
The Number of
Search Results This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below.
This field dis plays only whe n you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs.
Index This is the VLAN index number. Click on an index number to view more VLAN details.
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was c onfigured in the Static VLAN screen.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN
was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
•Dynamic - using GVRP
•Static - manually added as a normal VLAN
•Private - manually added as a private VLAN (primary, isolated or community)
•Voice - manually added as a Voice VLAN
•RMirror - manually added as a remote port mirroring VLAN
•MVR - added via Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot
be seen in one screen.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
105
7.5.2 VLAN Details
Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group. See Section 7.1 on
page 101 for more information on 802.1Q VLAN. Click on an index number in the VLAN Status
screen to display VLAN details.
Figure 64 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 42 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen .
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
Slot ‘Slot’ refers to a Switch in the the ‘virtual chassis’ stack. This field displ ays the s lot ID of
the stacked Switch.
Port Number This column displays th e ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is marked as
T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as “–
“.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a norm al VLAN was regi stered or a static VLAN
was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch.
•Dynamic - using GVRP
•Static - manually added as a normal VLAN
•Private - manually added as a private VLAN (primary, isolated or community)
•Voice - manually added as a Voice VLAN
•RMirror - manually added as a remote port mirroring VLAN
•MVR - added via Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
Private VLAN
Status These fields show private VLAN information for the selected VLAN. See Section 33.1 on
page 336 for more information on private VLANs.
Primary VLAN This field shows the primary VLAN ID in the selected VLAN.
Secondary
VLAN This field shows the secondary VLAN ID in the select ed VLAN.
Type This field shows the type of private VLAN: Primary, Community or Isolated.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
106
7.6 Private VLAN Status
Use this screen to view all private VLANs created on the Switch. Click Advanced Application >
VLAN > Private VLAN Status to see the following screen.
Figure 65 Advanced Application > VLAN > Private VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.7 VLAN Configuration
Use this screen to view IEEE 802.1Q VLAN parameters for the S witch. Click Advanced Application
> VLAN > VLAN Configuration to see the following screen.
Port List This shows the ports mapped to the private VLAN using the Advanced Application >
Private VLAN or Advanced Application > VLAN > Static VLAN screen.
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot
be seen in one screen.
Ta ble 42 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Detail (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 43 Advanced Application > VLAN > Pr ivate VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Private VLAN
Status These fi elds show i nformation for the all private VLANs. See also Advanced Application >
Private VLAN.
Primary
VLAN This field shows the primary VLAN ID in a private VLAN.
Secondary
VLAN This field shows the secondary VLAN ID in a private VLAN.
Type This field shows the type of private VLAN: Primary, Community or Isolated.
Port List This shows the ports mapped to the private VLAN using the Advanced Application >
Private VLAN or Advanced Application > VLAN > Static VLAN screen.
Change Pages Use the Previous and Next buttons to display different pages.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
107
Figure 66 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
The following table describes the labels in the above screen.
7.7.1 Configure a Static VLAN
Use this screen to configure a static VLAN for the Switch. Click the Static VLAN Setup link in the
VLAN Configuration screen to display the screen as shown next.
Ta ble 44 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Static VLAN for the Switch.
VLAN Port Setup Click Click Here to configure the VLAN Port for the Switch.
Subnet Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Subnet Based VLAN for the Switch.
Protocol Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Protocol Based VLAN for the Switch.
Voice VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the Voice VLAN for the Switch.
MAC Based VLAN Setup Click Click Here to configure the MAC Based VLAN for the Switch.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
108
Figure 67 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 45 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.
Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes. This name
consists of up to 64 printable characters; spaces are allowed.
VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
VLAN Type Select Normal (static) or Private. For Private VLANs, select Primary, Isolated or
Community.
Association VLAN
List Primary private VLANs can associate with sev eral (secon dary) Community private VLANs
and up to one (secondary) Isolated private VLAN.
You only configure VLAN Association List for Primary private VLANs. Use a dash to
associate consecutive VLANs and a comma (no spaces) to associate non-consecutive
VLANs. For example, 51-53 includes 51, 52 and 53, but 51,53 does not include 52.
Secondary private VLANs can only be associated with one primary private VLAN.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
109
7.7.2 Configure VLAN Port Settings
Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q) settings on a port.
See Section 7.1 on page 101 for more information on 802.1Q VLAN. Click the VLAN Port Setup
link in the VLAN Configuration screen.
Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring. In stacking mode, the first
number represents the slot and the second the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is the
default selection.
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this
VLAN Group ID.
Add Click this to create a new ent r y or to update an existing one.
This sav es your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses t hese changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save lin k on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configurin g this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the VLAN
settings.
Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
VLAN Type This field displa ys the Normal or Private (Primary, Isolated or Community) type VLAN
configured in the top part of this screen.
Association VLAN
List This field displays which secondary private VLANs are associated with a primary private
VLAN configured in the top part of this screen.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
Ta ble 45 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Static VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
110
Figure 68 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup: Standalone
mode
Figure 69 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup: Stacking mode
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
111
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.7.3 Subnet Based VLANs
Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you
specify. When a frame is received on a port, the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP
Ta ble 46 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN Port Setup: Standalone/
Stacking mode
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GVRP GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registr ation protocol that defines a wa y for
switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network.
Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch.
SLOT1 This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number of the Switch. In stacking mode, the first number
represents the slot and the second the port num b er. Please note that the default
stacking ports (the last two ports of your Switch) cannot be configured. They are
reserved for stacking only.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port, the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs
that do not include this port in its member set.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
PVID A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a
port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
Enter a number between 1 and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port.
Accept able Fram e
Type Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and Untag
Only.
Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this
port. This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be
dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will
be dropped. Note that when the Switch is in stacking mode and the master Switch has
VLAN1, all other ports will be configured to untagged port.
VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports
directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to
pass through the Switch.
Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and
the ports on which t he isolation feature is not enabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turn ed off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
112
subnet it came from. The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same
subnet based VLAN. One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to
traffic from the same IP subnet.
Note: Subnet based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
For example, an ISP (Internet Service Provider) may divide different types of services it provides to
customers into different IP subnets. Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet
172.16.1.0/24, video for 192.168.1.0/24 and data for 10.1.1.0/24. The Switch can then be
configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames.
You can then configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from
IP subnet 172.16.1.0/24 (voice services). You can also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5
and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192.168.1.0/24 (video services). Lastly, you can
configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10.1.1.0/24 (data
services). All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and
prioritized accordingly. That is, video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest.
Figure 70 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example
7.7.3.1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN
Click the Subnet Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the
configuration screen as shown.
10.1.1.0/24
192.168.1.0/24
172.16.1.0/24
Internet
VID = 100 VID = 200 VID = 300
Untagged
Frames
Tag ged Frames
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
113
Figure 71 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 47 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch.
DHCP-Vlan
Override When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through the DHCP
VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN.
Select this chec kbox to force the DHCP client s in th is IP subn et to obtain their IP addresses
through the DHCP VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Active Select this check box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing.
Name En ter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN.
IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN.
Mask-Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask. To find the bit number, convert the subnet mask
to binary format and add all the 1’s together. Take “255.255.255.0” for example. 255
converts to eight 1s in binary. There are three 255s, so add three eights together and you
get the bit number (24).
VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this
subnet based VLAN are tagged. This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the
Advanced Application > VLAN > Static VLAN screen.
Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN. Click on any of these numbers
to edit an existing subnet based VLAN.
Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not.
Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
114
7.7.4 Protocol Based VLANs
Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you
specify. When an upstream frame is received on a port (configured for a protocol based VLAN), the
Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol. The untagged packets of the same protocol
are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN. O ne advantage of using protocol based VLANs is
that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol.
Note: Protocol based VLAN applies to un-tagged pack ets and is app lic able only when you
use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
For example, ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100, and ports 4, 5, 6, 7 belong to static
VLAN 120. Y ou can configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 2 for ARP traffic received on port
1, 2 and 3. You can also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 3 for Apple Talk traffic received
on port 6 and 7. All upstream ARP traffic from port 1, 2 and 3 will be grouped together, and all
upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priorit y than
ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C.
Figure 72 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example
7.7.4.1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN
Click the Protocol Based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the
configuration screen as shown.
IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN.
Mask-Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN.
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN.
Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 47 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Subnet Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
115
Figure 73 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 48 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate this protocol based VLAN.
Port Type a port number to be included in this protocol based VLAN. In stacking mode, the first
box field is the slot ID and the second field is the port number.
This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN. See
Chapter 7 on page 101 for more details on setting up VLANs.
Name En ter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol
based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notati on. For
example, the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800, and Novell IPX protocol is 8137.
Note: Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to 0x05ff are not allowed to be
used for protocol based VLANs.
VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs. This must be an existing VLAN which you
defined in the Advanced Application > VLAN > Static VLAN screen.
Priority Select the priority level that the Swit ch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN. Click on any of these
numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN.
Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not.
Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN. In stacking mode, the first
number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN.
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
116
7.7.4.2 Create an IP-based VLAN Example
This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1, 4 and 8. Follow these
steps using the screen below:
1Activate this protocol based VLAN.
2Ty pe the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN. Type 1.
3Give this protocol-based VLAN a descriptive name. Type IP-VLAN.
4Select the protocol. Leave the default value IP.
5Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN. In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID
of 5. Ty pe 5.
6Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add.
Figure 74 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example
To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN.
1Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry. Click 1
2Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add.
3Click Add.
Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click t his to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 48 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Protocol Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
117
7.8 Port-based VLAN Setup (Standalone Mode)
Port -based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port.
Port -based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if you wish
to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference rooms in a
hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which
a data packet leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created.
Note: When you activate port-based VLAN, the Swit ch uses a default VLAN ID of 1. You
cannot change it.
Note: In screens ( s uch as IP Setup and Filtering) that require a VID, you must enter 1
as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports.
7.8.1 Configure a Port-based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the
navigation panel to display the following screen. Select either All Connected or Port Isolated
from the drop-down list depending on your VLAN and VLAN security requirements. If VLAN
members need to communicate directly with each other, then select All Connected. Select Port
Isolated if you want to restrict users from communicating directly. Click Apply to save your
settings.
The following screen shows users on a port-based, all-connected VLAN configuration.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
118
Figure 75 Advanced Application > VLAN > Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)
The following screen shows users on a port-based, port-isolated VLAN configuration.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
119
Figure 76 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
120
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.9 Voice VLAN
V oice VLAN ensures that the sound qualit y of an IP phone is preserved from deterior ating when the
data traffic on the Switch ports is high. It groups the voice traffic with defined priority into an
assigned VLAN which enables the separation of voice and data traffic coming onto the Switch port.
You can set priority level to the Voice VLAN and add MAC address of IP phones from specific
manufacturers by using its ID from the Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUI).
Click the Voice VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to display the configuration
screen as shown.
Ta ble 49 Advanced Application > VLAN: Port Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation.
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no
virtual LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most flexible
but also the least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port
and cannot communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU
outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the m o st secure.
After you make your selection , click Apply (top right of screen) to display the screens as
mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting incomin g or
outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.
Incoming These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through
which a data packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other,
you must define the ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row denote th e
incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left (its out going port) . CPU refers to
the Switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does
not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port.
Outgoing These are the egress ports. An egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which
a data packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you
must define the egress port for both ports. CPU refers to the Switch management port. By
default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular
port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
121
Figure 77 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Ta ble 50 Adva nced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Voice VLAN Global Setup
Voice VLAN Click the Voice VLAN radio button if you want to enable the Voice VLAN feature.
Type a VLAN ID number in the box next to the radio button that is associated
with the Voice VLAN. Click Disable r adio button if you do not want to enable the
Voice VLAN feature.
Priority Select the pri ority level of th e Voice VLAN from 0 to 7. Default setting is 5.The
higher the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this Voice VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch
loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the
top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to default settings.
Voice VLAN OUI Setup
OUI address Type the IP Phon e manufacturer ’s OUI MAC address. The first three byes is the
manufacturer identifier, the last three bytes is a unique station ID.
OUI mask Ty pe the IP Phone manufacturer's OUI mask address.
Description Type an description up to 32 characters for the Voice VLAN device. For example:
Siemens.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch
loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the
top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This field displays the index number of the Voice VLAN.
OUI address This field displays the OUI address of the Voice VLAN.
OUI mask This field displays the OUI mask address of the Voice VLAN.
Description This field displays the description of the Voice VLAN with OUI address.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
122
7.10 MAC Based VLAN
The MAC-based VLAN feature assigns incoming untagged packets to a VLAN and classifies the
traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet. When untagged pack ets arrive at the switch,
the source MAC address of the packet is looked up in a MAC to VLAN mapping table. If an entry is
found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. The assigned VLAN ID is verified
against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is v alid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise,
the packet is dropped.
This feature allows users to change ports without having to reconfigure the VLAN. You can assign
priority to the MAC-based VLAN and define a MAC to VLAN mapping table by entering a specified
source MAC address in the MAC-based VLAN setup screen. You can also delete a MAC-based VLAN
entry in the same screen.
Click the MAC-based VLAN Setup link in the VLAN Configuration screen to see the following
screen.
Figure 78 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > MAC-based VLAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check
box in the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 50 Adva nced Application > VLAN > VLAN Configuration > Voice VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 51 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLA N Configuration > MAC-based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name up to 32 alpha numeric characters for the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address Type a MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN e ntry. This is the source
MAC address of the data packet that is looked up when untagged pack ets arriv e
at the Switch.
VID Type an ID (from 1 to 4094) for the VLAN ID that is associated with the MAC-
based VLAN entry.
Chapter 7 VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
123
Priority Type a priority (0-7) for the MAC-based VLAN entry .The higher the numeric value
you assign, the higher the priority for this MAC-based VLAN entry.
Add Click Add to save the new MAC-based VLAN entry.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the fields in the MAC-based VLAN en try.
Index This field displays the index number of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Name This field displays the name of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address that is bind to the MAC-based VLAN
entry.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Priority This field displays the priority level of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check
box in the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 51 Advanced Application > VLAN > VLA N Configuration > MAC-based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
124
CHAPTER 8
Static MAC Forward Setup
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.
8.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on
your network.
8.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table. Static
MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are setting static
MAC addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allows only computers in the MAC
address table on a port to access the Switch. See Chapter 17 on page 195 for more information on
port security.
Click Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the
configuration screen as shown.
Figure 79 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding (Standalone mode)
Chapter 8 Static MAC Forward Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
125
Figure 80 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 52 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding
rule.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character
pairs.
Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number.
Port(standalone
or stacking
mode)
Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically
forwarded. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and the second field is the
port number.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port.
Active This field disp lays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not
(No). Yo u may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC
address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification
number to which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be
forwarded. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot an d the se cond th e port
number.
Select an entry’ s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Chapter 8 Static MAC Forward Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
126
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 52 Advanced Application > Static MAC Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
127
CHAPTER 9
Static Multicast Forward Setup
Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding.
9.1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview
A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group. A static multicast
address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table. Static
multicast addresses do not age out. Static multicast forwarding allows you (the administrator) to
forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first.
If a multicast group has no members, then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all
ports or drop them. You can configure this in the Advanced Applicatio n > Multicast > IPv4
Multicast > IGMP Snooping screen (see Section 23.3.1 on page 230). Figure 81 shows such
unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports. With static multicast forwarding, you can forward
these multicasts to port(s) within a VLAN group. Figure 82 shows frames being forwarded to
device s co nnec ted t o po rt 3 . Figure 83 shows fr ames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN
group 4.
Figure 81 No Static Multicast Forwarding
Figure 82 Static Multicast Forwarding to A Single Po rt
Chapter 9 Static Multicast Forward Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
128
Figure 83 Static Multicast Forwarding to Multiple Ports
9.2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding
Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast fr ames, such as streaming or control
frames, to specific port(s).
Click Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen
as shown.
Figure 84 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 53 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this static multicast MAC
address forwarding rule. This is for identification only.
MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group. The last binary bit of
the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1. For example, the first octet pair
00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal, so 01:00:5e:00:00:0A and
03:00:5e:00:00:27 are valid multicast MAC addresses.
VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port(s) within a VLAN
group. Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here. If you don’t have a specific target
VLAN, enter 1.
Chapter 9 Static Multicast Forward Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
129
Port Enter the port(s) where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above
are forwarded. You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comma (,) or hyphen
for a range. F or example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. En ter “3,5,7 ” for ports 3, 5, and
7.
In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for ports 1 to 24 for the Switch in slot 1 and port 28 for the Switch in
slot 2, for example.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your rule to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this rule if it is
turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port(s).
Active This field displa ys whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or
not (No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name This field displays the desc riptive name for id entification purposes for a static multicast MAC
address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group.
VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified
multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Port This field displays the port(s) within a ide ntified VLAN group to whi ch fr ames c ontaining the
specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded.
Select an entry’s check box to sel ect a spe cific ent ry. Otherwise, sel ect the c heck box i n the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 53 Advanced Application > Static Multicast Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
130
CHAPTER 10
Filtering
This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering.
10.1 Configure a Filtering Rule
Configure the Switch to filter tr affic based on the tr affic’ s source, destination MAC addresses and/or
VLAN group (ID).
Click Advanced Application > Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown
next.
Figure 85 Advanced Application > Filtering
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 54 Advanced Application > FIltering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Make sure to select this check box to activate y our rule. Y ou m ay temporaril y deactivate a rul e
without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Name Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for
identifica tion only.
Chapter 10 Filtering
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
131
Action Select Discard source to drop frames from the source MAC address (specified in the MAC
field). The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address (specified in the
MAC address). The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Disc ard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC address
specified in the MAC field.
MAC Type a MAC address in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change th e settings.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purposes only.
MAC Address This field displays the source/dest ination MAC addr ess with the VLAN ident ification number t o
which the MAC address belongs.
VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number.
Action This field displays Discard source, Discard destination, or Discard both depending on
what you configured above.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) th at you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
Ta ble 54 Advanced Application > FIltering (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
132
CHAPTER 11
Spanning Tree Protocol
The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) as defined in the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations (or trees). Ports can then be
assigned to the trees.
11.1 STP/RSTP Overview
(R)STP detects and breaks netw ork loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. It allows a Switch to interact with other (R)STP-compliant switches in your network to
ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The Switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence
of the spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STP-only aware
bridges). In RSTP, topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from
the device that generates the topology ch ange. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that
causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the
network. Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database. In
RSTP, the port states are Discarding, Learning, and Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
11.1.1 STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. The recommended cost
is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the
higher the cost.
Ta ble 55 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED
VALUE RECOMMENDED
RANGE ALLOWED RANGE
Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535
Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535
Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
133
On each bridge, the bridge communicates with the root through the root port. The root port is the
port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root
port, then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root
among the bridges connected to the LAN.
11.1.2 How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and the
ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate
in STP. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any
possible network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged
LAN topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge
Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a
predefined interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This
bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re-establish a
valid network topology.
11.1.3 STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go directly
from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
11.1.4 Multiple RSTP
MRSTP (Multiple RSTP) is ZyXEL’s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP. With
MRSTP, you can have more than one spanning tree on y our S witch and assign port(s) to each tree.
Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information.
Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535
Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1 to 5 1 to 65535
Ta ble 55 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED
VALUE RECOMMENDED
RANGE ALLOWED RANGE
Ta ble 56 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled STP is disabled (default).
Blocking Only configuration and manageme nt BPDUs are received and processed.
Listening All BPDUs are received and processed.
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Learning All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the learning
process but not forwarded.
Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
134
In the following examp le, there are two RSTP instances (MRSTP1 and MRSTP2) on switch A.
Figure 86 MRSTP Network Example
To set up MRSTP, activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port(s) belong to which spanning
tree.
Note: Each port can belong to one STP tree only.
11.1.5 Multiple STP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s) is backwards compatible with STP/RSTP and
addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols (STP and RSTP) in networks to include
the following features:
• One Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) that represents the entire network’s
connectivity.
• Grouping of multiple bridges (or switching devices) into regions that appear as one single bridge
on the network.
• A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTI allows
multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree.
• Load-balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region.
11.1.5.1 MSTP Network Example
The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two
switches. If the switches are using STP or RSTP, the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP
allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
135
Figure 87 STP/RSTP Network Example
With MSTP, VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network. Thus traffic fro m
the two VLANs travel on different paths. The following figure shows the network example using
MSTP.
Figure 88 MSTP Network Example
11.1.5.2 MST Region
An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to
the rest of the network. Each MSTP-enabled device can only belong to one MST region. When
BPDUs enter an MST region, external path cost (of paths outside this region) is increased by one.
Internal path cost (of paths within this region) is increased by one when BPDUs trav erse the region.
Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration
identification settings. These include the following parameters:
• Name of the MST region
• Revision level as the unique number for the MST region
• VLAN-to-MST Instance mapping
A
B
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
A
B
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
136
11.1.5.3 MST Instance
An MST Instance (MSTI) is a spanning tree instance. VLANs can be configured to run on a specific
MSTI. Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number (known as an MST ID) known internally
to a region. Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions.
The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions. Regions 1 and 2 have 2
spanning tree instances.
Figure 89 MSTIs in Different Regions
11.1.5.4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in
an STP/RSTP. The CIST is the default MST instance (MSTID 0). Any VLANs that are not members of
an MST instance are members of the CIST. In an MSTP-enabled network, there is only one CIST
that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices. A network may contain multiple
MST regions and other network segments running RSTP.
Figure 90 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example
11.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
137
Figure 91 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol (Standalone mode)
Figure 92 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol (Stacking mode)
This screen differs depending on which STP mode (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) you configure on the
Switch. This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for
each STP mode. Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch.
11.3 Spanning Tree Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch.
Click Configuration in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol.
Figure 93 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
138
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
11.4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Use this screen to configure RSTP settings, see Section 11.1 on page 132 for more information on
RSTP. Click RSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
Figure 94 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP (Standalone mode)
Ta ble 57 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Spanning Tree
Mode You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch.
Select Rapid Spanning Tree, Multip le Rapid Spanni ng Tree or Multiple S panning
Tree. See Section 11.1 on page 132 for background information on STP.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Swit ch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are don e
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
139
Figure 95 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 58 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen (see Figure 96 on page 141).
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP. Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP.
Note: You must also activate Rapid Sp anning Tree in the Advanced Application >
Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch.
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The
switch with the hi ghest priority (l owest numeric v alue) becomes the STP root swi tch. If all
switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become
the root switch. Select a value from the drop-dow n list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age
and Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
140
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds ) a switch can wai t without receivi ng a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive
BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last
BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root
port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range
is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states. This
delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes
before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for
conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise,
temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
and stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forw arding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port
is configured as an edge port or when its link st atus changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU).
Root Guard
(Standalone
mode)
Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on
it. The Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switc h connected to
the port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a
switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is
between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the
media, the higher the cost - see Table 55 on page 132 for more information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to t he Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scre en afresh.
Ta ble 58 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
141
11.5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next. See Section 11.1 on page 132 for more information on RSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch.
Figure 96 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 59 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specif y which STP mode you want to activate. Click RSTP to edit
RSTP settings on the Switch.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this S witch.
This Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC
address. This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second) This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configu ration
message. The root bridge determines H e llo Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a
configurati on message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second) This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is,
listening to learning to forwarding). See Section 11.1.3 on page 133 for information on
port states.
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of th e Spanning Tr ee.
T opology Changed
Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
142
11.6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MRSTP, click MRSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol
screen. See Section 11.1 on page 132 for more information on MRSTP.
Port State This field d isplays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC
addresses, but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not
forward frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processe s
BPDUs and forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forw arding port o n a non-root bridge , which has the lowest path cost and is
the best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge do es not hav e
a root port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This
path is different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state
when the designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment
where a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the
same LAN segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID This field displays the identifi er of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise , it displays the ide ntifier of the designated bridge
for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port
ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designat ed bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from
the designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected,
Root Guard State
(Standalone
mode)
This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root-inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the
port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unbolcks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Ta ble 59 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: RSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
143
Figure 97 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (Standalone mode)
Figure 98 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (Stacking mode)
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
144
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 60 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen (see Figure 99 on page 145).
Tree This is a read only index number of the STP t r ees.
Active Select thi s check box to activate an STP tree. Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree.
Note: You must also activate Multiple Rapid Sp anning T ree in the Advanced Application
> S panning Tree Protocol > Conf iguration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch.
Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The
switch with the hi ghest priority (l owest numeric v alue) becomes the STP root swi tch. If all
switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become
the root switch. Select a value from the drop-dow n list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age
and Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds ) a switch can wai t without receivi ng a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive
BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last
BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root
port is selected fr om among the Sw itch port s attach ed to t he network. Th e allowed range
is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states. This
delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes
before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for
conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise,
temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box fiel d is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forw arding
state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port
is configured as an edge port or when its link st atus changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU).
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
145
11.7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next. See Section 11.1 on page 132 for more information on MRSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch.
Figure 99 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP
Root Guard
(Standalone
mode)
Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on
it. The Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switc h connected to
the port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in
the Switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range
is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower
the media, the higher the cost - see Table 55 on page 132 for more information.
Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port shou ld participate in .
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to t he Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scre en afresh.
Ta ble 60 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
146
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 61 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate. Click MRSTP to
edit MRSTP settings on the Switch.
Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this S witch.
This Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second) This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configu ration
message. The root bridge determines H e llo Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a
configurati on message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second) This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is,
listening to learning to forwarding).
Note: The listening state does not exist in RSTP.
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of th e Spanning Tr ee.
T opology Changed
Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC
addresses, but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not
forward frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processe s
BPDUs and forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forw arding port o n a non-root bridge , which has the lowest path cost and is
the best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge do es not hav e
a root port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This
path is different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state
when the designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment
where a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the
same LAN segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID This field displays the identifi er of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise , it displays the ide ntifier of the designated bridge
for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port
ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designat ed bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
147
11.8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MSTP, click MSTP in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
See Section 11.1.5 on page 134 for more information on MSTP.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from
the designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected.
Root Guard State
(Standalone
mode)
This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root - inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the
port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unbolcks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Ta ble 61 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MRSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
148
Figure 100 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (Standalone mode)
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
149
Figure 101 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 62 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status sc reen (see Figure 104 on page 154).
Active Select this check box to activ ate MSTP on the S witch. Clear this ch eckbox to disable MSTP
on the Switch.
Note: You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application >
Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch.
Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10
seconds.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
150
MaxAge This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait wit hout receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive
BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last
BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root
port is selected fr om among the Sw itch port s attach ed to t he network. Th e allowed range
is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states. This
delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes
before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for
conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise,
temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds. As a general
rule:
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Maximum hops Enter the number of hops (between 1 and 255) in an MSTP region before the BPDU is
discarded and the port information is aged.
Configuration
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 characters) of an MST region.
Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region’s configuration. Devices must have the same revision
number to belong to the same region.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to t he Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scre en afresh.
Instance Use this section to configure MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) settings.
Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch. The Switch
supports instance numbers 0-16.
Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance. The lower the
number, the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning
tree instance.
Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 (thus valid values are
4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 286 72, 32768, 36864 , 40960, 450 56, 49152,
53248, 57344 and 61440).
VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range
edit area in the Start field. Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or
remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field.
Next click:
•Add - to add this range of VLAN(s) to be mapped to the MST instance.
•Remove - to remove this range of VLAN(s) from being mapped to the MST instance.
•Clear - to remove all VLAN(s) from being mapped to this MST instance.
Enabled VLAN(s) This field displays which VLAN(s) are mapped to this MST instance.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box fiel d is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ta ble 62 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
151
11.8.1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration
To configure MSTP ports, click Port in the Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol >
MSTP screen.
Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance.
Priority Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in
the Switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range
is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is
recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the
media, the higher the cost - see Table 55 on page 132 for more information.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This sav es yo ur changes to the S witch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses this ch ange if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scre en afresh.
Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance.
VLAN This field displays the VID (or VID ranges) to which the MST instance is mapped.
Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s pecific entry.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
Ta ble 62 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
152
Figure 102 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port (Standalone mode)
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
153
Figure 103 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 63 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a
computer. An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding
state immediately without going through listening and learning stat es right after the port
is configured as an edge port or when its link st atus changes.
Note: An edge port becomes a non-edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data
Unit (BPDU).
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
154
11.9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the
status screen as shown next. See Section 11.1.5 on page 134 for more information on MSTP.
Note: This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch.
Figure 104 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP
Root Guard
(Standalone
mode)
Select this check box to enable root guard on this port in order to prevent the switch(es)
attached to the port from becoming the root bridge.
With root guard enabled, a port is blocked when the Switch receives a superior BPDU on
it. The Switch allows traffic to pass through this port again when the switc h connected to
the port stops to send superior BPDUs.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to t he Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned o ff or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scre en afresh.
Ta ble 63 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > MSTP > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
155
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 64 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Click Configuration to specify whic h STP m ode y ou wa nt to ac tivate. Click MSTP to edit
MSTP settings on the Switch.
CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this S witch.
This Switch may also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Hello Time
(second) This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configu ration
message.
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a
configurati on message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second) This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is,
listening to learning to forwarding).
Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of th e Spanning Tr ee.
Configuration
Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region.
Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region.
Configuration
Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN-MSTI mapping information.
This field displays the 16-octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU. This field
displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the sy stem.
T opology Changed
Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Time Since Last
Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Instance: T hese fields displa y the MSTI to VLAN ma pping. In other words, whic h VLANs run on each
spanning tree instance.
Instance This field displays the MSTI ID.
VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI .
MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view.
Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance. Our Bridge is this Switch. This Switch may
also be the root bridge.
Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address.
This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch.
Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch.
Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must
communicate with the root of the MST instance.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
156
Port State This field displays the port state in STP.
•Discarding - The port does not forward/process received frames or learn MAC
addresses, but still listens for BPDUs.
•Learning - The port learns MAC addresses and processes BPDUs, but does not
forward frames yet.
•Forwarding - The port is operating normally. It learns MAC addresses, processe s
BPDUs and forwards received frames.
Port Role This field displays the role of the port in STP.
•Root - A forw arding port o n a non-root bridge , which has the lowest path cost and is
the best port from the non-root bridge to the root bridge. A root bridge do es not hav e
a root port.
•Designated - A forwarding port on the designated bridge for each connected LAN
segment. A designated bridge has the lowest path cost to the root bridge among the
bridges connected to the LAN segment. All the ports on a root bridge (root switch) are
designated ports.
•Alternate - A blocked port, which has a best alternate path to the root bridge. This
path is different from using the root port. The port moves to the forwarding state
when the designated port for the LAN segment fails.
•Backup - A blocked port, which has a backup/redundant path to a LAN segment
where a designated port is already connected when a switch has two links to the
same LAN segment.
•Disabled - Not strictly part of STP. The port can be disabled manually.
Designated Bridge
ID This field displays the identifi er of the designated bridge to which this port belongs when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise , it displays the ide ntifier of the designated bridge
for the LAN segment to which this port is connected.
Designated Port
ID This field displays the priority and number of the bridge port (on the designated bridge),
through which the designat ed bridge transmits the stored configuration messages.
Designated Cost This field displays the path cost to the LAN segment to which the port is connected when
the port is a designated port. Otherwise, it displays the path cost to the root bridge from
the designated port for the LAN segament to which this port is connected.
Root Guard State
(Standalone
mode)
This field displays the state of the port on which root guard is enabled.
•Root - inconsistent - the Switch receives superior BPDUs on the port and blocks the
port.
•Forwarding - the Switch unbolcks and allows the port to forward frames again.
Ta ble 64 Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol > Status: MSTP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
157
CHAPTER 12
Bandwidth Control
This chapter shows you how to cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen.
12.1 Bandwidth Control Overview
Bandwidth c ontrol means defining a maximum allo wable bandwidth for incoming and/or out-going
traffic flows on a port.
12.1.1 CIR and PIR
The Committed Information R ate (CIR) is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on
a port. The Peak In formation Rate (PIR) is the ma ximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic
flow on a port when there is no network congestion.
The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth. If the CIR is
reached, packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR. When network congestion occurs, packets
through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop.
Note: The CIR should be less than the PIR.
Note: The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.
12.2 Bandwidth Control Setup
Click Ad vanced Applic ation > Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen
as shown next.
Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
158
Figure 105 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control (Standalone mode)
Figure 106 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 65 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch .
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose th e slot nu mber
of the Switch in a stack.
Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
159
Port
(Standalone or
stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the co mmon settings an d then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Rate
Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port.
Commit
Rate Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming
traf fic flow on a port. The commi t r ate should be less than the peak r ate. Th e sum of com mit
rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.
Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port.
Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming
traffic flow on a port.
Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port.
Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the out-going
traffic flow on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or lo ses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 65 Advanced Application > Bandwidth Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
160
CHAPTER 13
Broadcast Storm Control
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.
13.1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure
(DLF) packets the Switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of
allowable broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets
are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your
network. You can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
Click Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control i n the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown next.
Figure 107 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control (Standalone mode)
Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
161
Figure 108 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 66 Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch. Clear this check box to
disable this feature.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Broadcast (pkt/
s) Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port rece ives per second.
Multicast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
DLF (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the port
receives per second.
Apply Click Apply to save your change s to the Switch ’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses thes e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
162
CHAPTER 14
Mirroring
This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens.
14.1 Port Mirroring
Po rt mirroring allows you to copy a tr affic flow to a monitor port (the port y ou copy the tr affic to) in
order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
The Switch supports both local port mirroring and remote port mirroring.
In local port mirroring, the mirroring ports (through wh ich traffic y ou copy passes) and the monitor
port are on the same device.
In remote port mirroring (RMirror), the mirroring ports and monitor port can be on different devices
in a network. You can use it to monitor multiple switches across your network. The traffic from the
source device’s mirroring port(s) is sent to a reflector port for VLAN tagging and copied to the
connected port(s). Traffic are then carried over the specified remote port mirroring (RMirror) VLAN
and sent to the destination device’s monitor port through the connected ports that connect to other
switches.
Mirroring port Monitor port
Mirroring port
Reflector port Connected port
Connected port Connected port
Monitor port
Remote Port Mirroring (RMirror) VLAN
Connected port
Source Intermediate Destination
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
163
Single-Destination RMirror
If the mirrored traffic is forwarded to one single destination switch, you can disable the reflector
port. The Switch adds RMirror VLAN tag and forw ards mirrored traffic from the mirroring port to the
connected port directly.
Multi-Destination RMirror
If you configure more than one connected port on the source switch to forward the mirrored traffic
to multiple destination switches, you must enable a reflector port on the source switch.
Mirroring port Connected port Connected port Connected port Monitor port
Remote Port Mirroring (RMirror) VLAN
Connected port
Source Intermediate Destination
Mirroring port
Reflector port
Connected port Connected port Connected port Monitor port
Remote Port Mirroring (RMirror) VLAN
Connected ports
Source
Intermediate A Destination A
Connected port Monitor port
Connected port Monitor port
Destination B
Destination C
Connected port Connected port
Intermediate B
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
164
Port Rules in Port Mirroring
The following table shows the rule for a port in remote port mirroring. For example, a port on the
source device can be a mirroring port in both RMirror VLAN 1 and RMirror VLAN 2. But when the
port is the source device’s mirroring port in RMirror VLAN 1, it cannot be the reflector port or
monitor port in another RMirror VLAN.
The following table shows the rule for a port used in both local port mirroring and remote port
mirroring. For example, the RMirror mirroring port on the source device can also be used as the
mirroring port in local port mirroring. But it cannot be the monitor port in local port mirroring.
Table 67 Port Rules between Different Remote Port Mirroring VLANs
RMirror VLAN 1
Source
Mirroring
Port
Source
Reflector
Port
Connected
Port
Source
Connected
Port in Single-
Destination
RMirror
Destination
Monitor Port
RMirror
VLAN 2
Source
Mirroring
Port YNY N N
Source
Reflector
Port NNN N N
Connected
Port YNY Y N
Source
Connected
Port in
Single-
Destination
RMirror
NNY N N
Destination
Monitor Port NNN N N
Table 68 Port Rules between Remote and Local Port Mirroring
RMirror
Source
Mirroring
Port
Source
Reflector
Port
Connected
Port
Source
Connected
Port in Single-
Destination
RMirror
Destination
Monitor Port
Local
Port
Mirroring
Mirroring
Port YNY N N
Monitor
Port NNN N N
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
165
14.1.1 Local Port Mirroring
Click Advanced Application > Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen.
Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port.
Figure 109 Advanced Application > Mirroring (Standalone mode)
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
166
Figure 110 Advanced Application > Mirroring (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 69 Advanced Application > Mirroring
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch. Clear this check box to disable
the feature.
Monitor Port The monitor port is the port yo u copy the tr a ffic to in order to examine it in more detail without
interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). Type the port number of the monitor
port. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Slot
(Stacking
mode)
This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number of
the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if y ou wan t to make some sett ings the same for al l ports. Use this row f irst to
set the comm on settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop-down list box. Choices
are Egress (outgoing), Ingress (incoming) and Both.
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
167
14.1.2 Remote Port Mirroring
Use this screen to create a remote port mirroring (RMirror) VLAN through which the mirrored traffic
is forwarded.
Click the RMirror link in the Advanced Application > Mirroring screen. The following screen
opens.
Figure 111 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your change s to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 69 Advanced Application > Mirroring (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 70 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the option to enable the VLAN.
RMirror VLAN ID Specify the ID number of remote port mirroring (RMirror) VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field displays the ID number of the RMirror VLAN. Click on the VLAN ID number to
change the settings.
Select an entry’s check box to select a sp ecific entry. Otherwise, sele ct the check box
in the table heading row to select all entries.
Active This field display s whether the VLAN is enabled or not.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
168
14.1.3 Source
Use this screen to configure the reflector port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the
monitor port when the Switch is the source device in remote port mirroring.
Click the Source link in the RMirror screen. The following scre en opens.
Figure 112 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Source (Standalone mode)
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
169
Figure 113 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Source (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 71 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Source
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RMirror VLAN ID Select the RMirror VLAN over which the mirrored traffic is forwarded.
Priority Enter the priority of the mirrored traffic.
Reflector Port Select the check box to enable the specified reflector port.
Enter the number of reflector port that adds the RMirror VLAN tag to all mirrored tr affic
and forwards traffic to the connected port(s) in the same RMirror VLAN.
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID
and the second field is the port number.
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
170
14.1.4 Destination
Use this screen to specify the RMirror VLAN and configure the monitor port when the Switch is the
destination device in remote port mirroring.
Click the Destination link in the RMirror screen. The following screen opens.
Figure 114 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Destination
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by- port
basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop-down list box.
Choices are Egress (outgoing), Ingress (incoming) and Both.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field displays the ID number of RMirror VLAN over which the mirrored traffic is
forwarded.
Priority This field displays the priority of the mirrored traffic.
Mirror Port
Ingress This field displays the number of port(s) on which the incoming traffic is mirrored.
Egress This field displays the number of port(s) on which the outgoing traffic is mirrored.
Both This field displays the number of port(s) on which the incoming and outgoing traffic is
mirrored.
Reflector Port This field displays whether the reflector port is enabled and the number of reflector
port in this RMirror VLAN.
Ta ble 71 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Source (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
171
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
14.1.5 Connected Port
Use this screen to select the RMirror VLAN and specify the port(s) that helps forward mirrored
traffic to other connected switches and/or receiv e mirrored tr affic from other connected port in the
same RMirror VLAN.
Click the Connected Port link in the RMirror screen. The following screen opens.
Ta ble 72 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Destination
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RMirror VLAN ID Select the RMirror VLAN over which the mirrored traffic is forwarded.
Monitor Port Specify the port to which you copy the traffic in order to examine it in more detail
without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s).
Tagging Select whether to add the RMirror VLAN tag to mirrored traffic on the monitor port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field displays the ID number of RMirror VLAN over which the mirrored traffic is
forwarded.
Monitor Port This field displays the number of port that receives the mirrored tr affic from the source
device for analysis.
Tagging This field displays whether the mirrored traffic is tagged with the RMirror VLAN ID.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the
Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
172
Figure 115 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Connected Port (Standalone mode)
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
173
Figure 116 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Connected Port (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 73 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Connected Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
RMirror VLAN ID Select the RMirror VLAN over which the mirrored traffic is forwarded.
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID
and the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by- port
basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 14 Mirroring
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
174
Connected Port When the Sw itch is a source device in remote port mirroring, select this option to have
the port help forward mirrored traffic to the connected port of the intermediate or
destination device in the same RMirror VLAN.
When the Switch is an intermediate device i n rem ote port mirr oring, selec t this option
to have the port receive mirrored traffic from the connected source or another
intermediate device or forward mirrored tr affic to the conn ected destination or an other
intermediate device in the same RMirror VLAN.
When the Switch is a destination dev ice in re mote port mi rrori ng, select this option to
have the port receive mirrored traffic from the connected source or inte rmediate
device in the same RMirror VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field displays the ID number of port mirroring VLAN over which the mirrored
traffic is forwarded.
Connected Port This field displays the number of port(s) that helps forward mirrored traffic to other
connected switches.
Ta ble 73 Advanced Application > Mirroring > RMirror > Connected Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
175
CHAPTER 15
Link Aggregation
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher-
bandwidth link.
15.1 Link Aggregation Overview
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link.
You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to
under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have. A trunk group is
one logical link containing multiple ports.
The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group.
The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation.
Note: In a properly planned network, it is recommended to implement static link
aggregation only. This ensures increased network stability and control over the
trunk groups on your Switch.
See Section 15.6 on page 183 for a static port trunking example.
15.2 Dynamic Link Aggregation
The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802.3ad standard. This standard describes the Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages
trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the
ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that
is, if an operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user
intervention. Please note that:
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for
LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow
control settings.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
176
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network
topology loops.
15.2.1 Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of th e following information. Port Priority and P ort Number are 0 as it
is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
15.3 Link Aggregation Status
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. Th e Link Aggregation
Status screen displays by default. See Section 15.1 on page 175 for more information.
Figure 117 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status
Ta ble 74 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM
PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Ta ble 75 Link Ag gregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM
PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
177
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.4 Link Aggregation Setting
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting to display the
screen shown next. See Section 15.1 on page 175 for more information on link aggregation.
Ta ble 76 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical link containing
multiple ports.
Enabled Port These are the ports you hav e configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk
group.
The port number(s) displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port
belonging to this group.
Synchronized
Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk
group.
Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following: system priority, M AC address, key, port
priority and port number. Refer to Section 15.2.1 on page 176 for more information on this
field.
The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also
enabled for this group.
Criteria This shows the outgoing tr affic distribution algorit hm used in this trunk grou p. Pack ets from
the same source and/or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the
trunk.
src-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC
address.
src-dst-mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s
source and destination MAC addresses.
src-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
src-dst-ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet’s
source and destination IP addresses.
Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group. It displays:
•Static - if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group.
•LACP - if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
178
Figure 1 18 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting (Standalone mode)
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
179
Figure 119 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 77 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Setting
This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static li nk aggregation.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple
ports.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
180
15.5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Click in the Advanced Applic ation > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP to
display the screen shown next. See Section 15.2 on page 175 for more information on dynamic link
aggregation.
Active Select this option to activate a trunk group.
Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type. Packets from the same source and/or to the
same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk. By default, the Switch uses
the src-dst-mac distribution type. If the Switch is behind a route r, the packet’s destination
or source MAC address will be changed. In this case, set the Switch to distribute traffic
based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly.
Select src-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source MAC address.
Select dst-mac to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination MAC address.
Select src-dst-mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination MAC addresses.
Select src-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s source IP address.
Select dst-ip to distribute traffic based on the packet’s destination IP address.
Select src-dst-ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet’s source and
destination IP addre sses.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.
Note: When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security
settings for a port, you cannot include the port in an active trunk group.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’ s run-t ime me mory. The Switch loses thes e
changes if it is t urned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 77 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Ag gregation Se tting (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
181
Figure 120 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
(Standalone mode)
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
182
Figure 121 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP (Stacking
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 78 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link
Aggregation
Control
Protocol
Note: Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link aggregation.
Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
System Pri ority LACP syst em priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system
priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the LACP “server”.
The LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of
an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The smaller the number, the
higher the priority level.
Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple
ports.
LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
183
15.6 Static Trunking Example
This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2-5.
1Make your physical connections - make sure that the ports that y ou want to belong to the trunk
group are connected to the same destination. The following figure shows ports 2-5 on switch A
connected to switch B.
Figure 122 Trunking Example - Physical Connections
2Configure static trunking - Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link
Aggregation Setting. In this screen activate trunk group T1, select the traffic distribution
algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the
figure below. Click Apply when you are done.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
LACP Timeout Timeout is the time inter v al betw een the individual port exchanges of LACP pack ets in order
to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after
three tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short
timeout (one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from
the trunk group as soon as possible.
Select eithe r 1 second or 30 seconds.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh .
Ta ble 78 Advanced Application > Link Aggregation > Link Aggregation Setting > LACP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
A
B
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
184
Figure 123 Trunkin g Example - Configu ration Screen
Your trunk group 1 (T1) configuration is now complete.
EXAMPLE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
185
CHAPTER 16
Port Authentication
This chapter describes the IEEE 802.1x and MAC authentication methods.
16.1 Port Authentication Overview
Port authentication is a way to v alidate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external
server (authentication server). The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication:
IEEE 802.1x - An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and
password provided by the user. At the time of writing, IEEE 802.1x is not supported by all
operating systems. See your operating system documentation. If your operating system does not
support 802.1x, then you may need to install 802.1x client software.
•MAC - An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and
password of the client.
Both types of authentication use the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC
2138, 2139) protocol to validate users. See Section 24.1.2 on page 254 for more information on
configuring your RADIUS server settings.
Note: If you enable IEEE 802.1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same
port, the Switch performs IEEE 802.1x authentication first. If a user fails to
authenticate via the IEEE 802.1x method, then access to the port is denied.
16.1.1 IEEE 802.1x Authentication
The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to an IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled
port goes through a validation process. The Switch prompts the client for login information in the
form of a user name and password after the client re sponds to its identity request. When the client
provides the login credentials, the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server. The
RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
186
Figure 124 IEEE 802.1x Authentication Process
16.1.2 MAC Authentication
MAC authentication works in a very similar w ay to IEEE 802.1x authentication. The main difference
is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials. The login credentials are based
on the source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password
configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch.
New Connection
Access Request
Authentication Reply
1
8
9
Challenge Response
7
6
Session Granted/Denied
Login Credentials
Identity Request
3
2
Authentication Request
Access Challenge
4
5
Challenge Request
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
187
Figure 125 MAC Authentication Process
16.2 Port Authentication Configuration
To enable port authentication, first activate the port authentication method(s) you want to use
(both on the Switch and the port(s)), then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA >
Radius Server Setup screen.
To activate a port authentication method, click Advanced Application > Port Au thenticat ion in
the navigation panel. Select a port authentication method in the screen that appears.
Figure 126 Advanced Application > Port Authentication
16.2.1 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security
Use this screen to activate IEEE 802.1x security. In the Port Authentication screen click 802.1x
to display the configuration screen as shown.
New Connection
Authentication Request
Authentication Reply
1
2
3
Session Granted/Denied
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
188
Figure 127 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x (Standalone mode)
Figure 128 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x (Stacking mode)
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
189
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
16.2.2 Guest VLAN
When 802.1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports, clients that do not have the
correct credentials are blocked from using the port(s). You can configure your Switch to have one
VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN. If you enable the guest VLAN (102 in the example) on a port (2 in
the example), the user (A in the example) that is not IEEE 802.1x capable or fails to enter the
correct username and password can still access the port, but traffic from the user is forwarded to
the guest VLAN. That is, unauthenticated users can ha ve access to limited network resources in the
same guest VLAN, such as the Internet. The rights gr anted to the Gu est VLAN depends on how the
network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature.
Ta ble 79 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit 802.1x authentication on the Switch.
Note: You must first enable 802.1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on
each port.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some se tt in gs th e sam e for al l ports . Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this checkbox to permit 802.1x authentication on this port. You must first allow
802.1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port.
Max-Req Specify th e number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client(s) before sending
unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN.
This is set to 2 by default. That is, the Switch attempts to authentica te a client twice. If
the client does not respond to the first authentication request, the Switch tries again. If
the client still does not respond to the second request, the Switch sends the client to the
Guest VLAN. The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch
again.
Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to
stay connected to the port.
Reauth-period Speci fy the length of time required to pass before a client has to re-enter his or her
username and password to stay connected to the port.
Quiet-period Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further
authentication requests from the connected client after a failed authentication exchange.
Tx-period Specify the num b er of seconds the Switch waits for client’s response before re-sending
an identity request to the client.
Supp-Timeout Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client ’s response to a challenge
request before sending another request.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
190
Figure 129 Guest VLAN Example
Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port. In the Port Authentication >
802.1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 130 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN (Standalone mode)
Internet
2
VLAN 100
A
VLAN 102
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
191
Figure 131 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 80 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1 x > Guest VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port.
Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited
services.
Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre-configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non-authenticated users
to access limited network resources through the Switch. Y ou must also enable IEEE 802.1x
authentication on the Switch and the associated ports. Enter the number that identifies the
guest VLAN.
Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network.
Host-mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one use r connect to the port
(using a hub).
Select Multi-Host to authenticat e only the first user th at connects to this port. If the first
user enters the correct credential, any other users are allowed to access the port without
authentication. If the first user fails to enter the correct credential, they are all put in the
guest VLAN. Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the
port, rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again.
Select Multi-Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port.
Multi-Secure
Num If you set Host-mode to Multi-Secure, specify the maximum number of users (between
1 and 24) that the Switch will authenticate on this port.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
192
16.2.3 Activate MAC Authentication
Use this screen to activate MAC authentication. In the Port Authentication screen click MAC
Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 132 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication (Standalone mode)
Apply Click Apply to sa ve yo ur changes to the Switch’ s run- time memory. The Sw itch loses the se
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 80 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > 802.1x > Guest VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
193
Figure 133 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 81 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch.
Note: You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each
port.
Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for
authentication. You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
If you leave this field blank, then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the
RADIUS server.
Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for
authentication with the RADIUS server. You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters.
Timeout Speci fy the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails
authentication to try and authenticate again. Maximum time is 3000 seconds.
When a client fails MAC authentication, its MAC address is learned by the MAC address
table with a status o f denied. The timeo ut period you specify here is the time the MAC
address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared. If you specify 0 for the
timeout value, the Swit ch uses the Aging Time configured in the Switch Setup screen.
Note: If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value, then it
supersedes this setting. See Section 6.4 on page 63.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
194
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on this port. You must first allow MAC
authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port.
Trusted-VLAN
List (Standalone
mode)
Enter the ID nu mber( s) of the truste d VLAN(s ) (separated by a comma). If a c lient’s VLAN
ID is specified here, the client can access the port and the connected networks without
MAC authentication.
Apply Click Apply to sa ve yo ur changes to the Switch’ s run- time memory. The Sw itch loses the se
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 81 Advanced Application > Port Authentication > MAC Authentication (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
195
CHAPTER 17
Port Security
This chapter shows you how to set up port security.
17.1 About Port Security
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static
MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch. The Switch can learn up to 32K MAC
addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 32K.
For maximum port security, enable this feature, disable MAC address learning and configure static
MAC address(es) for a port. It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC
address learning as this will result in many broadcasts. By default, MAC address learning is still
enabled even though the port security is not activated.
17.2 Port Security Setup
Click Advanced Application > Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Chapter 17 Port Security
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
196
Figure 134 Advanced Application > Port Security (Standalone mode)
Figure 135 Advanced Application > Port Security (Stacking mode)
Chapter 17 Port Security
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
197
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
17.3 VLAN MAC Address Limit
Use this screen to set the MAC address learning limit on per-port and per-VLAN basis. Click VLAN
MAC Address Limit in the Advanced Application > Port Security screen to display the screen
as shown.
Ta ble 82 Advanced Application > Port Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port List Enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma) on which you want to enable port
security and disable MAC address learning. In stacking mode, the first number represents
the slot and the second the port number. Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for ports 1 to 24 for the
Switch in slot 1 and port 28 for the Switch in slot 2, for example. After you click MAC
freeze, all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port(s) will becom e static
MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen.
MAC freeze Click MAC fre ez e to have the Switch auto matically select the Active check boxes and
clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list.
Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to e nabl e th e port se curit y feature on this port. The S witch forw ards
packets whose MAC address(es) is in the MAC address table on this port. Packets with no
matching MAC address(es) are dropped.
Clear this check box to disable the port security feature. The Switch forwards all packets
on this port.
Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic. For MAC address learning to
occur on a port, the port itself must be active with address learning enabled.
Limited Number
of Learned MAC
Address
Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned on a
port. For example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the devices with these
five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device must wait
until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out. MAC address aging out time can be
set in the Switch Setup screen. The valid range is from “0” to “16K”. “0” means this
feature is disabled.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 17 Port Security
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
198
Figure 136 Advanced Application > Port Security > VLAN MAC Address Limit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 83 Advanced Application > Port Security > VLAN MAC Ad dress Limit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to activate this rule.
Port Enter the number of the port to which this rule is applied. In stacking mode, the first
number represents the slot and the second the port number.
VID Enter the VLAN identification number.
Limit Number Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned on a
port in a specified VLAN. For example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the
devices with thes e five le arned MAC addresses ma y access port 2 at an y one time. A sixth
device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out. MAC
address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen. The valid range is from “0”
to “16K”. “0” means this feature is disabled.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an ex isting one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Port This field displays the number of the port to which this rule is applied.
VID This is the VLAN ID number to which the port belongs.
Limit Number This is the maximum number of MAC addresses which a port can learn in a VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specifi c entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you w ant to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete
button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es) in the Delete column.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
199
CHAPTER 18
Time Range
This chapter shows you how to set up a time range for time-oriented features on the Switch.
18.1 About Time Range
You can set a time range for time-oriented features such as Classifier ACL (Access Control List) rule
which categorizes data packets into different netw ork traffic flow. The advantage of the time range
feature is that it allows you to schedule the active time of configur ations. For example, see Section
19.2 on page 201 to configure the classifier rule with time range.
The time range can be configured in two ways - Absolute and Periodic. Absolute is a fixed time
range with a start and end time. Periodic is recurrence of a time range and doesn’t have an end
time.
18.2 Time Range Setup
Click Advanced Application > Time Range in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 137 Advanced Application > Time Range
Chapter 18 Time Range
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
200
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 84 Advanced Application > Time Range
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a name for this time range rule.
Type Select a time range type. Absolute is a fixed time range that has a set start and end date.
Periodic is recurrence of a time range.
Absolute This sets a fixed time range.
Start Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule begins.
End Specify the year, month, day, hour and minute when the schedule ends.
Periodic This section is available only when you set Type to Periodic.
Select the first option if you want to define a recurring schedule for a consecutive time
period. You then select the day of the week, hour and minute when the schedule begins
and ends respectively.
Select the second option if you want to define a recurring schedule for multiple non-
consecutive time periods. You need to select each day of the week the recurring schedule
is effective. You also need to specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins and
ends each day. The schedule begins and ends in the same day.
Add Click Add to save the time range you entered.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Name This field displays the name of the time range rule.
Type This field displays the type of the schedule .
Range This field displays the time period(s) to which this schedu le applies.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specifi c entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es).
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
201
CHAPTER 19
Classifier
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch.
19.1 About the Classifier and QoS
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address,
destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming port number. For
example, you can configure a classifier to select tr affic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet)
to form a flow .
Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves two separate steps:
1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified tr affic flow (refer to Chapter
20 on page 210 to configure policy rules).
You can also configure policy routing to forward a classified traffic flow to a different gateway for
cost savings and load sharing. See Chapter 41 on page 400 for how to configure policy routing.
19.2 Classifier Status
Use this screen to to view the classifiers configured on the Switch and how many times the traffic
matches the rules.
Click Advanced Application > Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration
screen as shown.
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
202
Figure 138 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classif i er Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.3 Classifier Configuration
Use the Classifier Configuration screen to define the classifiers. After you define the classifier,
you can specify actions (or policy) to act upon the traffic that matches the rules. In the Classifier
Status screen click Classifier Configuration to display the configuration screen as shown.
Ta ble 85 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the Classifier rule.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
Weight This field displays the rule’s weight. This is to indicate a rule’s priority when th e match order is
set to manual in the Classifier > Classifier Global Setting screen.
The higher the number, the higher the rule’s priority.
Name This field displays the name of the Classifier rule.
Match
Count This field displays the number of times a rule is applied. It displays '-' if the rule does not have
count enabled.
Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Any Select Any, then click Clear to clear the matched count for all classifiers.
Clear Select Classifier, enter a classifier rule name and then click Clear to erase the recorded
statistical information for that classifier, or select Any to clear statistics for all classifiers.
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
203
Figure 139 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 86 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable this rule.
Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
204
W eight Enter a number between 0 and 65535 to specif y the rule’ s weight. When the match order is in
manual mode in the Classifier Global Setting screen, a higher weight means a higher
priority.
Log Select this option to have the Switch create a log message when the rule is applied and record
the number of matched packets in a particular time interval.
Note: Make sure you also enable logging in the Classifier Global Setting screen.
Count Select this option to have the Switch count how ma ny times the rule is applied.
Tme Range Select the name of the pre-configued schedule that you want to apply to the rule. The rule will
be active only at th e scheduled date and/or time.
If you select None, the rule will be active all the time.
Ingress Port
Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied. Y ou ma y choose one port only or all
ports (Any).
Trunk Select Any to apply the rule to all trunk groups.
To specify a trunk group, select the second choice and type a trunk group ID.
Packet
Format Specify the format of the packet. Choices are All, 802.3 tagged, 802.3 untagged,
Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged.
A value of 802.3 indicates that the packets are format ted according to the IEEE 802.3
standards.
A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894,
Ethernet II encapsulation.
Layer 2
Specify the fields below to configure a layer-2 classifier.
VLAN
VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source
VLAN ID in the field provided.
Inner
VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any inner VLAN (the customer's VLAN) or select the second
option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided.
Priority
Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a
priority level in the field provided.
Inner
Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any inner priority level or select the second option and
specify a priority level in the field provided.
Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Others and enter the Eth ernet t y pe nu mbe r in h exade ci mal
value. Refer to Table 88 on page 206 for information.
Source
MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select MAC/Mask to enter the source MAC address of the packet in v alid
MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs) and type the mask for the specified
MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’ s MAC address should match.
Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched tr affic’ s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
charact er(s). F or example, if you se t the MAC address to 00:13:49:00: 00:00 and the mask to
ff:ff:ff:00:00:00 , a pac k e t wi th a MAC addre ss of 0 0:1 3:49 :12:34:56 matches this c rit eri a . If
you leave the Mask field blank, the Switch auto matically sets the mask to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.
Destination
Ta ble 86 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
205
MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select MAC/Mask to enter the source MAC address of the packet in v alid
MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs) and type the mask for the specified
MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified MAC address that the traffic’ s MAC address should match.
Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched tr affic’ s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
charact er(s). F or example, if you se t the MAC address to 00:13:49:00: 00:00 and the mask to
ff:ff:ff:00:00:00 , a pac k e t wi th a MAC addre ss of 0 0:1 3:49 :12:34:56 matches this c rit eri a . If
you leave the Mask field blank, the Switch auto matically sets the mask to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.
Layer 3
Specify the fields below to configure a layer-3 classifier.
IP Packet
Length Click Any to classify any size of packet length or manually enter a range of number (from/to)
of packet size in the field provided.
DSCP IPv4/
IPv6 Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP
(DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
Precedence Select Any to classify traffic from any precedence or select the second option and specify an
IP Precedence (the first 3 bits of of the 8-bit To S field) value between 0 and 7 in the field
provided.
ToS Select Any to classify traffic from any ToS or select the second option and specify Type of
Service (the l a st 5 bits of the 8-bi t ToS field) value between 0 and 255 in the field provided.
IP Protocol Select an IPv4 protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value.
Refer to Table 89 on page 207 for more information.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol t ype. This means that the Switch will identify
packets that initiate or acknowledge (establi sh) TCP connections.
IPv6 Next
Header Select an IPv6 protocol type or select Other and enter an 8-bit next header in the IPv6
packet. The Next Header field is similar to the IPv4 Protocol field. The IPv6 protocol number
ranges from 1 to 255.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol t ype. This means that the Switch will identify
packets that initiate or acknowledge (establi sh) TCP connections.
Source
IP Address/
Address
Prefix
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Destination
IP Address/
Address
Prefix
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Layer 4
Specify the fields below to configure a layer-3 classifier.
Source/
Destination
Socket
Number
Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the
socket numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second
option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.
Ta ble 86 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
206
19.3.1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the bottom
of the Classifier screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index field.
Note: When two rules conflict with each other, a higher layer rule has priority over a lower
layer rule.
Figure 140 Advanced Application > Classifie r > Classifier Configuration: Summary Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol
number.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it
is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to th e factory defaults.
Ta ble 86 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 87 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration: Sum mary Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
Weight The field displays the priority of the rule when the match order is in manual mode. A higher
weight means a higher priority.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purposes only.
Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry . Otherwise, select the check box in the table
heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 88 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number
ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
IP ETHII 0800
X.75 Internet 0801
NBS Internet 0802
ECMA Internet 0803
Chaosnet 0804
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
207
Some of the most common IP ports are:
19.4 Classifier Global Setting Configuration
Use this screen to configure the match order and enable logging on the Switch. In the Classifier
Configuration screen click Classifier Global Setting to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Figure 141 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classif i er Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
X.25 Level 3 0805
XNS Compat 0807
Banyan Systems 0BAD
BBN Simnet 5208
IBM SNA 80D5
AppleTalk AARP 80F3
Ta ble 89 Common IP Ports
PORT NUMBER PORT NAME
21 FTP
23 Telnet
25 SMTP
53 DNS
80 HTTP
110 POP3
Ta ble 88 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number
ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
Ta ble 90 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Match
Order Select manual to have classifier rules applied according to the weight of each rule you
configured in Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration.
Alternatively, select auto to have classifier rules applied according to the layer of the item
configured in the rule. Layer-4 items have the highest priority, and layer-2 items has the lowest
priority. For example, you configure a layer-2 item (VLAN ID) in classifier A and configure a
layer-3 item (source IP address) in classifier B. When an incoming packet matches both classifier
rules, classifier B has priority over classifer A.
Logging
Chapter 19 Classifier
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
208
19.5 Classifier Example
The following screen shows an example of configuring a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC
address 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81 on port 2.
Active Select this to allow the Switch to create a log when packets match a classifier rule during a
defined time interval.
Interval S elect the length of the time period (in seconds) to count matched packets for a cl assifier rule.
Enter an integer from 0-65535. 0 means that no logging is done.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes t o the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your change s to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 90 Advanced Application > Classifier > Classifier Configuration > Classifier Global Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
210
CHAPTER 20
Policy Rule
This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules.
20.1 Policy Rules Overview
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria (refer to Chapter 19 on
page 201 for more information). A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested
treatment in the network.
20.1.1 DiffServ
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they
receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on
the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs)
indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network
devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have
to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
20.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per -Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
20.2 Configuring Policy Rules
You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen. Refer to Section 19.2 on page 201 for
more information.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
Chapter 20 Policy Rule
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
211
Click Advanced Application > Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 143 Advanced Application > Policy Rule
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 91 Advanced Application > Policy Rule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable the policy.
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Classifier(s) This field displays the active classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen.
Select the classifier(s) to which this policy rule applies. To select more than one classifier,
press [SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.
Chapter 20 Policy Rule
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
212
Parameters
Set the fields below for this policy. You only have to set the field(s) that is related to the action(s) you
configure in the Action field.
General
Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port. In stacking mode, the first number represents the
slot and the secon d the port number.
Priority Specify a priority level.
DSCP Specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63.
TOS Specify the type of service (TOS) priority level.
Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow . Traffic that exceeds the
maximum bandwidth allocated (in cases where the network is congested) is called out-of-
profile traffic.
Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second (Kbps). Enter a number between 1 and
1000000.
Out-of-Profile
DSCP Specify a new DSCP number (between 0 and 63) if you want to replace or remark the
DSCP number for out-of-profile traffic.
Action
Specify the action(s) the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets.
Select Discard the packet to drop the packets.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the
frames that were marked to be dropped before.
Priority Select No ch a n ge to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Set the packet’s 802.1p priority to replace the packet’s 802.1p priority field wit h
the value you set in the Priority field.
Select Replace the 802.1p priority field with the IP TOS val ue to replace the packet’ s
802.1p priority field with the value you set in the TOS field.
Select Replace the 802.1p priority field with the inner 802.1p priority value to
replace the packet’s 802.1p priority field with the existing customer priority level carried in
the frames.
Queue Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Send the packet to priority queue to replace the packet’s 802.1p priority field
with the value you set i n the Priority field.
Note: If you sele ct Send the packet to priority queue, the system will automatically
select other options except for the No change in the Priority field.
Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and/or DSCP fields in the packets.
Select Set the packet’s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the
TOS field.
Select Re place the IP TOS with the 802.1p priority value to replace th e TOS fie ld with
the value you configure in t he Priority field.
Select Set the Diffse rv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the
value you configure in the DSCP field.
Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port.
Select Send the packet t o the egress port to send the packet to the egress port.
Ta ble 91 Advanced Application > Policy Rule (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 20 Policy Rule
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
213
20.3 Policy Example
The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth
and discard out-of-profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier (refer to
Section 19.5 on page 208).
Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow(s) then set the actions to
be taken on out-of-profile packets.
Out-of-profile
action Select the action(s) to be performed for out-of-profile traffic.
Select Drop the packet to discard the out-of-profile traffic.
Select Change the DSCP valu e to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the
Out of profile DSCP field.
Select Set Out-Drop Precedence to mark out-of-profile traffic and drop it when network
is congested.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue
the frames that are marked to be dropped.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this sc reen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the policy index number. Click an index number to edit the policy.
Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy.
Classifier(s) This field displays the name(s) of the classifier to which this policy applies.
Select an entry’ s check box to select a specific entry . Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 91 Advanced Application > Policy Rule (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 20 Policy Rule
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
214
Figure 144 Policy Example
EXAMPLE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
215
CHAPTER 21
Queuing Method
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.
21.1 Queuing Method Overview
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use the
Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also Priority
Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Set up for related information.
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual
source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
21.1.1 Strictly Priority
Strictly Priority (SP) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the Switch, tr affic
on the highest priority queue, Q7 is transmitted first. When that queue empties, tr affic on the next
highest-priority queue, Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties, and then traffic is tr ansmitted on Q5 and
so on. If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent.
SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
21.1.2 Weighted Fair Queuing
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on its
bandwidth weight (the number y o u conf igure in the Weight field) when there is traffic congestion.
WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights
get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. By default, the weight for Q0 is
1, for Q1 is 2, for Q2 is 3, and so on.
The weights range from 1 to 15 and the actual guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows:
Weight x 2 KB
If the weight setting is 5, the actual quantum guaranteed to the associated queue would be as
follows:
5 x 2KB = 10 KB
Chapter 21 Queuing Method
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
216
21.1.3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has
more traffic than it can handle. A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the
incoming traffic on that port. This queue then mo ves to the back of the list. The next queue is given
an equal amount of bandwidth, and then mov es to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the
number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling, but
services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you configure in the queue
Weight field) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is activated only when a port has
more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with
smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available
bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied.
21.2 Configuring Queuing
Click Advanced Application > Queuing Met hod in the navigation panel.
Figure 145 Advanced Application > Queuing Method (Standalone mode)
Chapter 21 Queuing Method
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
217
Figure 146 Advanced Application > Queuing Method (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 92 Advanced Application > Queuing Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
(Stacking
mode)
This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number of
the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalon
e or
stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the comm on settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Method Select SPQ (Strictly Prio rit y Queuin g), WFQ (Weighted F air Queuing) or WRR (Weighted Round
Robin).
Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue empties,
traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 the lowest.
Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their
bandwidth weight ( the number you configur e in the Weight field). Queues with larger weights
get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queu es on a rotating basis based on their queue
weight (the numbe r you configure in the queue Weight field). Queues with larger weights get
more service than queues with smaller weights.
Weight
Q0-Q7
When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here. Bandwidth is divided across the
different traffic queues according to their weights.
Chapter 21 Queuing Method
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
218
Hybrid-
SPQ
Lowest-
Queue
This field i s applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR.
Select a queue (Q0 to Q7) to ha ve the S witch us e SPQ to service the s ubsequent queue( s) after
and including the specified queue for the 1000Base-T, 1000Base-X and 10 Gigabit Ethernet
ports. For example, if you select Q5, the Switch services traffic on Q5, Q6 and Q7 using SPQ.
Select None to always use WFQ or WRR.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Swit ch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your change s to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 92 Advanced Application > Queuing Method (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
219
CHAPTER 22
VLAN Stacking
This chapter shows you how to con figu re VLAN stacking on your Switch. See the chapter on VLANs
for more background information on Virtual LAN
22.1 VLAN Stacking Overview
A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs, even
those with the same (customer-assigned) VLAN ID, within its network.
Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that enter the
network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service provider can manage
up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094 customer VLANs. This allows a
service provider to provide different service, based on specific VLANs, for many different
customers.
A service provider’s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications. A
service provider’s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications.
The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer. Therefore, there is no VLAN
tag overlap among customers, so traffic from different customers is kept separate.
22.1.1 VLAN Stacking Example
In the following example figure, both A and B are Service Provider’s Network (SPN) customers with
VPN tunnels between their head offices and br anch offices respectively. Both have an identical VLAN
tag for their VLAN group. The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by
adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and
then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network.
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
220
Figure 147 VLAN Stacking Example
22.2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles
Each port can have three VLAN stackin g “roles”, Normal, Access Port and Tunnel Port (the latter
is for Gigabit ports only).
•Select Normal for “regular” (non-VLAN stacking) IEEE 802.1Q frame switching.
•Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN
stacking example figure). The incoming frame is treated as "untagged", so a second VLAN tag
(outer VLAN tag) can be added.
Note: Static VLAN Tx Tag ging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or
Access Port.
•Select Tunnel Port (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service
provider's network. All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service
provider's VLAN (using the outer VLAN tag defined by the Service Provider’s (SP) VLAN ID
(VID)).
Note: Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel
Port.
22.3 VLAN Tag Format
A VLAN tag (service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802.1Q) consists of the following
three fields.
Ta ble 93 VLAN Tag Format
Type Priority VID
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
221
Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame
carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. SP TPID (Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier) is the
service provider VLAN stacking tag type. Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100.
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) is the customer IEEE 802.1Q tag.
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port, then the Switch adds the SP TPID tag to all
incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example
figure).
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port, then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all
incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example
figure) that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the Switch. (If an incoming
frame’s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch, then the Switch will not add
the tag.)
Priority refers to the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic
based on the class of service (CoS) the customer has paid for.
• On the Switch, configure priority level of the inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port Setup screen.
• "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VID is the VLAN ID. SP VID is the VID for the second (service provider’s) VLAN tag.
22.3.1 Frame Format
The frame format for an untagged Ethernet fr ame, a single-tagged 802.1Q frame (customer) and a
“double-tagged” 802.1Q frame (service provider) is shown next.
Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen.
22.4 Configuring VLAN Stacking
Click Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown.
Ta ble 94 Sing le and Double Tagged 802.1Q Frame Format
DA SA Len/Etype Data FCS Untagged
Ethernet frame
DA SA TPID Priority VID Len/Etype Data FCS IEEE 802.1Q
customer
tagged frame
DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len/Etype Data FCS Double-tagged
frame
Ta ble 95 802.1Q Frame
DA Destination Address Priority 802.1p Priority
SA Source Address Len/Etype Length and type of Ethernet frame
(SP)TPID (Service Provider) Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data
VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
222
Figure 148 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking (Standalone mode)
Figure 149 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking (Stacking mode)
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
223
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.4.1 Port-based Q-in-Q
Port-based Q-in-Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN
flows and add the same outer VLAN tag to them, even they have different customer VLAN IDs.
Click Port-based QinQ in the Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking screen to display the
screen as shown.
Ta ble 96 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch.
Slot
(Stacking
mode)
This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number of
the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalo
ne or
stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received (or transmitted) on this port with VLAN
stacking tags. Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority of the Port-based QinQ or the
Selective QinQ screen are ignored.
Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming f rames received on
this port. Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider's netw ork.
Select Tunnel Port (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service
provider's network. Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPID tag to all
outgoing frames sent on this port.
In order to support VLAN stacking on a port, the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes
(1522 Bytes + 4 Bytes for the second tag) to pass through it.
Tunnel
TPID TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame
carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. Enter a four-digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF
that the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel port(s). The Switch
also uses this to check if the received frames are double-tagged.
The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802.1Q. If the Switch needs to communicate
with other vendors’ devices, they should use the same TPID.
Note: You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs (including 8100) in this screen at a time.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses th ese
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
224
Figure 150 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking > Port-based QinQ (Standalone mode)
Figure 151 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking > Port-based QinQ (Stacking mode)
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
225
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
22.4.2 Selective Q-in-Q
Selective Q-in-Q is VLAN-based. It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the
incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags.
Note: Selective Q-in-Q rules are only applied to single-tagged frames received on the
access ports. If the incoming frames are untagged or single-tagged but received on
a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q-in-Q rules, the Switch applies the
port-based Q-in-Q rules to them.
Click Selective QinQ in the Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking screen to display the
screen as shown.
Figure 152 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking > Selective QinQ
Ta ble 97 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking > Port-based QinQ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot
(Stacking
mode)
This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number of
the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalo
ne or
stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number. * means all ports (o n the same Switch).
SPVID SPVID is the service provider’s VLAN ID (the outer VLAN tag). Enter the service provider ID
(from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port. See Chapter 7 on page 101 for more
background information on VLAN ID.
Priority Select a priority level (from 0 to 7). This is the service provider’s priority level that adds to the
frames received on this port.
"0" is the lowest pr iority level and "7" is the highest.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 22 VLAN Stacking
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
226
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 98 Advanced Application > VLAN Stacking > Selective QinQ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to activate this rule.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Port The port number identifies the port you are conf iguring. In stacki ng mode, the fi rst fi el d is the
slot ID and the second field is the port number.
CVID Enter a customer VLAN ID ( the i nner VLAN tag) from 1 to 4094. This is the VLAN tag carried in
the packets from the subscribers.
SPVID SPVID is the service provider’s VLAN ID (the outer VLAN tag). Enter the service provider ID
(from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port. See Chapter 7 on page 101 for more
background information on VLAN ID.
Priority Select a priority level (from 0 to 7). This is the service provider’s priority level that adds to the
frames received on this port.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes if it
is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring th is screen afresh.
Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule. Click on an index number to change the
settings.
Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not.
Name This is the descriptive name for this rule.
Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied. In stacking mode, the first number
represents the slot and the second the port number.
CVID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets.
SPVID This is the service provider’s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the su bscribers.
Priority This is the service provider’s priority level in the packets.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete
button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
227
CHAPTER 23
Multicast
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.
23.1 Multicast Overview
Traditionally , IP packets are tr ansmitted in one of either two wa ys - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group
of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in an IPv4 multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112, RFC
2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (I GMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is similar to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is similar to IGMPv3. MLD allows
an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast
packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD
filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
23.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast
group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not
individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are
used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes
(see the IANA website for more information).
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A
multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8.
23.1.2 IGMP Filtering
With the IGMP filtering feature, you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join.
This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services (such as content information
distribution) based on service plans and types of subscription.
You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per-port basis by configuring
an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
228
23.1.3 IGMP Snooping
The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets tr ansferred between IP multicast routers/switches
and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast gr oup membership. It checks IGMP packets passing
through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly.
IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually
configure them.
The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP
snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. IGMP
snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast
traffic passing through your Switch.
23.1.4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs
The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs. You can configure the Switch to
automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs. The Switch then performs IGMP
snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets. This is referred to as auto mode.
Alternatively, you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on. This is
referred to as fixed mode. In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of
any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN.
23.1.5 MLD Snooping-Proxy
MLD snooping-proxy is a ZyXEL-propriet ary feature. IPv6 MLD proxy allows only one upstream
interface on a switch, while MLD snooping-proxy supports more than one upstream port on a
switch. The upstream port in MLD snooping-proxy can report group changes to a connected
multicast router and forward MLD messages to other upstream ports. This helps especially when
you want to have a network that uses STP to provide backup links between switches and also
performs MLD snooping and proxy functions. MLD snooping-proxy, like MLD proxy, can minimize
MLD control messages and allow better network performance.
In MLD snooping-proxy, if one upstream port is learned via snooping, all other upstream ports on
the same device will be added to the same group. If one upstream port requests to leave a group,
all other upstream ports on the same device will also be removed from the group.
In the following MLD snooping-proxy example, all connected upstream ports (1 ~7) are treated as
one interface. The connection between ports 8 and 9 is blocked by STP to break the loop. If there is
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
229
one query from a router (X) or MLD Done or Report message from any upstream port, it will be
broadcast to all connected upstream ports.
23.1.6 MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to u pdate the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is similar to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a
multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. If the leav e mode is not set to
Immediate, the router or switch sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done
message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the
group.
23.2 Multicast Setup
Use this screen to configure IGMP for IPv4 or MLD for IPv6 and set up multicast VLANs. Click
Advanced Application > Multicast in the navigation panel.
Figure 153 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
9
X
Done
Query
Report
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
230
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.3 IPv4 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This
screen shows the IPv4 multicast group information. See Section 23.1 on page 227 for more
information on multicasting.
Figure 154 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.3.1 IGMP Snooping
Click the IGMP Snooping link in the Advanced Applicati on > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 23.1 on page 227 for more information on
multicasting.
Ta ble 99 Advanced Application > Multicast Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Multicast Cli ck the link to open screens where you can co nfigure IGMP snooping and IGMP
filtering for IPv4.
IPv6 Multicast Click the link to open screens where you can configure MLD snooping and MLD filtering
for IPv6.
MVR Click the link to open s creens where you can create multi cast VLANs.
Table 100 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This fi eld displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group. In stacking
mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
231
Figure 155 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (Standalone mode)
Figure 156 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (Stacking mode)
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
232
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 101 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP snooping.
Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports
that are members of that group.
Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs
with the mult icast hosts attac hed.
Host Timeout Specify the time (from 1 to 16 711 450) in seconds that elapses before the Switch
removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from
the port.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP
control packets. Otherwise, select No-Change to not replace the priority.
IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port
can join.
Note: If you enable IGMP filtering, you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the
ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups.
Unknown
Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame.
Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
Reserved
Multicast Group The IP address range of 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 are reserved for multicasting on the
local network only. For example, 224.0.0.1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and
224.0.0.9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same
network segment. A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP
address within this range to other networks. See the IANA web site for more information.
The layer-2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer-2 protocols,
01:00:0C:CC:CC:CC and 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CD, are also included in this grou p.
Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast
address. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all
ports.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Immed. Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when a n
IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
233
Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value (f rom 200 to 6,348,800) in mi liseconds. Sele ct
this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port.
In normal leave mode, when the Switch receives an IGMP leave message from a host on a
port, it forwards the message to the multicast router. The multicast router then sends out
an IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine whether other hosts
connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group. The Switch f orwards
the query message to a ll hosts connected to the port and waits for IGMP reports from
hosts to update the forwarding table.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an
IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port
from a host.
Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value (from 200 to 6,348,800) in miliseconds. Select
this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port.
In fast leave mode, right after receiving an IGMP leav e me ssage from a host on a port,
the Switch itse lf sends out an IGMP Group-Specific Query (GSQ) message to determine
whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group.
This helps speed up the leave process.
This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an
IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port
from a host.
Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered
in the specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is
dropped on this port.
Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum
number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached.
Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing
multicast forwarding table entry is aged out.
Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new
IGMP report(s) received on this port.
IGMP Filtering
Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select
Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast grou p.
You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP
Snooping > IGMP Filtering Profile screen.
IGMP Querie r
Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router (or
server). The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port.
Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives
IGMP query packets.
Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select this
when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The Switch will
not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. The Switch does not
forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 101 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
234
23.3.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the
IGMP Snooping link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown. See
Section 23.1.4 on page 228 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN.
Figure 157 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping
VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping
VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any
VLANs automatically.
Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the
VLAN(s) that you specify below.
In either auto or fixed mode, the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs (including up to five
VLANs you configured in the MVR screen). For example, if you have configured one
multicast VLAN in the MVR screen, you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen.
The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs.
Note: You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP
Snooping screen first.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP
snooping.
Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes.
VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Note: You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
235
23.3.3 IGMP Filtering Profile
An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch
are able to join. A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be
able to join. Profiles are assigned to ports (in the IGMP Snooping screen). Clients connected to
those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile. Each port can be
assigned a single profile. A profile can be assigned to multiple ports.
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the
IGMP Snooping link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 158 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering
Profile
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, sele ct the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 102 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping
VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
236
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.4 IPv6 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast to display the screen as shown. This
screen shows the IPv6 multicast group information. See Section 23.1 on page 227 for more
information on multicasting.
Figure 159 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
Table 103 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv4 Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Filtering
Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additi on al rule (s ) for a profile that y ou hav e already a dded, enter the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you w ant
to belong to the IGMP filter profile.
End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong
to the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address and
End Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range.
Delete Profile Select a profile’s check box to select a specific profile. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all profiles.
Delete Rule Select the check box(es) of the rule(s) that you want to remove from a profile.
Delete To delete the profile(s) and all the accompan ying rules, selec t the profile(s) that you w ant
to remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete
Rule column, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile/Delete Rule check boxes.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
237
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.4.1 MLD Snooping-proxy
Click the MLD Snooping-proxy link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 23.1 on page 227 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 160 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.4.2 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN
Click the MLD Snooping-proxy link and then the VLAN link in the Advanced Application >
Multicast > IPv6 Multicast screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 23.1 on page 227
for more information on multicasting.
Table 104 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This is the index number of the entry.
VID This fi eld displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group. In stacking
mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
Group Timeout This field displa ys the tim e (in seconds) that elapse s before the S witch remo ves an ML D
group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port.
Table 105 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MLD Snooping-
proxy Use these settings to configure MLD snooping-proxy.
Active Select Active to enable MLD snooping-proxy on the Switch to minimize MLD control
messages and allow better network performance.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing MLD
messages.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
238
Figure 161 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 106 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN on which you want to enable MLD snooping-proxy and
configure related settings.
Upstream
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between general query messages sent by the
router connected to the upstream port. This value should be exactly the same as what’s
configured in the connec ted multicast router.
This value is used to c a lculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
When an MLD Report message is received, the Switch sets the timeout period of the entry
to be T = (QI*RV) + MRD, where T = Timeout, QI = Query Interval, RV = Robustness
Variable, and MRD = Maximum Response Delay.
Maximum
Response Delay Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) the router connected to the upstream port
waits for a response to an MLD general query message. This value should be ex actly the
same as what’s configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to c a lculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
When an MLD Report message is received, the Switch sets the timeout period of the entry
to be T = (QI*RV) + MRD, where T = Timeout, QI = Query Interval, RV = Robustness
Variable, and MRD = Maximum Response Delay.
When an MLD Done message is received, the Switch sets the entry’s lifetime to be the
product of Last Member Query Interval and Robustness Variable
Robustness
Variable Enter the number of queries. A multicast address entry (learned only on an upstream port
by snooping) is removed from the forwarding table when there is no response to the
configured number of queries sent by the router connected to the upstream port. This
value should be exactly the same as what’s configured in the connected multicast r outer.
This value is used to c a lculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
239
23.4.3 MLD Snooping-proxy VLAN Port Role Setting
Click the Port Role Setting link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast >
MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 23.1 on page
227 for more information on multicasting.
Last Member
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between the MLD group-specific queries sent
by an upstream port when an MLD Done message is received. This value should be
exactly the same as what’s configured in the connected multicast router.
This value is used to c a lculate the amount of time an MLD snooping membership entry
(learned only on the upstream port) can remain in the forwarding table after a Done
message is receive d .
When an MLD Done message is received, the Switch sets the entry’s lifetime to be the
product of Last Member Query Interval and Robustness Variable.
Downstream
Query Interval Enter the amount of time (in miliseconds) between general query messages sent by the
downstream port.
Maximum
Response Delay Enter the maximum time (in miliseconds) that the Switch waits for a response to a
general query message sent by the downstream port.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned o ff or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of the MLD snooping-proxy VLAN entry in the table. Click on an
index number to view more details or change the settings.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Select an entry’s check box to select a s p ecific entry. Otherwise, sele ct the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) permanently.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 106 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
240
Figure 162 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN >
Port Role Setting (Standalone mode)
Figure 163 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN >
Port Role Setting (Stacking mode)
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
241
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.4.4 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering
Use this screen to configure the Switch’s MLD filtering settings. Click the MLD Snooping-proxy
link and then the Filtering link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast
screen to display the screen as shown. See Section 23.1 on page 227 for more information on
multicasting.
Table 107 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > VLAN > Port
Role Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MLD Snooping-
proxy VLAN ID Select the VLAN ID for which you want to configure a port’s MLD snooping-proxy settings.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, th e first bo x field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Port Role A port on the Switch can be either a Downstream port or Upstream port in MLD. A
downstream port connects to MLD hosts and acts as a multicast router to send MLD
queries and listen to the MLD host’s Report and Done messages. An upstream port
connects to a multicast router and works as a host to send Report or Done messages
when receiving queries from a multicast r outer.
Otherwise, select None if the port is not joining a multicast group or does not belong to
this VLAN.
Leave Mode Sele ct the leave mode for the specified downstream port(s) in this VLAN.
This specifies whether the Switch removes an MLD snooping membership entry (learned
on a downstream port) immediately (Immediate) or wait for an MLD report before the
leave timeout (Normal) or fast leave timeout (Fast) when an ML D leave message is
received on this port from a host.
Leave Timeout Enter the MLD snooping normal leave timeout (in milliseconds) the Switch uses to update
the forwarding table for the specified downstream port(s).
This defines how many secon d s the Switch waits for an MLD report before removing an
MLD snooping membe rship entry (learned on a downstream port) wh en an MLD Done
message is received on this port from a host.
Fast Leave
Timeout Enter the fast leave timeout (in milliseconds) for the specified downstream port(s).
This defines how many secon d s the Switch waits for an MLD report before removing an
MLD snooping membe rship entry (learned on a downstream port) wh en an MLD Done
message is received on this port from a host.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
242
Figure 164 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
(Standalone mode)
Figure 165 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
(Stacking mode)
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
243
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.4.5 MLD Snooping-proxy Filtering Profile
Use this screen to create an MLD filtering profile and set the range of the multicast address(es).
Click the Filtering Profile link in the Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast >
MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 166 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering >
Filtering Profile
Table 108 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable MLD filtering on the Switch.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, th e first bo x field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Group Limit Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num. Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered
in the specified number of multicast groups , an y new MLD Report message is dropped on
this port.
Filtering Profile Select the name of the MLD filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select Default
to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
You can create MLD filtering profiles in the Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD
Snooping-proxy > Filtering > Filtering Profile screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigati on
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
244
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
23.5 MVR Overview
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand (MoD))
that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service prov ider network.
MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the
network. While isolated in different subscriber VLANs, connected devices can subscribe to and
unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN. This improves bandwidth utilization
with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are
configured under MVR. Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP
snooping.
The following figure shows a network example. The subscriber VLAN (1, 2 and 3) information is
hidden from the streaming media server, S. In addition, the multicast VLAN information is only
visible to the Switch and S.
Table 109 Advanced Application > Multicast > IPv6 Multicast > MLD Snooping-proxy > Filtering >
Filtering Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additi on al rule (s ) for a profile that y ou hav e already a dded, enter the profile
name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Start Address Type the starting multicast IPv6 address for a range of multicast IPv6 addresses that you
want to belong to the MLD filtering profile.
End Address Type the ending multicast IPv6 address for a range of IPv6 addresses that you want to
belong to the MLD filtering profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IPv6 address, enter it in both the Start Address and
End Address fields.
Add Click this to create a new entry.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast IPv6 address range.
End Address This field displays the end of the multicast IPv6 address range.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile( s) that you want
to remove, then click the Delete button. You can select the check box in th e table
heading row to select all profiles.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove, then click
the Delete button.
Delete Click Delete button to permanently delete the entries you selected.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
245
Figure 167 MVR Network Example
23.5.1 Types of MVR Ports
In MVR, a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a
multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic. Once configured, the Switch
maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group.
23.5.2 MVR Modes
You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode.
In dynamic mode, the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices
(such as multicast routers or servers) in the multicast VLAN. This allows the multicast devices to
update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver
ports.
In compatible mode, the Switch does not send any IGMP reports. In this case, you must manually
configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN.
23.5.3 How MVR Works
The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device (such as a
computer) in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server, S, via the Switch.
Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch.
When the subscriber selects a television channel, computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch
to join the appropriate multicast group. If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR
multicast group addresses on the Switch, an entry is created in the forwarding table on the S witch.
This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast
traffic.
When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer, an IGMP leave message is sent
to the Switch to leave the multicast group . The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port
(in this case, an uplink port on the Switch). If there is another subscriber device connected to this
port in the same subscriber VLAN, the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination
for the multicast tr affic. Otherwise, the Switch removes the receiver port from the forw arding table.
SMulticast VLAN
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
VLAN 3
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
246
Figure 168 MVR Multicast Television Example
23.6 General MVR Configuration
Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port(s) and a source port for
each multicast VLAN. Click Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR to display the screen as
shown next.
Note: You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the
Switch.
Note: Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN (with the same VID) when you
create a multicast VLAN in this screen.
Figure 169 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR (Standalone mode)
SMulticast VLAN
VLAN 1
A
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
247
Figure 170 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Ta ble 110 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select th is check box to enable MVR to allow one single mult icast VLAN to be sh ared
among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
Group Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printa ble A SCII characters) for identific ati on pu rpose s .
Multicast VLAN
ID Enter the VLAN ID (1 to 4094) of the multicast VLAN.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0- 7) with which the Switch repl aces the priority in out going IGMP or
MLD control packets (belonging to this multicast VLAN).
Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch. Choices are Dynamic and Compatible.
Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports or MLD messages to all MVR source ports in t he
multicast VLAN.
Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports or MLD messages.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
248
23.6.1 MVR Group Configuration
All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to
this multicast group.
Use this screen to configure MVR IP multicast group address(es). Click the Group Configuration
link in the MVR screen.
Note: A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN. However, IP multicast group
addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row
first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Source Port Selec t this option to se t this port as the MV R source port that se nds and recei ves mult icast
traffic. All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN.
Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multic ast traffic.
None Select thi s opti on to se t the port not to partic ipate in MVR. N o MVR m ulticast t r affi c is s ent
or received on this port.
Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames
transmitted.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID. Click on an index number to change the settings.
Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Mode This field displays the MVR mode.
Source Port This field displays the source port number(s).
Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number(s).
802.1p This field displays the priority level.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry . Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete To delete a multicast VLAN(s), selec t the rule(s) that you want to remove, then cl ick the
Delete button .
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Ta ble 110 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
249
Figure 171 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 111 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast VLAN
ID Select a multicast VLAN ID (that you configured in the MVR screen) from the drop-down list
box.
Group Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast gro up in dotted decimal notation.
Refer to Section 23.1.1 on page 227 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP
address for a multicast group.
Refer to Section 23.1.1 on page 227 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
Add Click this to cr eate a new entry.
This save s your changes t o the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses t hese changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
Group Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multi cast group.
End Address This field disp lays the ending IP address of the multicast group.
Delete To delete the profile( s) and all th e accompanying rules, select t he profile(s) that you w ant to
remov e, then click th e Delete button. Y ou can select the check box in the table heading row
to select all profiles.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove, then click the
Delete button.
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
250
23.6.2 MVR Configuration Example
The following fig ure shows a network example where ports 1, 2 and 3 on the Sw itch belong to VLAN
1. In addition, port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic (the
News and Movie channels) from the remote streaming media server, S. Computers A, B and C in
VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic.
Figure 172 MVR Configuration Example
To configure the MVR settings on the Switch, create a multicast VLAN in the MVR screen and set
the receiver and source ports.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove the
selected entry (i es) from the table.
If you delete a multicast VLAN, all multicast groups in this VLAN will also be removed.
Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox(es) in the table .
Table 111 Advanced Application > Multicast > MVR > Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
S
Multicast VID 200
VLAN 1
AB
C
News: 224.1.4.10 ~ 224.1.4 .50
1
Movie: 230.1.2.50 ~230.1.2.60
2
37
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
251
Figure 173 MVR Configuration Example
To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers, configure multicast group
settings in the Group Configuration screen. The following figure shows an example where two
IPv4 multicast groups (News and Movie) are configured for the multicast VLAN 200.
Figure 174 MVR Group Configuration Example
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Chapter 23 Multicast
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
252
Figure 175 MVR Group Configuration Example
EXAMPLE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
253
CHAPTER 24
AAA
This chapter describes how to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on
the Switch.
24.1 Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA)
Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and v alidating access to the Sw itch. The
Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch
itself. The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of
users.
Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do. Different user accounts
may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them. For example, user A may have the
right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot. The Switch can authorize users
based on user accounts configured on the Switch itse lf or it can use an external server to authorize
a large number of users.
Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing. The Switch can use an external server
to track when users log in, log out, execute commands and so on. Accounting can also record
system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch.
The external servers that perfo rm authentication, authorization and accounting functions are known
as AAA servers. The Switch supports RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, see
Section 24.1.2 on page 254) and TACACS+ (Terminal Acce ss Controller Access-Control System
Plus, see Section 24.1.2 on page 25 4) as external authentication, authorization and accounting
servers.
Figure 176 AAA Server
24.1.1 Local User Accounts
By storing user profiles locally on the Switch, your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize
users without interacting with a network AAA server. However, there is a limit on the number of
users you may authenticate in this way (See Chapter 48 on page 458).
Client AAA Server
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
254
24.1.2 RADIUS and TACACS+
RADIUS and TACACS+ are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external
server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory
capacity of the device. In essence, RADIUS and T ACACS+ authentication both allow you to validate
an unlimited number of users from a central location.
The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS+.
24.2 AAA Screens
The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication, auth orization, accounting or all of them on the
Switch. First, configure your authentication and accounting server settings (RADIUS, TACACS+ or
both) and then set up the authentication priority, activate authorization and configure accounting
settings.
Click Advanced Application > AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 177 Advanced Application > AAA
24.2.1 RADIUS Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings. See Section 24.1.2 on page 254 for more
information on RADIUS servers and Section 24.3 on page 261 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the
authentication and accounting features on the Switch. Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in
the AAA screen to view the screen as shown.
Ta ble 112 RADIUS vs TACACS+
RADIUS TACACS+
Transport Protocol UDP (User Datagram Protocol) TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
Encryption Encrypts the password sent for
authentication. All communication between the c lient (the
Switch) and the TACACS server is encrypted.
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
255
Figure 178 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 113 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings.
Mode This field only applies if you configure multiple RADIUS servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured
RADIUS server, if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Swit ch tries to
authenticate with the second RADIUS server.
Select round-robin to alternate be tween the RADIUS se rvers that it sends authent ication
requests to.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the RADIUS server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS
servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers. For example, if
you set the tim eout value to 30 seconds, then the Switch waits for a response from the
first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server.
Index Th is is a read-only number representing a RADIUS server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this
value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external RADIUS server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This
key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch.
This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Accounting
Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings.
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request
response from the RADIUS accounting server.
Index Th is is a read-only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry.
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
256
24.2.2 TACACS+ Server Setup
Use this screen to configure your TACACS+ server settings. See Section 24.1 .2 on page 254 for
more information on TACACS+ servers. Click on the TACACS+ Server Setup link in the
Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown.
Figure 179 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813. You need not
change this value un less your network adm inistrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the
network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the
Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remov e an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the
Switch. This en try is delete d when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigat ion
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 113 Advanced Application > AAA > RADIUS Server Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
257
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
24.2.3 AAA Setup
Use this screen to configure authentication, authorization and accounting settings on the Switch.
Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown.
Ta ble 114 Advanced Application > AAA > TACACS+ Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Server Use this section to configure your TACACS+ authentication settings .
Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS+ servers.
Select index-priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured
TACACS+ server, if the TACACS+ server does not respond then the Switch tries to
authenticate with the second TACACS+ server.
Select round-robin to alternate between the TACACS+ servers that it sends
authentication requests to.
Timeout Specify the am ount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request
response from the TACACS+ server.
If you are using index-priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS+
servers then the timeout value is divided between the two T ACACS+ servers. For example,
if you set the ti meout value to 30 sec onds, then the Switch waits for a response from the
first TACACS+ server for 15 seconds and then tries the secon d TACACS+ server.
Index This is a read-only number representing a TACACS+ server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS+ server in dotted decimal notation.
TCP Port The default port of a TACACS+ server for authentication is 49. You need not change this
value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external TACACS+ server a nd the Switch. This key is not sent over the network. This
key must be the same on the external TACACS+ server and the Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS+ server entry from the Switch.
This entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Accounting
Server Use this sect ion to configure your TACACS+ accounting settings .
Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request
response from the TACACS+ server.
Index This is a read-only number repre senting a TACACS+ accounting server entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS+ accounting server in dotted decimal
notation.
TCP Port The default port of a TACACS+ accounting server is 49. You need not change this value
unless your network adminis trator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external TACACS+ accounting server and the Switch. This key is not sent over the
network. This key must be the same on the external TACACS+ accounting server and the
Switch.
Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS+ accounting server entry from
the Switch. Th is entry is deleted when you click Apply.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s ru n-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n o n-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
258
Figure 180 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Ta ble 115 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication Use this section to speci fy the methods used t o authenticate users accessing the Switch.
Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Swit ch should use (fi rst, second a nd third) to
authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts (users for Switch
management).
Configure the access privilege of account s via commands (see the Ethernet Switch CLI
Reference Guide) for local authentication. The TACACS+ and RADIUS are external
servers. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding
database correctly first.
You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to auth enticate the access privilege
level of administrators. The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them
(first Method 1, then Method 2 and finally Method 3). You must configure the s etti ngs
in the Method 1 field. If you w ant the Switch to check other sources for access privilege
level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields.
Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local
authentication.
Select radius or tacacs+ to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external
servers.
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
259
Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use (fir st, second and third) to
authenticate administrator accounts (users for Switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control > Logins screen. The T A CACS+
and RADIUS are external servers. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set
up the corresponding database correctly first.
You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator
accounts. The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them (first Method
1, then Method 2 and finally Method 3 ). Y ou must configure the settings in the Method
1 field. If y ou w ant the S witch to ch eck ot her sou rces for admini st r at or accou nts, s pecif y
them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields.
Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the
Access Control > Logins screen.
Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the
RADIUS Server.
Select tacacs+ to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the
TACACS+ Server.
Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch.
Type Set whe ther the Switch provides the following services to a user.
•Exec: Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have
different acces s pri vilege level assigned via the external server.
•Dot1x: Allow an IEEE 802.1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID
assigned via the external se rver.
Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types.
Console Select this to allow an admini strator which logs in the S witch t hrough the console port to
have different access privilege level assigned via the external se rver.
Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or T ACACS+ for authorization of specific types of
events.
RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802.1x authorization.
Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch.
Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the
accounting server. This is only valid if you select the start-stop option for the Exec or
Dot1x entries.
Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server(s):
•System - Configure th e Switch to send inform ation when the following system events
occur: system boots up, system shuts down, sy st em ac c o un ti n g is enable d, sys te m
accounting is disable d
•Exec - Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and
logs out via the console port, te lnet or SSH.
•Dot1x - Confi gur e the Sw itc h to send inform atio n wh en a n IEE E 802 .1x cl ie nt beg ins
a session (authenticates via the Switch), ends a session as well as interim updates of
a session.
•Commands - Configure the Switch to send information when com mands of spec ified
privilege level and highe r are executed on the Switch.
Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types.
Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to a ll configured ac counting
servers at the same time.
If you don’t se lect this and you have two accounting servers set up, then the Switch
sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn’t get a response from the
accounting server then it tries the secon d a ccounting server.
Ta ble 115 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
260
24.2.4 Vendor Specific Attribute
RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor-specific information between a RADIUS
server and a network access device (for example, the Switch). A company can create Vendor
Specific Attributes (VSAs) to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server.
The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user
authentication:
• Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to.
• Assign account privilege levels (see the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account
privilege levels) for the authenticated user.
The VSAs are composed of the following:
•Vendor-ID: An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). ZyXEL’s vendor ID is 890.
•Vendor-Type: A vendor specified attribute, identifying the setting you want to modify.
•Vendor-data: A value you want to assign to the setting.
Note: Refer to the documen tation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to
configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RAD IU S server.
Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording logi n events. Select:
•start-stop - to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a
user begins a session, during a user’s session (if it lasts past the Update Period),
and when a user ends a session.
•stop-only - to have the S wit ch send information to the accounting server only when
a user ends a session.
Method Select whether you want to use RA DIUS or TACACS+ for accounting of specific types of
events.
TACACS+ is the only method for recording Commands type of event.
Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event. Select the thresho ld
command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information. The
Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and
higher are executed on the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off o r loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Ta ble 115 Advanced Application > AAA > AAA Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
261
The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch. Note that these attributes only
work when you enable authorization (see Section 24.2.3 on page 257).
24.2.5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute
You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server (refer to your RADIUS server
documentation) to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802.1x authentication. The
port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged. This will also set the port’s VID. The following table
describes the values you need to configure. Note that these attributes only work when you enable
authorization (see Section 24.2.3 on page 257).
24.3 Supported RADIUS Attributes
R emote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) attributes are data used to define specific
authentication, and accounting elements in a user profile, which is stored on the RADIUS server.
This section lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch.
Ta ble 116 Supported VSAs
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
Ingress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 1
Vendor-data = ingress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Egress Bandwidth
Assignment Vendor-Id = 890
Vendor-Type = 2
Vendor-data = egress rate (Kbps in decimal format)
Privilege Assignment Vendor-ID = 890
Vendor-Type = 3
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
or
Vendor-ID = 9 (CISCO)
Vendor-Type = 1 (CISCO-AVPAIR)
Vendor-Data = "shell:priv-lvl=N"
where N is a privile ge level (from 0 to 14).
Note: If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server(s)
and the Switch, the user is assigned a privilege level from the database (RADIUS
or local) the Switch uses first for user authentication.
Ta ble 117 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
VLAN Assignment Tunnel-Type = VLAN(13)
Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802(6)
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = VLAN ID
Note: You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch.
Note: The bolded values in this table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580.
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
262
Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication. Refer to
RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting.
This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch. In
cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it, the format is specified.
24.3.1 Attributes Used for Authentication
The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when
performing authentication.
24.3.1.1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access
User-Name
- the format of the User-Name attribute is $enab#$, where # is the privilege level (1-14)
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
24.3.1.2 Attributes Used to Login Users
User-Name
User-Password
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
24.3.1.3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802.1x Authentication
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Port
NAS-Port-Type
- This value is set to Ethernet(15) on the Switch.
Calling-Station-Id
Frame-MTU
EAP-Message
State
Message-Authenticator
24.3.2 Attributes Used for Accounting
The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when
performing authentication.
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
263
24.3.2.1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Identifier
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Session-ID
- The format of Acct-Session-Id is date+time+8-digit sequential number, for example,
2007041917210300000001. (date: 2007/04/19, time: 17:21:03, serial number: 00000001)
Acct-Delay-Time
24.3.2.2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events
The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent (the difference
between Console and Telnet/SSH Exec events is that the Telnet/SSH events utilize the Calling-
Station-Id attribute):
Ta ble 118 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Console
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
Service-Type
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Delay-Time
Acct-Session-Id
Acct-Authentic
Acct-Session-Time
Acct-Terminate-Cause
Ta ble 119 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Telnet/SSH
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
User-Name
NAS-Identifier
NAS-IP-Address
Service-Type
Calling-Station-Id
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Delay-Time
Acct-Session-Id
Acct-Authentic
Acct-Session-Time
Acct-Terminate-Cause
Chapter 24 AAA
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
264
24.3.2.3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802.1x Events
The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent:
Table 120 RADIUS Attributes - Exec Events via Console
ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM-UPDATE STOP
User-Name
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-Port
Class
Called-Station-Id
Calling-Station-Id
NAS-Identifier
NAS-Port-Type
Acct-Status-Type
Acct-Delay-Time
Acct-Session-Id
Acct-Authentic
Acct-Input-Octets
Acct-Output-Octets
Acct-Session-Time
Acct-Input-Packets
Acct-Output-Packets
Acct-Terminate-Cause
Acct-Input-Gigawords
Acct-Output-Gigawords
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
265
CHAPTER 25
IP Source Guard
25.1 IP Source Guard Overview
IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and
ARP packets in your network. A binding contains these key attributes:
•MAC address
•VLAN ID
•IP address
• Port number
When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet, it looks up th e appropriate MAC address, VLAN ID,
IP address, and port number in the binding table. If there is a binding, the Switch forwards the
packet. If there is not a binding, the Switch discards the packet.
The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from
information provided manually by administrators (static bindings).
IP source guard consists of the following features:
• Static bindings. Use this to create static bindings in the binding table.
• DHCP snooping. Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the
binding table dynamically.
• ARP inspection. Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network.
If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets (typical implementation),
you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection.
25.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the IP Source Guard screen (Section 25.2 on page 267) to look at the current bindings for
DHCP snooping and ARP inspec tion.
•Use the IP Source Guard Static Binding screen (Sect ion 25.4 on page 269) to manage static
bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection.
•Use the DHCP Snooping screen (Section 25.5 on page 271) to look at various statistics about
the DHCP snooping database.
•Use this DHCP Snooping Configure screen (Section 25.6 on page 273) to enable DHCP
snooping on the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server
is located, and configure the DHCP snooping database.
•Use the DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen (Section 25.6.1 on page 275) to specify
whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
266
•Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen (Section 25.6.2 on page 277) to enable DHCP
snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option
82 information to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN.
•Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure screen (Section 25.6.3 on page 278) to apply a
different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN.
•Use the ARP Inspection Status screen (Section 25.7 on page 279) to look at the current list of
MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet.
•Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Status screen (Section 25.7.1 on page 280) to look at various
statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN.
•Use the ARP Inspection Log Status screen (Section 25.7.2 on page 281) to look at log
messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server
yet.
•Use the ARP Inspection Configure screen (Section 25.8 on page 282) to enable ARP inspection
on the Switch. You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded
ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log.
•Use the ARP Inspection Port Configure screen (Section 25.8.1 on page 284) to specify
whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection.
•Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen (Section 25.8.2 on page 286) to enable ARP
inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving
ARP packets from each VLAN.
• Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status screen
(Section 25.10 on page 287) to look at the current IPv6 dynamic and static bindings and to
remove dynamic bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix.
•Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup screen
(Section 25.11 on page 288) to manually create an IPv6 source guard binding table and manage
IPv6 static bindings.
•Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
screen (Section 25.12 on page 290) to have IPv6 source guard forward valid IPv6 addresses and/
or IPv6 prefixes that are stored in the binding table and allow or block data traffic from all link-
local addresses.
•Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
screen (Section 25.13 on page 291) to apply configured IPv6 source guard policies to the ports
you specify.
•Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup screen
(Section 25.14 on page 292) to dynamically create an IPv6 source guard binding table using a
DHCPv6 snooping policy. A DHCPv6 snooping policy lets the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent
from a DHCPv6 server to a DHCPv6 client when it is assigning an IPv6 address.
•Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup screen
(Section 25.15 on page 293) to enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a specific VLAN interface.
•Use the Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup screen
(Section 25.16 on page 294) to specify which ports are trusted and un trusted for DHCP snoop ing.
25.1.2 What You Need to Know
The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from
information provided manually by administrators (static bindings).
IP source guard consists of the following features:
• Static bindings. Use this to create static bindings in the binding table.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
267
• DHCP snooping. Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the
binding table dynamically.
• ARP inspection. Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network.
If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets (typical implementation),
you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection.
25.2 IP Source Guard
Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Bindings are
used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized
packets in the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic
bindings) and from information provided manually by administrators (static bindings). To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard.
Figure 181 IP Source Guard (Standalone mode)
Figure 182 IP Source Guard (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 121 IP Source Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4 Source Guard
Setup Click the link to open sc reens where you can view and manage static bindings,
configure DHCP snooping or ARP inspection and look at various statistics.
IPv6 Source Binding
Status (Standalone
mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can view the current IPv6 dynamic and static
bindings or remove dynamic bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix.
IPv6 Static Binding
Setup (Standalone
mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can manually create IPv6 source guard static
binding entries.
IPv6 Source Guard
Pol icy S et up
(Standalone mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can define policies to have IPv6 source guard
forward valid addresses and/or prefixes and allow or block data traffic from all link-
local addresses.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
268
25.3 IPv4 Source Guard Setup
Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Bindings are
used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized
packets in the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets (dynamic
bindings) and from information provided manually by administrators (static bindings). To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup.
Figure 183 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
IPv6 Source Guard
Port Setup
(Standalone mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can apply the configured IPv6 source guard
policy to a port.
IPv6 Snooping Policy
Setup (Standalone
mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can set up DHCPv6 snooping policies for the
binding table.
IPv6 Snooping VLAN
Setup (Standalone
mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a
specific VLAN interface.
IPv6 DHCP Trust
Setup (Standalone
mode)
Click the link to open a screen where you can specify which ports are trusted for
DHCPv6 snooping.
Table 121 IP Source Guard (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 122 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
Lease This field displays how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds t he binding is valid; for
example, 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still vali d for 2 da ys, 3 hours, 4 minutes, and
5 seconds. This field displays infinity if the binding is always v a lid (for example, a static
binding).
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
static: This binding was learned from information provided manually by an
administrator.
dhcp-snooping: This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies
to all ports.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
269
25.4 IPv4 Source Guard Static Binding
Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection. Static bindings
are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID. Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only
be in one static binding. If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN
ID as an existing static binding, the new static binding replaces the original one. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static
Binding.
Figure 184 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding (Standalone mode)
Figure 185 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding (Stacking mode)
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
270
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 123 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ARP Freeze ARP Freeze allows you to automa tically create static bindings from the current ARP
entries (either dynamically learned or static ARP entries) until the Switch’s binding
table is fu ll.
Note: The ARP learning mode should be set to ARP-Request in the IP Application >
ARP Setup > ARP Learning screen before you use the ARP Freeze feature.
Condition All - Select this and click ARP Freeze to have the Switch automatically add al l the
current ARP entries to the static bindings table.
Port List - Select this an d enter the number of th e port(s) (separ ated by a comma) .
In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port
number. Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for port s 1 to 24 for the Switch in slot 1 and port 28 for
the Switch in slot 2, for example.
ARP entries learned on the specified port(s) are added to the static bindings table
after you click ARP Freeze.
VLAN List - Select this and enter the ID number of the VLAN(s) (separated by a
comma). ARP entries for the specified VLAN(s) are added to the static bindings table
after you click ARP Freeze.
Static Binding
MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding.
IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the bind ing.
Port Specify the port(s) in the binding. If this binding has one port, select the first radio
button and enter the port number in the field to the ri ght. In stacking mode, the first
field is the slot ID and the second field is the port number. If this binding applies to
all ports, select Any.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or, if not
applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding. Click on an index number to
view more details or change the settings.
MAC Address Th is field displays the source MAC address in the binding.
IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding.
Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid.
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
static: This binding was learned from information provided manually by an
administrator.
VLAN This field displays the sourc e VLAN ID in the binding.
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID
and the second field is the port number.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
271
25.5 DHCP Snooping
Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Gu ar d > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP
Snooping.
Figure 186 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry . Otherwise, select the check box
in the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to
remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clea r the check boxes above.
Table 123 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > Static Binding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
272
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 124 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Database Status
This section dis plays the cur rent settings for the DHCP snooping database. You can
configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen. See Section 25.6 on
page 273.
Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database.
Write delay timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch trie s to complete a specif ic
update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Abort timer This field displays how long (in seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP
snooping database after the current bindings change.
This section displays information about the current update and the next update of
the DHCP snooping database.
Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or acce ss of the DHCP snooping
database.
none: The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database.
read: The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database.
write: The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database.
Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer (i n seconds) the Switch tries to complete the
current update before it gives up. It displays Not Running if the Switch is not
updating the DHCP snooping database right now.
Abort timer expiry This field displays when (in seconds) the Switch is going to update the DHCP
snooping database again. It displays Not Running if the current bindings hav e not
changed since the last update.
This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP
snooping database.
Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
successfully.
Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database
unsuccessfully.
This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch
successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database.
Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP
snooping database for any reason.
Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the
DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured
for the DHCP snooping database.
Successful transfers This field di splays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated
the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully.
Failed transfers This field displays the number of time s the Switch was unable to read bindings
from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP
snooping database successfully.
Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings
from the DHCP snooping database.
Successful writes This field displays the number of times th e Switch updated the bindings in the
DHCP snooping database successfully.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
273
25.6 DHCP Snooping Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch (not on specific VLAN), specify the VLAN
where the defau lt DHCP server is loca ted , and configure the DHCP snooping database. The DHCP
snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure, external TFTP server so that they are
still av ailable after a restart. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard
> IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure.
Failed writes This field displays the number of times th e Swit ch was unable to update the
bindings in the DHCP snooping database.
Database detail
First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database
for any reason.
Last ignored bindings
counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored
bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can
clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands. See the
Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide.
Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch
already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port
number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch
was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease
time had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID
does not exist anymore.
Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason
from the DHCP binding database.
Total ignored bindings
counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read
bindings from the DHCP binding database. You can clear these counters by
restarting the Switch or using CLI commands. See the Ethernet Switch CLI
Reference Guide.
Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the
Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port
number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore.
Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the
Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database.
Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease
time had already expired.
Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN
ID does not exist anymore.
Table 124 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
274
Figure 187 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 125 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch. You still have to enable DHCP
snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there
are no trusted ports.
DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a
specific VLAN.
Note: You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too.
You can select an option 82 profile in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen
(Section 25.6.2 on page 277) to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP
requests from different VLAN.
Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific
VLAN.
Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval, it is possible that the next
update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or
timed out. In this case, the Switch waits to start the next update unti l it completes the
current one.
Agent URL Enter the l oc ation of the DHCP snooping database. The location shou ld be expressed
like this: tftp://{domain name or IP address}/directory, if applicable/file
name; for example, tftp://192.168.10.1/database.txt.
Timeout interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch tries to complete a specific update in
the DHCP snooping database before it gives up.
Write delay
interval Enter how long (10-65535 seconds) the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping
database the first time the current bindings change after an update. Once the next
update is scheduled, additional changes in current bindings are automatically included
in the next update.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
275
25.6.1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are
no trusted ports.
You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port (trusted or untrusted)
can receive each second. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >
IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port.
Renew DHCP
Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database, and click Renew if you want the
Switch to load it. You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP
snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL.
When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database, it does not
discard the current dynamic bindings first. If there is a conflict, the Switch keeps the
dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the
DHCP Snooping screen (Section 25.5 on page 271).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Cli ck this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 125 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
276
Figure 188 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure> Port
(Standalone mode)
Figure 189 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure> Port
(Stacking mode)
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
277
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.6.2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch
adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information (Chapter 43 on page 413) to DHCP requests that the
Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced Application >
IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN.
Figure 190 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN
Table 126 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard S etup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID
and the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch).
Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switch es, and the S witch discards
DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too
high.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards D H CP packets
from untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of
the current bindings.
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and
source port do not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
Rate (pps) Specify th e maximum number for DHCP packets (1-2 048) that the Swi tch receives from
each port each second. The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets. Enter 0 to
disable this limit, which is recommended for trusted ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Cli ck this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
278
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.6.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP
Snooping > Configure > VLAN > Port.
Figure 191 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN >
Port
Table 127 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section belo w.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below.
Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the sec tion below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in th e range spec ified above. If you
configure the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN. You still have to enable DHCP
snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are
no trusted ports.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to a ll ports in the
specified VLAN(s). The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port nu mber,
VLAN ID and/or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it
broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in
the DHCP Snooping Configure screen (see Section 25.6 on page 273).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
279
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.7 ARP Inspection Status
Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the
Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet. When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP
packet, it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address
and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet. To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection.
Table 128 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > DHCP Snooping > Configure > VLAN >
Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comm a (,) or hyphen (-) for a
range. For example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for ports 1 to 24 for the Switch in slot 1 and port 28 for the Switch
in slot 2, for example.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified
port(s) in this VLAN. The Switch adds the information (such as slot number, port number,
VLAN ID and/or system name) specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it
broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN, if specified, or VLAN. You can specify the DHCP VLAN in
the DHCP Snooping Configure screen (see Section 25.6 on page 273).
Note: The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP
Snooping > Con f igure > VLAN screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable,
to clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change
the settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port (s) to which the S witch applies t he settings. In stacking mode,
the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove in the Delete column, then click the
Delete button to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
280
Figure 192 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.7.1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status
Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP
Inspection > VLAN Status.
Table 129 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Total number of
filters This field displa ys the c urrent number of MA C address filters that were created because
the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter.
Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet. In stacking mode, the
first field is the slot ID and the second field is the port number.
Expiry (sec) This field displays how long (in seconds) the MAC address filter remains in the Switch.
You can also delete the record manually (Delete).
Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded.
MAC+VLAN: The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table.
IP: The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table, but the IP address was not
valid.
Port: The MAC address, VLAN ID , and IP address were in the binding table, but the port
number was not valid.
Select an entry’ s ch eck box to selec t a specific entry. Otherwise, sele ct the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click this to remove the selected entries.
Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above.
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information
cannot be seen in one screen.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
281
Figure 193 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > VLAN Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.7.2 ARP Inspection Log Status
Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not
been sent to the syslog server yet. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source
Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status.
Figure 194 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status
Table 130 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below.
Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section
below.
Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below. Then, enter
the lowest VLAN ID (Start VID) and the highest VLAN ID (End VID) you want to look
at.
Apply Click this to display t he specified range of VLA Ns in the sectio n below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range spec ified above.
Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the
Switch last restarted.
Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN
since the Switch last restarted.
Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since
the Switch last restarted.
Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN
since the Switch last restarted.
Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN
since the Switch last restarted.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
282
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.8 ARP Inspection Configure
Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch. You can also configure the length of time
the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log.
To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard
Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure.
Table 131 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Log Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets
and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet.
Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP pack ets
and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet. If one or more log messages
are dropped due to unavailable buffer, there is an entry called overflow with the
current number of dropped log messages.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message.
Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet. In stacking mode, the first
field is the slot ID and the second field is the port number.
VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of t he ARP packet.
Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet.
Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet.
Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log
message. The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP
packets in the log c onsolidation int erval into one log message. You can configure
this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen. See Section 25.8 on page
282.
Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated.
dhcp deny: An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding
with the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
static deny: An ARP packet w as discarded because it violated a static binding with
the same MAC address and VLAN ID.
deny: An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same
MAC address and VLAN ID.
dhcp permit: An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic
binding.
static permit: An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding.
In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen, you can configure the Switch to
generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the
VLAN ID of the ARP packet. See Section 25.8.2 on page 286.
Time This field displays when the log message was generated.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
283
Figure 195 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 132 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch. You still have to enable ARP
inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports.
Filter Aging Time
Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters.
Enter how long (1-2147483647 seconds) the MAC address filter remains in the Switch
after the S witch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet. The Switch automatically deletes
the MAC address filter afterwards. Type 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be
permanent.
Log Profile
Log buffer size Enter the maximum number (1-1024) of log messages that were generated by ARP
packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet. Make sure this number is
appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval.
If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number, the Switch stops
recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were
dropped due to unavailable buffer. Click Clearing log status table in the ARP
Inspecti on Log Statu s screen to clear the log and reset this counter. See Section
25.7.2 on page 281.
Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog
server in one batch. This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is
determined by the Log Interval. You must configure the syslog server (Chapter 50 on
page 485) to use this. Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log message s
generated by ARP packets to the syslog server.
The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following
examples:
• 4 invalid ARP packets per second, Syslog rate is 5, Log interval is 1: the Switch
sends 4 syslog messages every second.
• 6 invalid ARP packets per second, Syslog rate is 5, Log interval is 2: the Switch
sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds.
Log interval Type how often (1-86400 seconds) the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the
syslog server. Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately. See
Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
284
25.8.1 ARP Inspection Port Configure
Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection. You can
also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port. To
open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup
> ARP Inspection > Configure > Port.
Figure 196 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > Port
(Standalone mode)
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 132 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
285
Figure 197 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > Port
(Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 133 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch).
Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port
(Untrusted).
The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason.
The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The sender’s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current
bindings.
• The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high. You can specify the maximum
rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports.
Limit Rate and Burst Interval settings have no effect on trusted ports.
Rate (pps) Specify the maximum rate (1-2048 packets per second) at which th e Swit ch receiv es
ARP packets from each port. The Switch discards any additional ARP packets. Enter 0
to disable this limit.
Burst interval
(seconds) The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is
monitored for each port. For example, if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1
second, then t he Switch accepts a maxim um of 15 ARP packets in every one-se cond
interval. If the burst interval is 5 seconds, then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75
ARP packets in every five-second interval.
Enter the length (1-15 seconds) of the bu rst interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are
done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
286
25.8.2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure
Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates
log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN. To open this screen, click Advanced
Application > IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure
> VLAN.
Figure 198 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 134 IP Source Guard > IPv4 Source Guard Setup > ARP Inspection > Configure > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section be low.
Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on th e VLAN . Se le ct No to disable ARP inspection on
the VLAN.
Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the
VLAN.
None: The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet
from the V LAN.
Deny: The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the
VLAN.
Permit: The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the
VLAN.
All: The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the
VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
287
25.9 IPv6 Source Guard Overview
The purpose of IPv6 source guard is to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized users by
using a binding table that validates the source of IPv6 traffic. The binding table can be manually
created or be learned through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 snooping (DHCPv6
snooping). IPv6 source guard can deny IPv6 tr affic from an unknown source. The IPv6 source guard
binding table includes:
• IPv6 address
• IPv6 prefix
•VLAN ID
• Port number
• MAC address
Enable IPv6 source guard on a port for the Switch to check incoming IPv6 packets on that port. A
packet is allowed when it matches any entry in the IPSG binding table. If a user tries to send IPv6
packets to the Switch that do not match an entry in the IPSG binding table, the Switch will drop
these packets. The Switch forwards matching traffic normally. The IPv6 source guard related
screens are available in standalone mode.
25.10 IPv6 Source Binding Status
Use this screen to look at the current IPv6 dynamic and static bindings and to remove dynamic
bindings based on IPv6 address and/or IPv6 prefix. Bindings are used to distinguish between
authorized and unauthorized packets in the network. The Switch learns the bindings by snooping
DHCP packets (dynamic bindings) and from information provided manually by administrators (static
bindings). To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Sou rce Guard > IPv6 Source
Binding Status.
Figure 199 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status (Standalone
mode)
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
288
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.11 IPv6 Static Binding Setup
Use this screen to manually create an IPv6 source guard binding table entry and manage IPv6
static bindings. Static bindings are uniquely identified by the source IPv6 address / prefix. Each
source IPv6 address / prefix can only be in one static binding. If you try to create a static binding
with the same source IPv6 address / prefix as an existing static binding, the new static binding
replaces the original one. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >
IPv6 Static Binding Setup.
Table 135 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Binding Status (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear Dynamic
Source Binding Specify how you want the Switch to remove dynamic IPv6 source binding entries when
you click Flush.
• Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the IPv6 source binding table.
• Select IPv6 Address and enter an IPv6 address to remove the dynamic entries
snooped with the specified IPv6 address.
• Select IP v6 Prefix and enter a Prefix address to remove the dynamic entries snooped
with the specified Prefix address.
Flush Click this to remove dynamic IPv6 source binding entries according to your selections.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Source Address This field displays the source IP address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will
not be checked in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field
will not be checked in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will
not be checked in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies
to all ports.
Lease This field displays how many days, hours, minutes, and seconds the binding is valid; for
example, 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still v alid for 2 days, 3 hours, 4 minutes, and 5
seconds. This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid (for example, a static
binding).
Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding.
S: This static binding was learned from information provided manually by an
administrator.
DH: This dhcp-snooping binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
289
Figure 200 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup (Standalone
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 136 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Static Binding Setup (Standalone mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Static
Binding
Source Address Enter the IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix and prefix length in the binding.
MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding. If this binding doesn’t check this field, select
Any.
Note: Y ou cannot choose Any for all three of MAC Address, VLAN and Port. Y ou must fill
in at least one.
VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding. If this binding doesn’t check this field, select
Any.
Port Specify the port(s) in the binding. If this binding has one port, select the first radio button
and enter the port number in the field to the right. If this binding applies to all ports,
select Any.
Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or if not applicable, to cl ear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Source Address This field displays the IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix and prefix length in the binding.
MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field
will not be checked in the binding.
VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding. If the entry is blank, this field will
not be checked in the binding.
Port This field displays the port number in the binding. If this field is blank, the binding applies
to all ports.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specifie d entry.
Cancel Click this to cl ear the Delete check boxes above.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
290
25.12 IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup
Use this screen to have IPv6 source guard forward valid IPv6 addresses and/or IPv6 prefixes that
are stored in the binding table and allow or block data traffic from all link-local addresses. To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy
Setup.
• If you select Validate Address and not Validate Prefix, traffic for a binding entry that matches
a IPv6 address and VLAN ID, port number, and MAC address will be forwarded. If this binding
entry is a IPv6 prefix, the traffic will be denied.
• If you select Validate Prefix and not Validate Address, traffic for a binding entry th at matches
a IPv6 prefix and VLAN ID, port number, and MAC address will be forwarded. If this binding entry
is a IPv6 address, the traffic will be denied.
• If you select both Validate Prefix and Validate Address then traffic matching either IPv6
address or prefix will be forwarded.
Figure 201 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard P olicy Setup (Standalone
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 137 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Validate Address Select Validate Address to have IPv6 source guard forward valid addresses that are
stored in the binding table.
Validate Prefix Select Validate Prefix to have IPv6 source guard forward v alid prefixes that are stored in
the binding table.
Link Local Select Permit to allow data traffic from all link-local addresses; otherwise leave the
setting at Deny. A link-local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically
configured on any interface using the link-local prefix FE80::/10 and the interface
identifier in the modified EUI-64 format.
Add Click this to cre a te the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each policy.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source
guard policy.
Validate Address This field displays the Validate Address status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
291
25.13 IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup
Use this screen to apply configured IPv6 source guard policies to ports you specify. Use port * to
apply a policy to all ports. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard >
IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup.
Figure 202 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup (Standalone
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Validate Prefix This field displays the Validate Prefix status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Link Local This field displays the Link Local traffic status for this IPv6 source guard policy.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specifie d entry.
Cancel Click this to cl ear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 137 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Policy Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 138 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are applied to
all of the ports.
Policy Name Select an IPv6 source guard policy that the Switch will apply to this port.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
292
25.14 IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup
Use this screen to dynamically create an IPv6 source guard binding table using a DHCPv6 snooping
policy. A DHCPv6 snooping policy lets the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server
to a DHCPv6 client when it is assigning an IPv6 address. When a DHCPv6 client successfully gets a
valid IPv6 address, DHCPv6 snooping builds the binding table dynamically. To open this screen,
click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup.
Note: If you do not select Protocol and Prefix Glean, then the Switch cannot perform
DHCPv6 snooping.
Figure 203 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup (Standalone
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 138 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Source Guard Port Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 139 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 snooping policy.
Protocol Select DHCP to let the Switch sniff DHCPv6 packets sent from a DHCPv6 server to a
DHCPv6 client.
Prefix Glean Select this to le arn the IPv6 prefix and length from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Limit Address
Count This is the number of IPv6 addresses and prefixes learned using the IPv6 snooping policy.
Note: The maximum limit address count is the maximum size of the IPv6 source guard
binding table. At the time of writing, it is 50 for the GS2210 S witch series. See the
product datasheet fo r the latest specifications.
Add Click this to cre a te the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
293
25.15 IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup
Use this screen to enable a DHCPv6 snooping policy on a specific VLAN interface. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup.
Figure 204 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup (Standalone
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each IPv6 snooping policy.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this IPv6 source
guard policy.
Protocol This field displays the protocols learned from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Prefix Glean This field displays the IPv6 prefixes learned from DHCPv6 sniffed packets.
Limit Address
Count This field displays the the number of IPv6 addresses and prefixes learned using the IPv6
snooping policy.
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specifie d entry.
Cancel Click this to cl ear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 139 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping Policy Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 140 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Select the VLAN interface to apply the selected DHCPv6 snooping policy.
Policy Select the IPv6 snooping policy to apply to this VLAN interface.
Add Click this to cre a te the IPv6 source guard policy or to update an existing one.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above or if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding.
Interface This field displays the VLAN interface.
Policy This field displays the DHCPv6 snooping policy.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
294
25.16 IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup
Use this screen to specify which ports are trusted for DHCPv6 snooping. To open this screen, click
Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv 6 DHC P Trus t Setu p.
Note: DHCPv6 solicit packets are sent from a DHCPv6 client to a DHCPv6 server. Reply
packets from a DHCPv6 server connected to an untrusted port are discarded.
Use port * to have all ports be Untrusted or Trusted.
Figure 205 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup (Standalone mode)
Delete Select an entry checkbox and click Delete to remove the specifie d entry.
Cancel Click this to cl ear the Delete check boxes above.
Table 140 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 Snooping VLAN Setup (Standalone
mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
295
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
25.17 Technical Reference
This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.
25.17.1 DHCP Snooping Overview
Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding
table dynamically. This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP
servers.
25.17.1.1 Tru sted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping. This setting is
independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for ARP inspection. Y ou can also specify the maximum
number for DHCP packets that each port (trusted or untrusted) can receive each second.
Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches. The Switch discards DHCP packets
from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high. The Switch learns
dynamic bindings from trusted ports.
Note: The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are
no trusted ports.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers. The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted
ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCP server packet (for example, OFFER, ACK, or NACK).
Table 141 Advanced Application > IP Source Guard > IPv6 DHCP Trust Setup (Standalone mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to specify whethe r ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping. If
you do not select this then IPv6 DHCP Trust is not used and all ports are automatically
trusted.
Port This field displays the port number. If you configure the * port, the settings are applied to
all of the ports.
Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are connected to DHCPv6 servers or other switches.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers, and the Switch discards DH CPv6 packets
from untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The packet is a DHCPv6 server packet (for example, ADVERTISE, REPLY, or RELAY-
REPLY).
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the
current bindings.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
296
• The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current
bindings.
• The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet, and the source MAC address and source port do not
match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high.
25.17.1.2 DHCP Snooping Database
The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory. If the Switch restarts, it loads static
bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings, in which case the devices in the
network have to send DHCP requests again. As a result, it is recommended you configure the DHCP
snooping database.
The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP
inspection in a file on an external TFTP server. If you set up the DHCP snooping database, the
Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch
restarts.
You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server. The file has the
following format:
Figure 206 DHCP Snooping Database File Format
The <initial-checksum> helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the
bindings from previous updates. Each binding consists of 72 bytes, a space, and another checksum
that is used to validate the binding when it is read. If the calculated checksum is not equal to the
checksum in the file, that binding and all others after it are ignored.
25.17.1.3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information
The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard. This provides the DHCP
server more information about the source of the requests. The Switch can add the following
information:
• Slot ID (1 byte), port ID (1 byte), and source VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• System name (up to 32 bytes)
This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of
client DHCP request frames. See Chapter 43 on page 413 for more information about DHCP relay
option 82.
When the DHCP server responds, the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field
before forwarding the response to the original source.
<initial-checksum>
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
<binding-1> <checksum-1>
<binding-2> <checksum-1-2>
...
...
<binding-n> <checksum-1-2-..-n>
END
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
297
You can configure this setting for each source VLAN. This setting is independent of the DHCP relay
settings (Chapter 43 on page 413).
25.17.1.4 Configuring DHCP Snooping
Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch.
1Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch.
2Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN, and configure DHCP relay option 82.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that
each port can receive per second.
4Configure static bindings.
25.17.2 ARP Inspection Overview
Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network. This can prevent many kinds
of man-in-the-middle attacks, such as the one in the following example.
Figure 207 Example: Man-in-the-middle Attack
In this example, computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A. Computer X is in the
same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A. Then,
computer X does the following things:
• It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B.
• It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A.
As a result, all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer
X. Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them.
25.17.2.1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters
When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet, it automatically creates a MAC address
filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP
packet. You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch.
These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters (Chapter 10 on page 130).
• They are stored only in volatile memory.
AXB
Chapter 25 IP Source Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
298
• They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use.
• They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands, not in the MAC Address
Filter screens and commands.
25.17.2.2 Tru sted vs. Untrusted Ports
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection. This setting is
independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for DHCP snooping. Y ou can al so specify the maximum
rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports.
The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason.
The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations:
• The sender’s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings.
• The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high.
25.17.2.3 Syslog
The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server (Chapter 50 on page 485)
when it forwards or discards ARP packets. The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log
messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient.
25.17.2.4 Configuring ARP Inspection
Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch.
1Configure DHCP snooping. See Section 25.17.1 .4 on page 297.
Note: It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable
ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table.
2Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN.
3Configure trusted and untrusted ports, and specify the maximum number of ARP pack ets that each
port can receive per second.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
299
CHAPTER 26
Loop Guard
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your
network.
26.1 Loop Guard Overview
Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out
on that port loop back to the Switch. While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to prevent
loops in the core of your network. STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your
network.
Figure 208 Loop Guard vs STP
Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network. This can occur when
a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state. Loop state occurs as a result of human error.
It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable. When a switch in loop
state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re-broadcast
again and again causing a broadcast storm.
If a switch (not in loop state) connects to a switch in loop state, then it will be affected by the
switch in loop state in the following way:
• It will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state.
• It will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back. It will then re-
broadcast those messages again.
The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B. Switch B is in loop state.
When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B, they are sent back to port N
on A as they are rebroadcast from B.
STP
Loop Guard
Chapter 26 Loop Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
300
Figure 209 Switch in Loop State
The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop
state. This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns
on the same port. If this is the case, the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in
loop state.
The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to
switch B. Since switch B is in loop state, the probe packet P returns to port N on A. Th e Switch
then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop
state.
Figure 210 Loop Guard - Probe Packet
The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port. In
other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops. The following figure
illustrates three switches forming a loop. A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also
shown. In this example, the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port. As long
as loop guard is enabled on port N. The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe
packet has returned to the Switch.
Figure 211 Loop Guard - Network Loop
Note: After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re-activate the disabled
port via the web configur ator (see Section 6.6 on page 69) or via commands (see
the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide).
AB
N
AB
P
P
N
A
P
P
N
P
Chapter 26 Loop Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
301
26.2 Loop Guard Setup
Click Advanced Application > Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Note: The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP, MRSTP or MSTP) enabled.
Figure 212 Advanced Application > Loop Guard (Standalone mode)
Figure 213 Advanced Application > Loop Guard (Stacking mode)
Chapter 26 Loop Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
302
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 142 Advanced Application > Loop Guard
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch.
The Switch generates syslog, internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts
down a port via the loop guard feature.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port. The Switch sends probe
packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state. If the Switch
that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port.
Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
303
CHAPTER 27
VLAN Mapping
This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch.
27.1 VLAN Mapping Overview
With VLAN mapping enabled, the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received
from a private network to those used in the service provider’s network.
The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports (non-management ports) against the
VLAN mapping table first, the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forw arding them
through the Gigabit uplink port. When VLAN mapping is enabled, the Switch discards the tagged
packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table. If the incoming packets are
untagged, the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting.
Note: You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time.
27.1.1 VLAN Mapping Example
In the following example figure, packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a
pre-configured VLAN mapping rule. The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before
forwarding the packets. Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 (such as 10) and received
on port 3 will be dropped.
Figure 214 VLAN mapping example
27.2 Enabling VLAN Mapping
Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown.
Port 3
12
10
123
10
Service Provider
Network
Chapter 27 VLAN Mapping
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
304
Figure 215 VLAN Mapping (Standalone mod e)
Figure 216 VLAN Mapping (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 143 VLAN Mapping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Chapter 27 VLAN Mapping
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
305
27.3 Configuring VLAN Mapping
Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as
shown. Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule(s).
Figure 217 VLAN Mapping Configuration (S tandalone mode)
Figure 218 VLAN Mapping Configuration (Stacking mode)
Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN ma pping feature on this port. Clear this check bo x
to disable the VLAN mapping feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 143 VLAN Mapping (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 27 VLAN Mapping
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
306
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 144 VLAN Mapping Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Check this box to activate this rule.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Port Type a port to be included in this rule. For stacking mode, the first field is the slot ID, the
second field is the port number.
VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094. This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be
translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VID field.
Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID (from 1 to 4094) into which the customer VID carried in the packets will
be translated.
Priority Select a priority level (from 0 to 7). This is the priority level that replaces the customer
priority level in th e tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This save s your change s to the Sw itch’ s run-tim e memory. The Switch loses thes e changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Index This is t he number of the VLAN mappin g entry in the table. Click on an index number to
change the settings.
Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not.
Name This is the descriptive name for this rule.
Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied. In stacking mode, the first number
represents the slot and the second the port number.
VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets.
Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets.
Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete
button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
307
CHAPTER 28
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
This chapter shows you how to configure layer-2 protocol tunneling on the Switch.
28.1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview
Layer-2 pr otocol tunneling (L2PT) is used on the service prov ider's edge devices. L2PT allows edge
switches (1 and 2 in the following figure) to tunnel layer-2 STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), CDP
(Cisco Discovery Protocol) and VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) packets between customer switches
(A, B and C in the following figure) connected through the service provider’s network. The edge
switch encapsulates layer-2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them
across the service provider’s network to other edge switches.
Figure 219 Layer-2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario
In the following example, if you enable L2PT for STP, you can have switches A, B, C and D in the
same spanning tree, even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B, C and D.
Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider’s network.
To emulate a point-to-point topology between two customer switches at different sites, such as A
and B, you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and 2 for PAgP (Port Aggregation
Protocol), LACP or UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection).
12
AC
Service Provider's
Network
STP
CDP
B
VTP
STP
VTP
CDP
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
308
Figure 220 L2PT Network Example
28.1.1 Layer-2 Protocol Tunneling Mode
Each port can have two layer-2 protocol tunneling modes, Access and Tunnel.
•The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider's edge device (1 or 2 in Figure 220 on
page 308) and connected to a customer switch (A or B). Incoming layer-2 protocol packets
received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports.
•The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider's network and connected to
another service provider’ s switch. Incoming encapsulated lay er -2 protocol packets receiv ed on a
tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port.
28.2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
Click Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the
screen as shown.
12
A
B
Service Provider's
Network C
D
STP
STP
STP
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
309
Figure 221 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (Standalone mode)
Figure 222 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (Stacking mode)
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
310
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 145 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable layer-2 protocol tunneling on the Switch.
Destination
MAC Address Specify an MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer-2 protocol
packets by replacing the destination MAC address in th e packets.
Note: The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address. If
you use a unicast MAC address, make sure the MAC address does not exist in the
address table of a switch on the service provider’s network.
Note: All the edge switches in the service provider’s network should be set to use the same
MAC address for encapsulation.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) packets so that
other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provid er’s network.
STP Sel ect this optio n to have the Switch tunnel STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) packets so that
STP can run properly ac ross the service provider’ s network and spanning trees can be set up
based on bridge information from all (local and remote) networks.
VTP Select this option to ha ve the Switch tu nnel VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol) packets so that all
customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider’s
network.
Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol) and UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) tunneling for a poin t-to-point topology.
Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco’s proprietary data link layer protocols. PAgP is similar to
LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically. UDLD is to
determine the link’s physical status and detect a unidirectional link.
PAG P Select this option to have the Swit ch send P AgP pack ets to a peer to automati cally negotiate
and build a logical port aggregation.
LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates
and manages trunk groups.
UDLD Select this op tion to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer’s port it connected to
monitor the physical status of a link.
Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer-2 protocol packets and
forward them to the tunnel port(s). Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the
service provider's network.
Note: You can enable L2PT services for STP, LACP, VTP, CDP, UDLD, and PAGP on the
access port(s) only.
Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network. The Switch
decapsulates the encapsulated layer-2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by
changing the destination MAC address to the original one, a nd then forward them to an
access port. If the service(s) is not enabled on an access port, the protocol packets are
dropped.
Chapter 28 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
311
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 145 Advanced Application > Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
312
CHAPTER 29
sFlow
This chapter shows you how to configure sFlow to have the Switch monitor traffic in a network and
send information to an sFlow collector for analysis.
29.1 sFlow Overview
sFlow (RFC 3176) is a standard technology for monitoring switched networks. An sFlow agent
embedded on a switch or router gets sample data and packet statistics from traffic forwarded
through its ports. The sFlow agent then creates sFlow data and sends it to an sFlow collector. The
sFlow collector is a server that collects and analyzes sFlow datagram. An sFlow datagram includes
packet header, input and output interface, sampling process parameters and forwarding
information.
sFlow minimizes impact on CPU load of the Switch as it analyzes sample data only. sFlow can
continuously monitor network traffic and create reports for network performance analysis and
troubleshooting. For example, you can use it to know which IP address or which type of traffic
caused network congestion.
Figure 223 sFlow Application
29.2 sFlow Port Configuration
Click Advanced Application > sFlow in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
sFlow Collector
sFlow Agent
Chapter 29 sFlow
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
313
Figure 224 Advanced Application > sFlow (Standalone mode)
Figure 225 Advanced Application > sFlow (Stacking mode)
Chapter 29 sFlow
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
314
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
29.2.1 sFlow Collector Configuration
Click the Collector link in the sFlow screen to display the screen as shown. You can configure up
to four sFlow collectors in this screen. You may want to configure more than one collector if the
traffic load to be monitored is more than one collector can manage.
Table 146 Advanced Application > sFlow
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable the sFlow agen t on the Switch.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this to allow the Switch to m onitor traffic on this port and generate and send sFlow
datagram to the specified collector.
Sample-r ate Enter a number (N) from 256 to 65 535. Th e S wit ch captu res ev ery one o ut of N pack ets for
this port and creates sFlow datagram.
poll-interval Specify a time interval (from 20 to 120 in seconds) the Switch waits before sending the
sFlow datagram and packet counters for this port to the collector.
Collector
Address Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector.
Note: You must have the sFlow collector already configured in the sFlow > Collector screen.
The sFlow collector does not need to be in the same subnet as the Switch, but it must
be accessible from the Switch.
Note: Configure UDP port 6343 (the default) on a NAT router to allow port forwarding if the
collector is behind a NAT router. Configure a firewall rule for UDP port 6343 (the default)
to allow incoming traffic if the collector is behind a firewall.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 29 sFlow
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
315
Figure 226 Advanced Application > sFlow > Collector
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 147 Advanced Application > sFlow > Collector
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Collector
Address Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector.
UDP Port Enter a UDP port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector. If you
change the port here, make sure you change it on the collector, too. The default port is
6343.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Swit ch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of this entry. Click on an index number to chan ge the
settings.
Collector
Address This field displays IP address of the sFlow collector.
UDP Port This field displays port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector.
Delete Check the rule(s) that you want to remov e in the Delete column and then clic k th e Delete
button.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
316
CHAPTER 30
PPPoE
This chapter describes how the Switch give s a PPP oE termination server additional information that
the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
30.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview
A PPPoE Intermediate Agent (PPPoE IA) is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients. It
helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific
information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per-port or per-port-per-VLAN basis
before forwarding them to the PPPoE server.
30.1.1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format
If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled, the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to PADI (PPPoE
Active Discovery Initialization) and PADR (PPPoE Active Discovery Request) packets from PPPoE
clients. This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature.
The Tag_Type is 0x0105 for vendor-specific tags, as defined in RFC 2516. The Tag_Len indicates the
length of V alue, i1 and i2. The V alue is the 32-bit number 0x00000DE9, which stands for the “ ADSL
Forum” IANA entry. i1 and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub-options, which contain additional
information about the PPPoE client.
30.1.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-
option”. They have the following formats.
PPPoE IA PPPoE Server
PPPoE Client
Table 148 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor-specific Tag Format
Tag_Type
(0x0105)
Tag_Len Value i1 i2
Table 149 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: User-defined String
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
String
(63 bytes)
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
317
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an
Agent Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field. The Switch takes the
Circuit ID string you manu ally configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit
ID string for a port as the second priority. In addition, the Switch puts the PPPoE client’s MAC
address into the Agent Remote ID Sub-option if you do not specify any user-defined string.
30.1.2.1 Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables
If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port, the
Switch adds the user-defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub-option.
The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client, the port number of the PPPoE client and/or the
VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet.
The identifier-string, slot ID, port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound
key (#), semi-colon (;), period (.), comma (,), forw ard slash (/) o r space. An Agent Circuit ID Sub-
option example is “Switch/07/0123” and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client
which is connected to the Switch’s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123.
30.1.2.2 WT-101 Default Circuit ID Syntax
If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port, and
disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE > Intermediate Agent screen, the Switch
automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is
defined in the DSL Forum Working Text (WT)-101. The default access node identifier is the host
name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates “Ethernet”.
30.1.3 Port State
Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent. This
setting is independent of the trusted/untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection. You
can also specify the agent sub-options (circuit ID and remote ID) that the Switch adds to PADI and
PADR packets from PPPoE clients.
Table 150 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Length Value
0x02
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
(63 bytes)
Table 151 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: Using Identifier String and Variables
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Identifier
String
(53 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
Slot ID
(1 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
Port No
(2 byte)
delimiter
(1 byte)
VLAN ID
(4 bytes)
Table 152 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub-option Format: Defined in WT-101
SubOpt Length Value
0x01
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Access
Node
Identifier
(20 byte)
Space
(1
byte)
eth
(3
byte)
Space
(1
byte)
Slot
ID
(1
byte)
/
(1
byte)
Port No
(2
byte)
:
(1
byte)
VLAN
ID
(4
bytes)
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
318
Trusted ports are connected to PPPoE servers.
• If a PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer), PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-confirmation),
or PADT (PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate) packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on
a trusted port, the Switch forwards it to all other ports.
• If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port, the Switch
forwards it to other trusted port(s).
Note: The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE
intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports.
Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers.
• If a PADI, PADR, or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port,
the Switch adds a vendor-specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port(s).
• The Switch discards PADO and P ADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on
an untrusted port.
30.2 The PPPoE Screen
Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch.
Click Advanced Application > PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Click Click He re to go to the Intermediate Agent screen.
Figure 227 Advanced Application > PPPoE Intermediate Agent
30.3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber
information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client.
Click Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display
the screen as shown.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
319
Figure 228 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 153 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch.
access-node-
identifier Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to iden tify the PPP oE intermediate agent. Hyphens (-) and
spaces are also allowed. The default is the Switch’s host name.
circuit-id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority
over this.
The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port (in the Advanced Application > PPPoE >
Intermediate Agent > Port screen) or for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced
Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has pri ority over
this. That means, if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per-Port or Per-Port Per-VLAN
setting, leave the fields here empty and configure circuit-id and remote-id in the Per-Port
or Per-Port Per-VLAN screen.
Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user-defined identifier string and variables
(specified in the option field) to PADI or PADR packets from PPPoE clients.
If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string (using CLI
commands) on the Switch, th e Switch will use the string specified in the access-node-
identifier field.
identifier-
string Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub-option. You can enter up
to 53 ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID
sub-option. The variable options include sp, sv, pv and spv which indicate comb inations
of slot-port, slot-VLAN, port-VLAN and slot-port-VLAN respectively. The Switch enters a
zero into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value.
delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier-string, slot ID, port number and/or VLAN ID
from each other. You can use a pound key (#), semi-colon (;), period (.), comma (,),
forward slash (/) or space.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
320
30.3.1 PPPoE IA Per-Port
Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the
Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per-port basis.
Note: The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent
on the Switch and there are no trusted ports.
Click the Port link in the Int e rmediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 229 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port (Standalone mode)
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
321
Figure 230 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 154 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Server Trusted
State Select whether this port is a trusted port (Trusted) or an untrusted port (Untrusted).
Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers.
• If a PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer), PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-
confirmation), or PADT (PPPoE Active Dis covery Terminate) packet is sent from a PPPoE
server and received on a trusted port, the Switch forwards it to all other ports.
• If a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port, the
Switch forwards it to other trusted port(s).
Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers.
• If a PADI, PADR, or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an
untrusted port, the Switch adds a vendor-s pec ifi c tag t o t he pack et and then forwards it
to the trusted port(s).
• The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but
received on an untrusted port.
Circuit-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID
sub-option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port. Spaces are allowed.
The Circuit ID you configure for a speci fic VLAN on a port (in the Advanced Applicati on >
PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has the highest priority.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
322
30.3.2 PPPoE IA Per-Port Per-VLAN
Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port.
Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent > Port screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 231 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN (Standalone mode)
Figure 232 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN (Stacking mode)
Remote-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds in to the Agent Remote ID
sub-option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port. Spaces are allowed.
If you do not spec ify a string here or in the Remote-id field for a VLAN on a port, the Switch
automatically uses the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port (in the Advanced Application >
PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN screen) has the highest priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 154 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
323
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
30.3.3 PPPoE IA for VLAN
Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the
Switch appends the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN.
Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 155 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > Port > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified
VLAN(s) on the port. For Stacking mode, the first field box is the Slot ID, the secon d field
box is the port.
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to c onfigure in the sect ion below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
Slot / Port For Stacking mode, the fi rst field box disp laysa the Slot ID, the second field box displays the
port number.
Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
Port This field displays the port number specified above.
VID This field displ ays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specifi ed above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them.
Circuit-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID
sub-option for this VLAN on the specified port. Spaces are al lowed.
The Circuit ID you configure here has the highest priority.
Remote-id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds in to the Agent Remote ID
sub-option for this VLAN on the specified port. Spaces are al lowed.
If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote-id field for a specific port, the Switch
automatically uses the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 30 PPPoE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
324
Figure 233 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 156 Advanced Application > PPPoE > Intermediate Agent > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to c onfigure in the sect ion below.
Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below.
Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below.
VID This field displ ays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specifi ed above. If you configure
the * VLAN, the settings are applied to all VLANs.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs. Use this row first and then make
adjustments on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them.
Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN.
Circuit-id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect.
Remote-id Select this optio n to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
325
CHAPTER 31
Error Disable
31.1 Error Disable Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port, and set the
Switch to take an action (such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets) on a port when the
Switch detects a pre-configured error. It also shows you how to configure the Switch to
automatically undo the action after the error is gone.
31.1.1 CPU Protection Overview
Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information.
If a switch receives large numbers of control packets, such as ARP, BPDU or IGMP packets, which
are to be processed by the CPU, the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular
tasks properly.
The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP, BPDU and IGMP packets to be
delivered to the CPU on a port. This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS
attacks or errors from other network(s). You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed
the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received.
31.1.2 Error-Disable Recovery Overview
Some features, such as loop guard or CPU protection, allow the Switch to shut down a port or
discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port. For example, if the Switch
detects that packets sent out the port(s) loop back to the Switch, the Switch can shut down the
port(s) automatically. After that, you need to enable the port(s) or allow the packets on a port
manually via the web configurator or the commands. With error-disable recovery, you can set the
disabled port(s) to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you
specify.
31.1.3 What You Can Do
•Use the Errdisable Status screen (Section 31.3 on page 326) to view whether the Switch
detected that control packets exceeded the rate limit configured for a port or a port is disabled
according to the feature requirements and what action you configure, and related information.
•Use the CPU Protection screen (Section 31.4 on page 328) to limit the maximum number of
control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
•Use the Errdisable Detect screen (Section 31.5 on page 330) to have the Switch detect
whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action
to take once the limit is exceeded.
•Use the Errdisable Recovery screen (Section 31.6 on page 331) to set the Switch to
automatically undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
326
31.2 The Error Disable Screen
Use this screen to configure error disable related settings. Click Advanced Application >
Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 234 Advanced Application > Errdisable
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.3 Error-Disable Status
Use this screen to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the rate limit
configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature requirements and what action
you configure, and related information. Click the Click here link next to Errdisable Status in the
Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 157 Advanced Application > Errdisable
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Errdisable Status Click this link to view whether the Switch detected that control packets exceeded the
rate limit configured for a port or a port is disabled according to the feature
requirements and what action you configure, and related information.
CPU protection Click this link to limit the maximum n umber of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or
IGMP) that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port.
Errdisable Detect Click this link to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate
limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded.
Errdisable Recovery Click this link to set the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
327
Figure 235 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status (Standalone mode)
Figure 236 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status (Stacking mode)
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
328
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.4 CPU Protection Configuration
Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets (ARP, BPDU and/or IGMP) that the
Switch can receive or transmit on a port. Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the
Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown.
Table 158 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inactive-reason
mode reset
Port List Enter the number of the port(s) (separated by a comma) on which you want to reset
inactive-reason status. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the
second the port number. Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for ports 1 to 24 for the Switch in slot 1 and
port 28 for the Switch in slot 2, for example.
Cause Select the cause of inactive-reason mode you want to reset here.
Re set Press to rese t the specified port(s) to handle ARP, BPDU or IGMP pack ets inst ead of ignoring
them, if the port(s) is in inactive-reason mode.
Errdisable
Status
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number.
Cause This displays the type of the control packet received on the port or the feature enabled on
the port and cause the Switch to take the specified action.
Active This field displays whether the control packets (ARP, BPDU, and/or IGMP), on the port is
being detected or not. It also shows whether loop guard, anti-arp scanning, BPDU guard or
ZULD is enabled on the port.
Mode This field shows the action that the Switch takes for the cause.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port.
•inactive-reason - The Switch drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU) on
the port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port(s) has to
handle in every one second.
Rate This field displays how many control packets this port can receive or transmit per second. It
can be adjusted in CPU Protection. 0 means no rate limit.
Status This field displays the errdisable status
•Forwarding: The Switch is forwarding packets. Rate-limitation mode is always in
Forwarding status.
•Err-disable: The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received
(inactive-port) or drops specified control packets on the port (inactive-reason)
Recovery
Time Left
(secs)
This field displays the time (seconds) left before the port(s) becomes active of Errdisable
Recovery.
Total
Dropped This field displays the total packet number dropped by this port where the packet rate
exceeds the rate of mode rate-limitation.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
329
Note: After you configure this screen, make sure you also enable error detection for the
specific control packets in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable
Detect screen.
Figure 237 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection (Standalone mode)
Figure 238 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection (Stacking mode)
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
330
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.5 Error-Disable Detect Configuration
Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit
configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded. Click the Click
Here link next to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application > Errdisable screen to
display the screen as shown.
Figure 239 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
Table 159 Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Stan dalone
or stacking
mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID and
the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switc h).
1/* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustme nts to each port if ne cessary.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Rate Li mit (pkt/
s) Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many cont rol packets this port ca n receive or
transmit per second.
0 means no rate limit.
Y ou can configur e the action t hat the Swi tch takes whe n the limit i s exceede d. See Section
31.5 on page 330 for detailed information.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
331
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
31.6 Error-Disable Recovery Configuration
Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone. Click
the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application > Errdisable
screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 240 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Re covery (Standalone Mode)
Table 160 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Detect
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control
packet is exceeded and take the action selected below.
Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate
limit on a port, set in the Advanced Application > Errdisable > CPU protection screen.
•inactive-port - The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received.
•inactive-reason - The Switch bypasses the processing of the specified control packets
(such as ARP or IGMP packets), or drops all the specified control packets (such as BPDU)
on the port.
•rate-limitation - The Switch drops the additional control packets the port has to handle
in every one second.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 31 Error Disable
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
332
Figure 241 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery (Stacking Mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 161 Advanced Application > Errdisable > Errdisable Recovery
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to turn on the error-disable recovery function on the Switch.
Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or
discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you
configure.
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each entry if necessary.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them.
Timer Status Select this option to allow the Swit ch to wait for the s pecified time interv al to activ ate a port
or allow speci fic pack et s on a port, afte r the e rror w as gone. Deselect this option to turn off
this rule.
Interval Enter the number of seconds (from 30 to 2592000) for the time interval.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
333
CHAPTER 32
MAC Pinning
This chapter shows you how to configure MAC pinning on the Switch.
32.1 MAC Pinning Overview
When the Switch obtains a connected device’s MAC address, it adds an entry in the MAC address
forwarding table and uses the table to determine how to forward frames. In addition to the source
MAC address of a received frame, the S witch also learns the VLAN to which the device belongs and
the port on which the fr ame is received. If the Switch learns the same MAC address and same VLAN
ID on another port, it updates the MAC address table immediately.
MAC pinning allows you to set a port or multiple ports to have priority over other ports in MAC
address learning. That means when a MAC address (and VLAN ID) is learned on a MAC-pinning-
enabled port, the MAC address will not be learned on any other port until the aging time for the
dynamically learned MAC address in the table expires.
This helps enhance security. For example, when an attacker (A) sends packets to all connected
clients by spoofing the source MAC address of a server (B) connected to one of the Switch’s ports,
on which MAC pinning is enabled, the responses from clients will still be forwarded to the server
according to the Switch’s MAC forwarding table.
32.2 MAC Pinning Configuration
Use this screen to enable MAC pinning on the Switch and on specific ports. Click Advanced
Application > MAC Pinning in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
A
B
[MAC x, VLAN y] [MAC x, VLAN y]
Chapter 32 MAC Pinning
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
334
Figure 242 Advanced Application > MAC Pinning (Standalone mode)
Figure 243 Advanced Application > MAC Pinning (Stacking mode)
Chapter 32 MAC Pinning
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
335
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 162 Advanced Application > MAC Pinning
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to turn on the MAC pinning function on the Switch.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port
(Standalone or
stacking mode)
This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first field is the slot ID and the
second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch).
* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then make
adjustments to each port if necessary.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable MAC pinning on this port. The port then has priority over
other ports in MAC address learning.
Clear this check box to disable MAC pinning.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses t he s e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top nav igation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memo ry when you are done con figuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
336
CHAPTER 33
Private VLAN
33.1 Private VLAN Overview
Use private VLAN if y ou want you to block tr affic between ports in the same VLAN. Community and
Isolated VLANs are secondary private VLANs that must be associated with a Primary private
VLAN.
•Primary: Ports in a Primary VLAN are promiscuous and they can communicate with all
promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN, and all ports in associated community and isolated
VLANs. They cannot communicate with ports in different primary VLANs.
•Community: Ports in a Community VLAN can communicate with promiscuous ports in an
associated Primary VLAN and other community ports in the same Community VLAN. They
cannot communicate with ports in Isolated VLANs, non- associated Primary VLAN promiscuous
ports nor community ports in different Community VLANs.
•Isolated: Ports in an Isolated VLAN can communicate with promiscuous ports in an associated
Primary VLAN only. They cannot communicate with other isolated ports in the same Isolated
VLAN, non-associated Primary VLAN promiscuous ports nor any community ports.
Table 163 PVLAN Graphic Key
LABEL DESCRIPTION
P-VLAN 100 Primary private VLAN
C-VLAN 101 Community private VLAN
I-VLAN 102 Isolated private VLAN
Chapter 33 Private VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
337
Tagged Private VLANs can span switches but trunking ports must be VLAN-trunking ports - see
Advanced > VLAN > VLAN Port Setting.
This is the communication process if primary VLAN P-VLAN 100 is associated with community
VLAN C-VLAN 101 and isolated VLAN I-VLAN 102.
• Promiscuous ports in P-VLAN 100 can communicate with all ports in P-VLAN 100 including
community ports in C-VLAN 101 and isolated ports in I-VLAN 102.
• Community ports in C-V LAN 101 can communicate with promiscuous ports in P-VLAN 100 and
other community ports in C-VLAN 101. They cannot communicate with isolated ports in I-VLAN
102.
• Isolated ports can communicate with promiscuous ports in P-VLAN 100. They cannot
communicate with other isolated ports in I-VLAN 102 nor community ports in C-VLAN 101.
Note: Isolation in VLAN > VLAN Port Setting (see Section 7.7.2 on page 109) has a
higher priority than private VLAN settings, so promiscuous ports with Isolation in
VLAN > VLAN Port Setting enabled will not be able to communicate with each
other.
33.1.1 Configuration
You must go to the Static VLAN screen first (see Section 7.7 on page 106) to create VLAN IDs for
Primary, Isolated or Community VLANs.
Table 164 Spanning PVLAN Graphic Key
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UP Uplink promiscuous port
TP VLAN-trunking ports
S1, S2 Switch 1, Switch 2
P-VLAN 100 Primary private VLAN with VLAN ID tag of 100
C-VLAN 101 Community private VLAN with VLAN ID tag of 101
I-VLAN 102 Isolated private VLAN with VLAN ID tag of 102
Chapter 33 Private VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
338
Click Advanced Application > Private VLAN to display the following screen.
Figure 244 Advanced Application > Private VLAN (Standalone mode)
Figure 245 Advanced Application > Private VLAN (Stacking mode)
Chapter 33 Private VLAN
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
339
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 165 Advanced Application > Private VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the slot ID
and the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch) .
Mode This is the type of VLAN mapped to this port.
•Normal: These are ports in a static VLAN. This is not a private VLAN.
•Promiscuous: P orts in a Primary VLAN are Promiscuous. They can communicate
with all ports in the Primary VLAN and associated Community and Isolated
VLANs. They cannot communicate with Promiscuous ports in different primary
VLANs.
•Community: Ports in a Community VLAN can communicate with Promiscuous
ports in an associated Primary VLAN and other community ports in the same
Community VLAN. They cannot communicate with ports in an Isolated VLAN, non-
associated Primary VLAN Promiscuous ports nor Community ports in different
Community VLANs.
•Isolated: Ports in an Isolated VLAN can communicate with Promiscuous ports in
an associated Primary VLAN only. They cannot communicate with other Isolated
ports in the same Isolated VLAN, non-associated Primary VLAN Promiscuous
ports nor any Community ports.
Associated VLAN Enter the VLAN ID of a previously created VLAN here.
Note: The VLAN ID and Mode selected here must be the same as the VLAN ID and
VLAN Type created in Advanced Application > VLAN > Static VLAN.
Tagged A VLAN ID tag identifies VLAN membership of a frame across switches.
Select this if the VLAN includes ports on multiple switches. The Switch forwards tagged
frames through this port; it adds the PVID to untagged fr ames before sending them out.
Clear this if the VLAN includes ports on this Switch only. The Switch forwards untagged
frames through this port; it removes the VLAN ID from tagged frames before sending
them out.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
340
CHAPTER 34
Green Ethernet
This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to reduce the power consumed by switch ports.
34.1 Green Ethernet Overview
Green Ethernet reduces switch port power consumption in the following ways.
• IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
If EEE is enabled, both sides of a link support EEE and there is no traffic, the port enters Low
Power Idle (LPI) mode. LPI mode turns off some functions of the physical layer (becomes quiet)
to save power. Periodically the port transmits a REFRESH signal to allow the link partner to keep
the link alive. When there is traffic to be sent, a WAKE signal is sent to the link partner to return
the link to active mode.
• Auto Power Down
Auto Power Down turns off almost all functions of the port’s physical layer functions when the
link is down, so the port only uses power to check for a link up pulse from the link partner. After
the link up pulse is detected, the port wakes up from Auto Power Down and operates normally.
•Short Reach
Traditional Ethernet transmits all data with enough power to reach the maximum cable length.
Shorter cables lose less power, so Short Reach saves power by adjusting the transmit power of
each port according to the length of cable attached to that port.
34.2 Configuring Green Ethernet
Click Advanced Application > Gr een Ethernet in the navigation panel to display the screen as
shown.
Note: EEE, Auto Power Down and Short Reach are not supported on an uplink port.
Chapter 34 Green Ethernet
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
341
Figure 246 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet (Standalone mode)
Figure 247 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet (Stacking mode)
Chapter 34 Green Ethernet
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
342
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 166 Advanced Application > Green Ethernet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet globally.
Auto Power Down Select this to activate Auto Power Down globally.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach globally.
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the
slot number of the Switch in a stack.
Port (Standalone or
stacking mode) This field displays the port nu mb e r. In stacking mode , the first box field is the slot
ID and the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same
Switch).
1/* Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then
make adjustments to each port if necessary.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet on this port.
Auto Power Down Select this to activate Auto Power Down on this port.
Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch
loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the
top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you
are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
343
CHAPTER 35
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
35.1 LLDP Overview
The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a layer 2 protocol. It allows a network device to
advertise its identity and capabilities on the local network. It also allows the device to maintain and
store information from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device. This
helps an administrator discover network changes and perform necessary network reconfiguration
and management. The device information is encapsulated in the LLDPDUs (LLDP data units) in the
form of TLV (Typ e, Length, Value). Device information carried in the received LLDPDUs is stored in
the standard MIB.
The Switch supports these basic management TLVs.
•End of LLDPDU (mandatory)
• Chassis ID (mandatory)
• Port ID (mandatory)
• Time to Live (mandatory)
• Port Description (optional)
•System Name (optional)
• System Description (optional)
• System Capabilities (optional)
• Management Address (optional)
The Switch also supports the IEEE 802.1 and IEEE 802.3 organizationally-specific TLVs.
IEEE 802.1 specific TLVs:
• Port VLAN ID TLV (optional)
• Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV (optional)
IEEE 802.3 specific TLVs:
• MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV (optional)
• Power via MDI TLV (optional, For PoE models only)
• Link Aggregation TLV (optional)
• Maximum Frame Size TLV (optional)
The optional TLVs are inserted between the Time To Live TLV and the End of LLDPDU TLV.
The next figure demonstrates that the network devices Switches and R ou ters (S and R) transmit
and receive device information via LLDPDU and the network manager can query the information
using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
344
Figure 248 LLDP Overview
35.2 LLDP-MED Overview
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension to the
standard LLDP developed by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR-41.4
subcommittee which defines the enhanced discovery capabilities, such as VoIP applications, to
enable network administrators manage their network topology application more efficiently. Unlike
the traditional LLDP, which has some limitations when handling multiple application devices, the
LLDP-MED offers display of accurate physical topology, interoperability of devices, and easy trouble
shooting for misconfigured IP addresses. There are three classes of endpoint devices that the LLDP-
MED supports:
Class I: IP Communications Controllers or other communication related servers
Class II: Voice Gateways, Conference Bridges or Media Servers
Class III: IP-Phones, PC-based Softphones, End user Communication Appliances supporting IP
Media
The following figure shows that with the LLDP-MED, network connectivity devices (NCD) like
Switches and Routers will transmit LLDP TLV to endpoint device (ED) like IP Phone first (1), to get
its device type and capabilities information, then it will receive that information in LLDP-MED TLV
back from endpoint devices (2), after that the network connectivity devices will transmit LLDP-MED
TLV (3) to provision the endpoint device to such that the endpoint device’s network policy and
location identification information is updated. Since LLDPDU updates status and configuration
information periodically, network managers may check the result of provision via remote status.
The remote status is updated by receiving LLDP-MED TLVs from endpoint devices.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
345
Figure 249 LLDP-MED Overview
35.3 LLDP Screens
Click Advanced Application > LLDP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 250 Advanced Application > LLDP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 167 Advanced Application > LLDP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LLDP
LLDP Local
Status Click here to show a screen with the Switch’s LLDP information.
LLDP Remote
Status Click here to show a screen with LLDP information from the neighboring devices.
LLDP
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP parameters.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
346
35.4 LLDP Local Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status on this Switch. Click Advanced Application >
LLDP > LLDP Local Status to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 251 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status (Standalone mode)
LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED
Configuration Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for
Media Endpoint Devices) parameters.
LLDP-MED
Network Policy Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for
Media Endpoint Devices) network policy parameters.
LLDP-MED
Location Click here to show a screen to configure LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for
Media Endpoint Devices) location parame te rs.
Table 167 Advanced Application > LLDP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
347
Figure 252 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 168 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TLV
This displays the chas sis ID of the local Switch , that is the Switch you’re configuring. The
chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the ch assis of the Switch is ident ified.
Chassis ID - This displays the chassis ID of the local Switch.
System Name
TLV This shows the Host Name of the Switch.
System
Description TLV This shows the firmware version of the Switch.
System
Capabilities
TLV
This shows the System Capabilities enabled and supported on the local Switch.
• System Capabilities Supported - Bridge
• System Capabilities Enabled - Bridge
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
348
35.4.1 LLDP Local Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status for each port on this Switch. Click Advanced Application
> LLDP > LLDP Local Status and then click a port number, for example 1 in the Local Port
column to display the screen as shown next.
Management
Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent
that may be used to reach higher layer entities to assist discovery by network
management. The TLV may also include the system interface number and an objec t
identifier (OID) that are associated with this management address.
This field displays the Management Address settings on the specified port(s).
• Management Address Subtype - ipv4 / all-802
• Interface Number Subtype - unknown
• Interface Number - 0 (not supported)
• Object Identifier - 0 (not supported)
LLDP Port
Information This displays the local port information.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Local Port This displays the number of the Swi tch port which receives the LLDPDU from the remote
device. Click a port number to view the detailed LLDP status on this port at LLDP Local
Port Status Detail screen. For Stacking mode, the first field box is the Slot ID, the
second field box is the port.
Port ID
Subtype This indicates how the port ID field is identified.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the specific identifier for the port from
which this LLDPDU was transmitted.
Port
Description This shows the port description that the Switch will advertise from this port.
Table 168 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
349
Figure 253 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Stat us > LLDP Local Port Status Detail (Basic
TLV)
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
350
Figure 254 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail (MED
TLV)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 169 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Basic TLV The se are the Basic TLV flags
Port ID TLV The port ID TLV identifies the specific port that transmitted the LLDP frame.
• Port ID Subtype: This shows how the port is identified.
• Port ID: This is the ID of the port. In stacking mode, the first number represents the
slot and the second the port num ber.
Port
Description TLV This displays the local port description.
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VL AN ID sent by the IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID TLV.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
351
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLVs, which indicates whether the
VLAN is enabled and supported.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of
the sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the
sending node. Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-
negotiation during link initiation or manual override.
• AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
• AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
• AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
• Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port.
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
• Aggregation Capability — The current aggregation capability of the port.
• Aggregation Status — The current aggregation status of the port.
• Aggregation Port ID — The aggregation ID of the current port.
Max Frame
Size TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED ena bles advertisement and
discovery of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location
databases, and information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities
TLV This field displays which LLDP-MED TLV are capable to transmit on the Switch.
• Network Policy
•Location
•Extend Power via MDI PSE
•Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV This is the LLDP-MED device class. The ZyXE L Switch device type is:
• N etwork Connectivity
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voic e-Signaling
• Gu est-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its ELIN (Emergency Location Identifier
Number) or the IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
(Civic Address LCI).
• Coordinate-bas e LCI - latitude, longi tude and altitude coordinates of the location
Configuration Information (LCI)
• Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
• ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Table 169 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Local Status > LLDP Local Port Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
352
35.5 LLDP Remote Status
This screen displays a summary of LLDP status for each LLDP connection to a neighboring Switch.
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status to display the screen as shown
next.
Figure 255 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Standalone mode)
Figure 256 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
35.5.1 LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
This screen displays detailed LLDP status of the remote device conencted to the Switch. Click
Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status and then click an index number, for
example 1, in the Index column in the LLDP Remote Status screen to display the screen as
shown next.
Table 170 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Index The index number shows the number of remote devices that are connected to the
Switch. Click on an index number to view the detailed LLDP status for this remote device
in the LLDP Remote Port Status Detail screen.
Local Port This is the number of the Switch’ s port that received LLDPDU from the remot e device. In
stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the sec on d the port number.
Chassis ID This displays the chassis ID of the remote device associated with the transmitting LLDP
agent. The chassis ID is identified by the chassis ID subtype. For example, the MAC
address of the remote device.
Port ID This is an alpha-numeric string that contains the spec ific identifier for the port from
which this LLDPDU was transmitted. The port ID is identified by the port ID subtype.
Port Description This displays a description for the port from which this LLDPDU was transmitted.
System Name This displays the system name of the remote device.
Management
Address This displays the management address of the remote device. It could be the MAC
address or IP address. You can click on the IP address hyperlink directly.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
353
Figure 257 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Basic TLV)
The following table describes the labels in Basic TLV part of the screen.
Table 171 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Basic TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local Port This displays the number of the Switch’s port to which the remote device is connected.
Basic TLV
Chassis ID TLV • Chassis ID Subtype - this displays how the chassis of the remote device is identified.
• Chassis ID - this displays the chassis ID of the remote device. The chassis ID is
identified by the chassis ID subtype
Port ID TLV • Port ID Subtype - this displays how the port of the remote device is identified.
• Port ID - this displays the port ID of the remote device. The port ID is identified by
the port ID subtype.
Time To Live
TLV This displays the ti me-t o-liv e ( TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device information on
the neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires.
The TTL value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP frames transmitting interval.
Port
Description TLV This displays the remote port description.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
354
Figure 258 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail>
(Dot 1 and Dot3 TLV)
System Name
TLV This displays the system name of the remote device.
System
Descriptio n TLV This displays the system description of the remote device.
System
Capabilities
TLV
This displays whether the system capabilities are enabled and supported on the remote
device.
• System Capabilities Supported
• System Capabilities Enabled
Management
Address TLV This displays the following management address parameters of the remote device.
• Management Address Subtype
• Management Address
• Interface Number Subtype
• Interface Number
• Object Identifier
Table 171 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Basic TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
355
The following table describes the labels in the Dot1 and Dot3 parts of the screen.
Table 172 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(Dot1 and Dot3 TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dot1 TLV
Port VLAN ID
TLV This displays the VLAN ID of this port on the remote device.
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID TLV This displays the IEEE 802.1 Port Protocol VLAN ID TLV, which indicates whether the
VLAN ID and whether it is enabled and supported on the port of remote Switch which
sent the LLDPDU.
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Supported
• Port-Protocol VLAN ID Enabled
Vlan Name TLV This shows the VLAN ID and name for remote device port.
•VLAN ID
• VLAN Name
Protocol
Identity TLV The Protocol Identity TLV allows the Switch to advertise the particular protocols that are
accessible through its port.
Dot3 TLV
MAC PHY
Configuration &
Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV advertises the bit-rate and duplex capability of
the sending 802.3 node. It also advertises the current duplex and bit-rating of the
sending node. Lastly, it advertises whether these setting were the result of auto-
negotiation during link initiation or manual override.
• AN Supported - Displays if the port supports or does not support auto-negotiation.
• AN Enabled - The current auto-negotiation status of the port.
• AN Advertised Capability - The auto-negotiation capabilities of the port.
• Oper MAU Type - The current Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type of the port
Link
Aggregation
TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated,
whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port
identification of the aggregation.
• Aggregation Capability — The current aggregation capability of the port.
• Aggregation Status — The current aggregation status of the port.
• Aggregation Port ID — The aggregation ID of the current port.
Power Via MDI
TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI
power support capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
•Port Class
• MDI Supported
•MDI Enabled
• Pair Controlable
• PSE Power Pairs
•Power Class
Max Frame
Size TLV This displays the maximum supported frame size in octets.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
356
Figure 259 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(MED TLV)
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
357
The following table describes the labels in the MED TLV part of the screen.
Table 173 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(MED TLV)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MED TLV LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (MED) is an extension of LLDP that provides additional
capabilities to support media endpoint devices. MED ena bles advertisement and
discovery of network policies, device location discovery to allow creation of location
databases, and information for troubleshooting.
Capabilities
TLV This displays the MED capabilities the remote port supports.
• Network Policy
•Location
• Extend Power via MDI PSE
•Extend Power via MDI PD
• Inventory Management
Device Type
TLV LLDP-MED endpoint device classes:
• Endpoint Class I
• Endpoint Class II
• Endpoint Class III
• N etwork Connectivity
Network Policy
TLV This displays a network policy for the specified application.
•Voice
• Voice-Signaling
• Guest-Voice
• Guest-Voice-Signaling
• Softphone-Voice
• Video-Conferencing
•Streaming-Video
• Video-Signaling
Location
Identification
TLV
This shows the location information of a caller by its:
• Coordinate-base LCI - latitude and longitude coordinates of the Location
Configuration Information (LCI)
• Civic LCI - IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information
• ELIN - (Emergency Location Identifier Number)
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
358
35.6 LLDP Configuration
Use this screen to configure global LLDP settings on the Switch. Click Advanced Application >
LLDP > LLDP Configuration to display the screen as shown next.
Inventory TL V The majority of IP Phones lack support of management protocols such as SNMP, so LLDP-
MED inventory TLVs are used to provide their inventory information to the Network
Connectivity Devices s uch as the Switch. The Inventory TLV may contain the following
information.
• Hardware Revision
•Software Revision
•Firmware Revision
•Model Name
• Manufacturer
• Serial Number
•Asset ID
Extended
Power via MDI
TLV
Extended Power Via MDI Discovery enables detailed power information to be advertised
by Media Endpoints, such as IP phones and Network Connectivity Devices such as the
Switch.
• Power Type - whether it is currently operating from primary power or is on backup
power (backup power may indicate to the Endpoint Device that it should move to a
power conservation mode).
• Power Source - whether or not the Endpoint is currently operating from an external
power source.
• Power Priority - the Endpoint Device’ s power priority (which the Network Connectivity
Device may use to prioritize which devices will remain in service during power
shortages)
• Power Value - power requirement, in fractions of Watts, in current configuration
Table 173 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Remote Status > LLDP Remote Port Status Detail
(MED TLV) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
359
Figure 260 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration (Standalone mode)
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
360
Figure 261 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 174 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable LLDP on the Switch. It is enabled by default.
Transmit Interval Enter how many seconds the Switch waits before sending LLDP packets.
Transmit Hold Enter the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier of LLDP frames. The device inform ation on the
neighboring devices ages out and is discarded when its corresponding TTL expires. The
TTL value is to multiply the TTL multiplier by the LLDP packets transmitting interval.
T r ansmit Delay Enter the delay (in seconds) between successive LLDPDU transmissions initiated by value
or status changes in the Switch MIB.
Reinitialize Delay Enter the number of seconds for LLDP to wait before initializing on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch). In
Stacking mode, the first number means Slot ID and the second is the port.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
361
35.6.1 LLDP Configuration Basic TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure Basic TLV settings. Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP
Configuration > Basic TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 262 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Basic TLV Setting (Standalone
mode)
Admin Status Select whether LLDP transmission and/or reception is allowed on this port.
• Disable - not allowed
• Tx-Only - transmit only
• Rx-Only - receive only
• Tx-Rx - transmit and receive
Notification Select whether LLDP notification is enabled on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 174 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
362
Figure 263 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Basic TLV Setting (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
35.6.2 LLDP Configuration Basic Org-specific TLV Setting
Use this screen to configure organization-specific TLV settings. Click Advanced Application >
LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting to display the screen as shown next.
Table 175 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Basic TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number.
Management
Address Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Management Address TLVs
on the port(s).
Port Description Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of Port Description TLVs on the
port(s).
System
Capabilities Select the check bo x( es) to en able or disabl e the sending of System Capabilities TLVs on
the port(s).
System
Description Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of System Description TL Vs on
the port(s).
System Name Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of System Name TLVs on the
port(s).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done co nfi g uring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
363
Figure 264 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Org-specific TLV Setting
(Standalone mode)
Figure 265 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration> Org-specific TLV Setting (Stacking
mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 176 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number.
Dot1 TLV
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
364
35.7 LLDP-MED Configuration
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration to display the screen as shown
next.
Port-Protocol
VLAN ID Select the check box(es) to enable or disable t he sending of IEEE 802.1 Port and Protocol
VLAN ID TLVs on the port(s).
Port VLAN ID Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID
TLVs on the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by default.
Dot3 TLV
Link
Aggregation Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation
TLVs on the port(s).
MAC/PHY Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status TLVs on the port(s). All check boxes in this column are enabled by
default.
Max Frame
Size Select the check box(es) to enable or disable the sending of IEEE 802.3 Max Frame Size
TLVs on the port(s).
Power Via MDI Note: For PoE models only.
The Power Via MDI TL V allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI
power support capabilities of the sending port on the remote device.
• Port Class
• MDI Supported
•MDI Enabled
• Pair Controlable
• PSE Power Pairs
• Power Class
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. Th e Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 176 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP Configuration > Org-specific TLV Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
365
Figure 266 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration (Standalone mode)
Figure 267 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration (Stacking mode)
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
366
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
35.8 LLDP-MED Network Policy
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy to display the screen as
shown next.
Figure 268 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy (Standalone mode)
Table 177 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port This displays the Switch’s port number. Select * to configure all ports (in the same
Switch) simultaneously. In Stacki ng mode, the first number means Slot ID and the
second is the port.
Notification
Topology
Change Select to enable LLDP-MED topology change traps on this port.
MED TLV Setting
Location Select to enable transmitting LLDP-MED location TLV.
Network Policy Select to enabl e transmitting LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done co nfi g uring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
367
Figure 269 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 178 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port number to set up the LLDP-MED network policy. For Stacking mode the
first field box is the Slot ID, th e second field box is the port.
Application Type Select the type of application used in the network policy.
•voice
• voice-signaling
• guest-voice
• guest-voice-signaling
• softphone-voice
• video-conferencing
•streaming-video
• video-signaling
Tag Select to tag or untag in the network policy.
• tagged
• untagged
VLAN Enter the VLAN ID number. It should be from 1 to 4094. For priority tagged fr ames, enter
“0”.
DSCP Enter the DSCP value of the ne two r k pol ic y. The value is defined from 0 through 63 wi th
the 0 representing use of the default DSCP value.
Priority Enter the priority value for the network policy.
Add Click Add after finish entering the network policy information. A summary table will list
all the Switch you’ve added.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the information afresh.
Index This field displays the of index number of the network poli cy. Click an index number to
edit the rule.
Port This field displays the port number of the network policy. In stacking mode, the first
number represent s the slot and the second the port number.
Application Type This field displays the application type of the network policy.
Tag This field displays the Tag Status of the network policy.
VLAN This field displays the VLANID of the network policy.
Priority This field displays the priority value of the network policy.
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
368
35.9 LLDP-MED Location
Click Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 270 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location (Standalone mode)
DSCP This field displays the DSCP value of the network policy.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select t h e check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the rules that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes.
Table 178 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Network Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
369
Figure 271 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 179 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the port nu mber y ou w ant to set up t he loc ation withi n the LLDP- MED netw ork.For
Stacking mode the first field box is the Slot ID, the second field box is the port.
Location
Coordinates The LLDP-MED uses geographical coordinates and Civic Address to set the location
information of the remote device. Geographical based coordinates includes latitude,
longitude, altitude and datum. Civic Address includes Country, State, County, City, Street
and other related information.
Latitude Enter the latitude information. The value should be from 0º to 90º.
•north
•south
Longitude Enter the longitude information. The value should be from 0º to 180º.
•west
•east
Altitude Enter the altitude information. The v alue should be from -2097151 to 2097 151 in meters
or in floors.
• meters
• floor
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
370
Datum Select the appropriate geodetic datum used by GPS.
•WGS84
•NAD83-NAVD88
•NAD83-MLLW
Civic Address Enter the Civic Address by providing information such as Country, State, County, City,
Street, Number, ZIP code and other additional information. Enter at least two fi eld in this
configuration including the Country. The valid length of the Country field is 2 characters
and all other fields are up to 32 characters.
•Country
•State
•County
•City
• Division
• Neighbor
•Street
• Leading-Street-Direction
• Street-Suffix
• Trailing-Street-Suffix
•House-Number
• House-Number-Suffix
• Landmark
• Additional-Location
•Name
•Zip-Code
•Building
•Unit
• Floor
• Room-Number
•Place-Type
• Postal-Community-Name
•Post-Office-Box
• Additional-Code
ELIN Number Enter a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN identifier which is used during
emergency call setup to a tr aditional CAMA or ISDN trunk -based PSAP. The valid length is
from 10 characters to 25 characters.
Add Click Add after finish entering the location information.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin entering the location information afresh.
Index This lists the index number of the location configuration. Click an index number to vie w
or edit the location.
Port This lists the port number of the location configuration. In stacking mode, the first
number represent s the slot and the second the port number.
Location
Coordinates This field displays the location confi guration information based on geographical
coordinates that includ es longitude, latitude, altitude and datum.
Civic Address This field displays the Civic Address for the remote device using informat ion such as
Country, State, Coun ty, City, Street, Number, ZIP code and additional in formation.
ELIN Number This field shows the Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), which is used to
identify endpoint devices when they issue emergency call services. The valid length is
form 10 characters to 25 characters.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select t h e check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Table 179 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
371
Delete Check the locations that you want to remove, then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes.
Table 179 Advanced Application > LLDP > LLDP-MED Location
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
372
CHAPTER 36
Anti-Arpscan
36.1 Anti-Arpscan Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), RFC 826, is a protocol used to convert a network-layer IP
address to a link -la yer MAC address. ARP scan is used to scan the network of a certain interface for
alive hosts. It shows the IP address and MAC addresses of all hosts found. Hackers could use ARP
scan to find targets in your network. Anti-arpscan is used to detect unusual ARP scan activity and
block suspicious hosts or ports.
Unusual ARP scan activity is determined by port and host thresholds that you set. A port threshold
is determined by the number of packets received per second on the port. If the received packet rate
is over the threshold, then the port is put into an Err-Disable state. You can recover the normal
state of the port manually if this happens and after you identify the cause of the problem.
A host threshold is determined by the number of ARP-request packets received per second. There is
a global threshold rate for all hosts. If the rate of a host is over the threshold, then that host is
blocked by using a MAC address filter. A blocked host is released automatically after the MAC aging
time expires.
Note: A port-based threshold m us t be larger than the host-based thres hol d o r the ho s t-
based threshold will not work.
36.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Anti-Arpscan Status screen (Section 36.2 on page 373) to see what ports are trusted
and are forwarding traffic or are disabled.
•Use the Anti-Arpscan Host Status screen (Section 36.3 on page 374) to view blocked hosts
and clear selected ones.
•Use the Anti-Arpscan Trust Host screen (Section 36.4 on page 374) to create or remove
trusted hosts identified by IP address and subnet mask. Anti-arpscan is not performed on
trusted hosts.
•Use this Anti-Arpscan Configure screen (Section 36. 5 on page 375) to enable anti- arpscan, set
port and host thresholds as well as configure ports to be trusted or untrusted.
36.1.2 What You Need to Know
• You should set an uplink port as a trusted port before enabling Anti-arpscan so as to prevent
the port from being shutdown due to receiving too many ARP messages.
• When a port is configured as a trusted port, Anti-arpscan is not performed on the port. Both
host and port thresholds are ignored for trusted ports. If the received ARP packet rate on a port
or the received ARP-requests from a host exceed the thresholds, the trusted port will not be
closed.
• If a port on the Switch is closed by Anti-arpscan, and y ou want to recov er it, then do one of the
following:
Chapter 36 Anti-Arpscan
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
373
•Go to Basic Setting > Port Setup. Clear Active and click Apply. Then select Active and
click Apply again.
•Go to Application > Errdiable > Errdisable Recovery and set the interval for Anti-
arpscan. After the interval expires, the closed port(s) will become active and start receiving
packets again.
• Use the command port no inactive.
• Refer to the port logs to see when a port was closed.
36.2 Anti-Arpscan Status
Use this screen to see what ports are trusted and are forwarding traffic or are disabled. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan.
Figure 272 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 180 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Anti-Arpscan is.... This shows whether Anti-arpscan is enabled or disabled on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number of the Switch.
Trusted This field displays whether the port is trusted or untrusted. Anti-arpscan is not
performed on a trusted port.
State This field displays whether the port can forward traffic normally (Forwarding) or is
disabled (Err-Disable).
Chapter 36 Anti-Arpscan
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
374
36.3 Anti-Arpscan Host Status
Use this screen to view blocked hosts and unblock ones connected to certain ports. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status.
Figure 273 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
36.4 Anti-Arpscan Trust Host
Use this screen to create or remove trusted hosts identified by IP address and subnet mask. Anti-
arpscan is not performed on trusted hosts. To open this screen, click Advanced Application >
Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host.
Table 181 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Host Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear Filtered host: A filtere d ho st is a blocked IP address.
Port List T ype a port number or a series of port numbers separated by commas and spaces, and
then click Clear to unblock all hosts connected to the se ports.
Filtered host: This table lists information on blocked hosts.
Index This displays the index number of an IP address (a host) that has been blocked.
Host IP This displays the IP address of the blocked host.
MAC This displays the MAC address of the blocked host.
VLAN This displays the VLAN ID that shows which VLAN the blocked host is in.
Port This displays the port number to which the blocked host is connected.
State This shows Err-Disable if the ARP-request rate from this host is over the threshold.
Forwarding hosts are not displayed.
Chapter 36 Anti-Arpscan
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
375
Figure 274 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
36.5 Anti-Arpscan Configure
Use this screen to enable Anti-Arpscan, set port and host thresholds as well as configure ports to
be trusted or untrusted. To open this screen, click Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan >
Configure.
Table 182 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Trust Host
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Type a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters to identify this host.
Host IP Type the IP address of the h ost.
Mask A trusted host may consist of a subnet of IP addresses. Type a subnet mask to create
a single host or a subnet of hosts.
Add Click this to create the trusted host.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based or, if not applicable, to clear the fields above.
Clear Click this to clear the fields above.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each trusted host.
Name This field displays the name of the trusted host.
Host IP This field displays the IP address of the trusted host.
Mask This field disp lays the subnet mask of the trusted host.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select th e check box
in the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select an entry ch eckbox and click Delete to remove the specified entry.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Chapter 36 Anti-Arpscan
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
376
Figure 275 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 183 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable Anti-arpscan on the Switch.
Port Threshold A port threshold is determined by the number of packets received per second on the
port. If the received packet rate is ov er the threshold, the n the po rt is put into an Err-
Disable state. Type the maximum number of packets per second allowed on the port
before it is blocked.
Note: The allowed range is 2 to 255 packets received per second.
Host Threshold A host threshold is determined by the number of ARP-request packets received per
second. This is the global threshold rate for all hosts. If the rate of a host is over the
threshold, then that host is blocked by using a MAC address filter. A blocked host is
released automatically after the MAC aging time expires.
Type the maximum number of ARP-request packets allowed by a host before it is
blocked.
Note: The allowed range is 2 to 100 ARP-request packets per second.
Note: The port-based threshold must be larger than the host-based threshold or the
host-based threshold will not be applied.
Port Use port * to have all ports be Untrusted or Trusted. Anti-arpscan is not performed
on trusted hosts.
Chapter 36 Anti-Arpscan
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
377
Trusted State Select Untrusted or Trusted for the associated port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigati on pa nel to sa v e your change s to the non-volat il e mem ory when y ou are d one
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 183 Advanced Application > Anti-Arpscan > Configure
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
378
CHAPTER 37
BPDU Guard
37.1 BPDU Guard Overview
A BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) is a data frame that contains information about STP. STP-
aware switches exchange BPDUs periodically.
The BPDU guard feature allows you to prevent any new STP-aware switch from connecting to an
existing network and causing STP topology changes in the network. If there is any BPDU detected
on the port(s) on which BPDU guard is enabled, the Switch disables the port(s) automatically. You
can then enable the port(s) manually in the Basic Setting > Port Setup screen (Section 6.6 on
page 69) or use the Errdisable Recovery screen (see Section 31.6 on page 331) to have the
port(s) become active after a certain time interval.
37.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the BPDU Guard Status screen (Section 37.2 on page 378) to view the BPDU guard status.
•Use the BPDU Guard Configuration screen (Section 37.3 on page 379) to enable BPDU guard
on the Switch.
37.2 BPDU Guard Status
Use this screen to view whether BPDU guard is enabled on the Switch and the port status. Click
Advanced Application > BPDU Guard in the navigation panel.
Chapter 37 BPDU Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
379
Figure 276 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard Staus
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
37.3 BPDU Guard Configuration
Use this screen to turn on the BPDU guard feature on the Switch and port(s).
In the BPDU Guard Status screen click Configuration to display the configuration screen as
shown.
Table 184 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard Staus
LABEL DESCRIPTION
BPDU guard globally
configuration This field displays whether BPDU guard is activated on the Switch.
Port This is the number of the port on the Switch.
Active This shows whether BPDU guard is activated on the port.
Status This shows whether the port is shut down (Err-disable) or able to transmit packets
(Forwarding).
Chapter 37 BPDU Guard
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
380
Figure 277 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 185 Advanced Application > BPDU Guard > BPDU Guard Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable BPDU guard on the Switch.
Port This field displays the Switch’s port number
* U se this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then
make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this c h ec k box to enable t he B P DU guard feature on this port. The Switch shuts
down this port if there is any BPDU received on the port.
Clear this check box to disable the BPDU guard feature.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigati on pa nel to sa v e your change s to the non-volat il e mem ory when y ou are d one
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
381
CHAPTER 38
OAM
38.1 OAM Overview
Link layer Ethernet OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) as described in IEEE
802.3ah is a link monitoring protocol. It utilizes OAM Protocol Data Units or OAM PDUs to transmit
link status information between directly connected Ethernet devices. Both devices must support
IEEE 802.3ah. Because link layer Ethernet OAM operates at layer two of the OSI (Open Systems
Interconnection Basic Reference) model, neither IP or SNMP are necessary to monitor or
troubleshoot network connection problems.
The Switch supports the following IEEE 802.3ah features:
• Discovery - this identifies the devices on each end of the Ethernet link and their OAM
configuration.
• Remote Loopback - this can initiate a loopback test between Ethernet devices.
38.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the OAM Status screen (Section 38.2 on page 381) to view the configuration of ports on
which Ethernet OAM is enabled.
•Use the OAM Configuration screen (Section 38.3 on page 387) to enable Ethernet OAM on the
Switch.
•Use the OAM Remote Loopback screen (Section 38.4 on page 389) to perform remote-
loopback tests.
38.2 OAM Status
Use this screen to view the configuration of ports on which Ethernet OAM is enabled. Click
Advanced Application > OAM in the navigation panel.
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
382
Figure 278 Advanced Application > OAM Status (Standalone mode)
Figure 279 Advanced Application > OAM Status (Stacking mode)
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
383
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
38.2.1 OAM Deta ils
Use this screen to view OAM configuration details and operational status of a specific port. Click a
number in the Port column in the OAM Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
Table 186 Advanced Application > OAM Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Local
This section displays information about the ports on the Switch.
Port This field displays the number of the port on the Switch. In stacking mode, the first
box field is the slot ID and the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on
the same Switc h).
Mode This field displays the operational state of the port when OAM is enabled on the port.
Active - Allows the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Passive - Allows the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Remote
This section displays information about the remote device.
Mac Address This field displays the MAC address of the remote device.
OUI This field displays the OUI (first three byte s of th e MAC a ddress) of the remote device.
Mode This field displays the operational state of the port when OAM is enabled on the port.
Active - Allows the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Passive - Allows the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Config This field displays the capabilities of the Switch and remote device.
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
384
Figure 280 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 187 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Discovery This section displays OAM configuration details and operational status of the port on
the Switch and/or the remote device.
Local Client/Remote
Client
OAM configurations
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
385
Mode This field displays the OAM mode. The device in active mode (typically the service
provider's device) controls the device in passive mode (typically the subscriber's
device).
Active: The port initiat es OAM discovery; sends information PDUs; and may send
event notification PDUs, variable request/response PDUs, or loopback control PDUs.
Passive: The port waits for the remote device to init iate OAM discovery; sends
information PDUs; may send event notification PDUs; and may respond to variable
request PDUs or loopback control PDUs.
The Switch might not support some types of PDUs, as indicated in the fields below.
Unidirecti onal This field indicates whether or not the port can send information PDUs to trans mit fault
information when the receive path is non-operational.
Remote loopback This field indicates whether or not the port can use loopback control PDUs to put the
remote device into loopback mode.
Link events This field indicates wh e th er or no t th e port can in terpre t link events, s uc h as li n k fault
and dying gasp. Link events are sent in ev ent notification PDUs and indicate when the
number of errors in a given interval (time, number of frames, number of symbols, or
number of errored frame seconds) exceeds a specified threshold. Organizations may
create organization-specific link event TLVs as well.
Variable retrieval This field indicates whether or not the port can respond to requests for more
information, such as requests for Ethernet counters and statistics, about link events.
Max. OAMPDU
size This field displays the maximum size of PDU for receipt and delivery.
Local Client/Remote
Client
OAM configurations
Link status This field indicate s that the link bet ween the Switch port and a connected IEEE
802.3ah-enabled remote Ethernet device is up or down.
Info. revision This field displays the current version of local state and conf iguration. This two-octet
value starts at zero and increments every time th e local state or configu ration
changes.
Parser state This field indicates the current state of the parser.
Forward: The port is forwarding packets normally.
Loopback: The port is in loopback mode.
Discard: The port is discarding non-OAMPDUs because it is trying to or has put the
remote device into loopback mode.
Table 187 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
386
Discovery
state This field indicates t he state in the OAM discovery process. OAM-enabled devices use
this process to detect each other and to exchange information about their OAM
configuration and capabilities. OAM discovery is a handshake protocol.
Fault: One of the devices is transmitting OAM PDUs with link fault information, or the
interface is not operational.
Active Send Local: The port is in active mode and is trying to see if the remote
device supports OAM.
Passive Wait: The port is in passive mode and is waiting for the remote device to
begin OAM discovery.
Send Local Remote: This state occurs in the following circumstances.
• Th e port has discovered the remote device but has not accepted or rejected the
connection yet.
• The port has discovered the remote device and rejected the connection.
Send Local Remote OK: The port has discovered the remote device and has
accepted the conn ection. In addition, the re mote device has not accepted or rejected
the connection yet, or the remote device has rejected the connected.
Send Any: The port and the remote device have accepted the connection. This is the
operating state for OAM links that are fully operational.
Statistics
This section displays the number of OAM packets transferred on the port of the Switch.
Information OAMPDU
Tx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Information OAMPDU
Rx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs received on the port.
Event Notification
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of unique or duplicate OAM ev ent notific ation PDU s sent
on the port.
Event Notification
OAMPDU Rx This field disp lays the numbe r of unique or duplicate OAM event notification PDUs
received on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of loopback control OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of loopb a ck control OAM PDUs received on the port.
Variable Request
OAMPDU Tx This field dis plays the number of OA M PDUs sent to reques t MIB objects on the re mote
device.
Variable Request
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs received requesting MIB objects on the
Switch.
Variable Response
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent by the Switch in response to
requests.
Variable Response
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of OAM PDUs sent by the remote device in response to
requests.
Unsupported
OAMPDU Tx This field displays the number of unsupported OAM PDUs sent on the port.
Unsupported
OAMPDU Rx This field displays the number of unsupported OAM PDUs received on the port.
Table 187 Advanced Application > OAM Status > OAM Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
387
38.3 OAM Configuration
Use this screen to turn on Ethernet OAM on the Switch and port(s) and configure the related
settings.
In the OAM Status screen click Configuration to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 281 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration (Standalone mode)
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
388
Figure 282 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 188 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable Ethernet OAM on the Switch.
Slot (Stacking mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot
number of the Switch in a stack.
Port This field displays the Switch’s port number. In stacking mode, the first box field is the
slot ID and the second field is the port number. * means all ports (on the same
Switch).
* U se this row to make the setting the same for all ports. Use this row first and then
make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable Ethernet OAM on this port.
Clear this check box to disable Ethernet OAM on the port.
Mode Specify the OAM mode on the port.
Select Active to allow the port to issue and respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Select Passive to allow the port to respond to Ethernet OAM commands.
Remote Loopback
Supported Select this check box to enable the remote loopback feature on the port. Otherwise,
clear the check box to disable it.
Remote Loopback
Ignore-Rx Select this check box to se t the Switch to pro cess loopback commands received on the
port. Otherwise, clear the check box to have the Switch ignore loopback commands
received on the port.
Chapter 38 OAM
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
389
38.4 OAM Remote Loopback
Use this screen to perform a remote-loopback test. In the OAM Status screen click Remote
Loopback to display the screen as shown.
Figure 283 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Re mote Loopback
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigati on pa nel to sa v e your change s to the non-volat il e mem ory when y ou are d one
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 188 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 189 Advanced Application > OAM > OAM Remote Loopback
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Remote Loopback
Test
Port Enter the number of the port from which the Switch performs a remote-loopback test.
Number of
Packet Define the allowable packet number of the loopback test frames.
Packet Size Define the allowable packet size of the loopback test frames.
Test Click Test to begin the test.
Remote Loopback
Mode
Port Enter the number of the port from which the Switch sends loopback control PDUs to
initiate or terminate a remote-loopack test.
Start Click Start to initiate a remote-loopback test from the specified port by sending Enable
Loopback Control PDUs to the remote device.
Stop Click Stop to terminate a remote-loopback test from the specified port by sending
Disable Loopback Control PDUs to the remote device.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
390
CHAPTER 39
ZULD
39.1 ZULD Overview
A unidirectional link is a connection where the link is up on both ends, but only one end can receive
packets. This may happen if OAM was initially enabled but then disabled, there are misconfigured
transmitting or receiving lines or the hardware is malfunctioning. Zy XEL Unidirectional Link
Detection (ZULD) is a layer-2 protocol that can detect and disable these physical one-way links
before they cause loops or communication malfunction.
In the figure below , S1 - A is a bidirectional link as both ends can send pack ets to each other. S1-B
is unidirectional as B cannot send packets to S1 (although the S1-B link is up). Similarly, S2-S1 is
unidirectional as S1 cannot send packets to S2 (although the S1-S2 link is up).
Figure 284 ZULD Overview
39.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the ZULD Status screen (Section 39.2 on page 391) to see details on ZULD.
•Use the ZULD Configuration screen (Section 39.3 on page 393) to enable ZULD on a port,
configure a mode and set the probe time.
39.1.2 What You Need to Know
• ZULD must be enabled on the Switch and the port(s) in order to detect unidirectional links by
monitoring OAMPDUs.
Chapter 39 ZULD
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
391
• Po rts adve rtise their unidirectional link detection capability using OAMPDUs, so all connected
devices must support OAM as well as ZULD. You need to enable OAM on the Switch by going to
Advanced Application > OAM > Configuration and selecting Active. OAM must be enabled
on other connected devices too. If OAM is not enabled initially, ZULD will not work.
• If OAM is enabled initially and later disabled on one end of a link, the link will be unidirectional as
that end cannot send OAMPDUs.
• OAM discovery, the sending of OAMPDUs to other ports, is initiated by an active port.
• When ZULD detects a unidirectional link, it sends a syslog and SNMP trap and may shut down
the affected port (Aggresssive Mode).
• If a port on the Switch is shut down by ZULD, and you want to recover it, then do one of the
following:
•Go to Basic Setting > Port Setup. Clear Active and click Apply. Then select Active and
click Apply again.
•Go to Application > Errdiable > Errdisable Recovery and set the interval for ZULD. After
the interval expires, the closed port(s) will become active and start receiving packets again.
• Use the command port no inactive.
• Refer to the ZULD logs to see when a unidirectional link is detected and when it is recovered to a
bidirectional link.
39.2 ZULD Status
Use this screen to see details of unidirectional and bidirectional links discovered by ZULD. To open
this screen, click Advanced Application > ZULD.
Chapter 39 ZULD
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
392
Figure 285 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 190 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ZULD is.... This shows whether ZULD is enabled or disabled on the Switch.
Port This field displays the port number of the Switch.
Active This field displays whether ZULD is enabled on the port or not. ZULD must be enabled
to detect an unidirectional link by monitoring OAMPDUs.
Mode This field indicates what ZULD will do when a unidirectional link is detected. In
Normal mode, ZULD only sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional
link. In Aggressive mode, ZULD shuts down the port (puts it into an ErrDisable
state) as well as sends a syslog and trap when it detects a unidirectional link.
Probe Time Probe time is the length o f time that ZULD waits before declaring that a link is
unidirectional. When the probe time expires, and one port (either on the Switch or the
connected device ) still has not receiv ed an OAMPDU , then ZULD declares that the link
is unidirectional.
Chapter 39 ZULD
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
393
39.3 ZULD Configuration
Use this screen to enable ZULD on a port, configure a mode and set the probe time. To open this
screen, click Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration.
Link State This field sho ws the following link states:
•Linkdown: This is an initializati on state, where the port is not yet up.
•Probe: This indicates that ZULD is discovering the connected device on this link.
•Bidirectional: Traffic sent by the Switch is received by the connected device on
this link, and traffic from the connected device on this link is received by the
Switch.
•Unidirectional: The state of the link between the port and its connected port
cannot be determined either because no ZULD message was received, or one port
is not capable of sending traffic.
•Shutdown: The port has been shut down because its link with the connected
device is unidirectional and ZULD is in Aggressive mode.
Remote Operation This field displays whether ZULD is enabled or disabled on the connected device on
this link. ZULD must be enabled on the connected device and on the port that ’s
connecting to the Switch.
Remote MAC Addr This is the MAC address of the port on the connected device to which the port of the
Switch is connec te d.
Remote Port This is the port number of the port on the connected device to which the port of the
Switch is connec te d.
Table 190 Advanced Application > ZULD Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 39 ZULD
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
394
Figure 286 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
The following table describes the fields in the above screen.
Table 191 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to enable ZULD on the Switch.
Port Use port * to configure all ports to have the same settings. Alternatively, select
individual ports for different settings.
Active Select this to enable ZULD on the port. ZULD must be enabled to detect an
unidirectional link by monitoring OAMPDUs.
Mode Select Normal or Aggressive. In Normal mode, ZULD only sends a syslog and trap
when it detects a unidirectional link. In Aggressive mode, ZULD shuts down the port
(puts it into an ErrDisable state) as well as sends a syslog and trap when it detects a
unidirectional link.
Probe Time Type the length of time that ZULD waits before declaring that a link is unidirectional.
When the probe time expires, and one port (either on the Switch or the connected
device) still has not received an OAMPDU, then ZULD declares that the link is
unidirectional.
The allowed time range is from 5-65535 seconds.
Chapter 39 ZULD
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
395
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigati on pa nel to sa v e your change s to the non-volat il e mem ory when y ou are d one
configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last-saved values.
Table 191 Advanced Application > ZULD > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
396
CHAPTER 40
Static Route
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes.
40.1 Static Routing Overview
The Switch usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN
to the Internet. To have the Switch send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway,
use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Switch. The Switch routes
most traffic from A to the Internet through the Switch’s default gatew ay (R1). Y ou create one static
route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route
to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the Switch.
Figure 287 Example of Static Routing Topology
40.2 Static Routing
Click IP Application > Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Click the link next to IPv4 Static Route to open a screen where you can create IPv4 static routing
rules. Click the link next to IPv6 Static Route to open a screen where you can create IPv6 static
routing rules.
R1
R2
A
R3
Internet
Chapter 40 Static Route
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
397
Figure 288 IP Application > Static Routing
40.3 Configuring IPv4 Static Routing
Click the link next to IPv4 Static Route in the IP Application > Static Routing screen to display
the screen as shown.
Figure 289 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 192 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 10 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Destination IP
Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet
mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be
identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination.
Gateway IP
Address Enter the IP address of th e gatew ay. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your S witch
that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on the same
segment as your Switch.
Metric The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop
count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks.
Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise,
but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Chapter 40 Static Route
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
398
40.4 Configuring IPv6 Static Routing
Click the link next to IPv6 Static Route in the IP Application > Static Routing screen to display
the screen as shown.
Figure 290 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv6 Static Route
Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static route
entry.
Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purposes
only.
Destination
Address This field displays the IP network address of the final destination.
Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination.
Gateway
Address This field displays the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is the immediate neighbor of
your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination.
Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes.
Select an entry’ s check bo x to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the che ck box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 192 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv4 Static Route (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 40 Static Route
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
399
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 193 IP Application > Static Routing > IPv6 Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Route
Destination Enter the IPv6 address of the final destination.
Prefix Length Enter the prefix length number of up to 64 for this destination.
Next Hop Enter the IPv6 address of the next-hop router.
Interface Type Select the type of the IPv6 interface through which the IPv6 packets are forwarded.
The Switch supports only the VLAN interface type at the time of writing.
Interface ID Enter the ID number of the IPv6 interface through which the IPv6 packets are forwarded.
Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Index This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static route
entry.
Interface This field displays the descriptive name of the interface that is used to forward the packets
to the destination.
Route
Destination/
Prefix Length
This field displays the IPv6 subnet prefix and prefix length of the final destin ation.
Next Hop This field displays the IPv6 address of the gateway that helps forward the packet to the
destination.
Select an entry’ s check bo x to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the che ck box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
400
CHAPTER 41
Policy Routing
This chapter shows you how to configure policy routing rules.
41.1 Policy Route Overview
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Switch takes the shortest
path to forward a packet. Policy routing provides a mechanism to override the default routing
behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administr ator.
Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets prior to the normal routing.
Individual routing policies are used as part of the overall policy routing process. A routing policy
defines the action to take when a packet meets the criteria in a specified classifier. The action is
taken only when all the criteria are met.
41.1.1 Benefits
• Source-Based Routing – Network administrators can use policy-based routing to direct traffic
from different users through different connections.
• Cost Savings – Policy routing allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high-
bandwidth, high-cost paths while using low-cost paths for batch traffic.
• Load Sharing – Network administr ators can use policy routing to distribute tr affic among multiple
paths.
41.2 Configuring Policy Routing Profile
Click IP Application > Policy Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Use
this screen to configure a policy routing profile, which can consist of multiple policy routing rules.
Figure 291 IP Application > Policy Routing
Chapter 41 Policy Routing
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
401
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
41.2.1 Policy Routing Rule Configuration
You must first configure a layer -3 classifier in the Classifier screen (see Section 19.2 on page 201)
and a policy routing profile in the Policy Routing screen (see Section 41.2 on page 400).
Use this screen to configure a policy route to override the default (shortest path) routing behavior
and forward packets based on the classifier and action you specify. A policy route rule defines the
matching classifier and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria in the classifier. The
action is taken only when all the criteria are met. Policy-based routing is applied to incoming
packets on a per interface basis before normal routing. The Switch does not perform normal routing
on packets that match any of the policy routes.
Click Rule Configuration in the IP Application > Policy Routing screen to display the screen as
shown.
Table 194 IP Application > Policy Routing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows y ou to act iva te/deactiv ate this policy routing profile and rules in the profile.
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Spaces are allowed.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults .
Index This field displays the index number of the policy routing profile. Click a number to edit the
policy routing profile entry.
Active This field displays Yes when the policy routing profile is activated and No when it is
deactivated.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name for this profile. This is for identification purposes
only.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 41 Policy Routing
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
402
Figure 292 IP Application > Policy Routing > Rule Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 195 IP Application > Policy Routing > Rule Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name This field displays the policy routing profile(s) you configure in the IP Application >
Policy Routing screen.
Select a profile for which you want to configure a policy routing rule.
Sequence Enter the rule number from 1 to 64. The ordering of your rule s is importan t as rules are
applied in turn.
You can not specify a number already in use by another rule.
Statement Select Permit to forward traffic that matches this rule t o t he gateway specifie d in t he ru le.
Select Deny to disable the rule action and forward traffic that matches this rule according
to the routing table on the Switch.
Classifier This field displays the available active classif iers you configu re in the Classifier screen
(see Chapter 19 on page 201), which are not used by any policy rule or policy routi ng rule.
Select a classifier to which this policy routing rule applies.
Action Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch
that will forward the packet to the destination.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’ s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Active This fiel d displays whethe r the policy route profile is enabled or not.
Profile Name This field displays the name of the policy route profile with which the rule is associated.
Chapter 41 Policy Routing
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
403
Seq This field displays the rule index number t hat you conf igure in the Sequence field. Click an
index number to change the rule’s Statement.
State This field displays permit when the rule action is activated and deny when is it
deactivated.
Classifier This field display s the name of the classifier t o which this policy applies.
Select an entry’ s check box to select a specific entry . Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 195 IP Application > Policy Routing > Rule Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
404
CHAPTER 42
Differentiated Services
This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on the Switch.
42.1 DiffServ Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the
flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to
different packet types.
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop
treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types
and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of
service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the
packets di fferentl y dependi ng on the code poin ts without the need to negotiate paths or remember
state information for every flow . In addition, applications do not ha ve to request a particular service
or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
42.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (ToS) field in
the IP header. The DS field contains a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and
the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused (CU). The following figure illustrates the DS
field.
Figure 293 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets as it is forwarded
across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for
different priorities of forwarding. R esources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and
the configured policies.
42.1.2 DiffServ Network Example
The following figure depicts a DiffServ n etwork consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ -
compliant network devices. The boundary node (A in Figure 294) in a DiffServ network classifies
(marks with a DSCP value) the incoming packets into different traffic flows (Platinum, Gold,
Silver, Bronze) based on the configured marking rules. A network administrator can then apply
DSCP (6 bits) CU (2 bits)
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
405
various traffic policies to the traffic flows. For example, one traffic policy would be to give higher
drop precedence to one traffic flow over others. In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow
are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow
as they move across the DiffServ network.
Figure 294 DiffServ Network
42.2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the
basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined
criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
Tw o Rate Three Color Marker (TRTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the P eak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the av erage r ate at which packets are
admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR v alues are based
on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service pro vider
and client.
Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors
which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red,
medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. After TRTCM is configured and
DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets:
• Red (high loss priority level) packets are dropped.
• Yellow (medium loss priority level) packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network.
• Green (low loss priority level) packets are forwarded.
TRTCM operates in one of two modes: color-blind or color-aware. In color-blind mode, packets are
marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been
marked or not. In the color-aware mode, packets are marked based on both existing color and
evaluation against the PIR and CIR. If the packets do not match any of colors, then the packets
proceed unchanged.
G
S
B
P
S
B
B
G
P
P
S
P - Platinum
G - Gold
S - Silver
B - Bronze
G
P
P
S
A
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
406
42.2.1 TRTCM - Color-blind Mode
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet ex ceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it
is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow . Finally, if it is below the
CIR then it is marked green.
Figure 295 TRTC M - Color-blind Mode
42.2.2 TRTCM - Color-aware Mode
In color-aw are mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing pack et loss priority. TRT CM can
increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it. Packets that have been
previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority.
Pack ets marked red (high packet loss priority) continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR
or CIR. Packets mark ed yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated
against the PIR. Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they
don’t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR.
Figure 296 TRTCM - Color-aware Mode
42.3 Activating DiffServ
Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802.1p priority mapping on the selected port(s).
Click IP Application > DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Exceed
PIR?
High Packet
Loss
Exceed
CIR ?
Medium Packet
Loss
NO
YES
NO
YES
Low Packet
Loss
Exceed
PIR?
High Packet
Loss
Exceed
CIR?
Medium Packet
Loss
NO
YES
NO
YES
Low Packet
Loss
High Packet
Loss
NO
YES
Red? Yellow?
Medium Packet
Loss
NO
YES
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
407
Figure 297 IP Application > DiffServ (Standalone mode)
Figure 298 IP Application > DiffServ (Stacking mode)
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
408
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
42.3.1 Configuring 2-Rate 3 Color Marker Settings
Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings. Click the 2-rate 3 Color Marke r link in the DiffServ
screen to display the screen as shown next.
Note: You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time.
Table 196 IP Application > DiffServ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch.
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch. In stacking mode, the first
number represents the slot and the second the port number. * means all ports (on the same
Switch).
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or l oses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
409
Figure 299 IP Application > DiffServ > 2-rate 3 Color Marker (Standalone mode)
Figure 300 IP Application > DiffServ > 2-rate 3 Color Marker (Stacking mode)
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
410
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
42.3.2 DSCP Profile
Use this screen to create DSCP profiles. To open this screen, click the DSCP Profile link in t h e IP
Application > DiffServ > 2-rate 3 Color Marker screen.
Table 197 IP Application > DiffServ > 2-rate 3 Color Marker
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to activ ate TRT CM (Two Rate Three Colo r Mark er ) on the Sw itch . The S witch ev al uates
and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings.
Note: You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop
red (high loss priority) colored packets.
Mode Select color-blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored. All incoming
packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR.
Select color-aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity. Incoming packets
are evaluated based on their existing color. Incoming packets that are not marked proceed
through the Switch.
Slot
(Stacking
mode)
This field appears only in stacking mode. Click t he drop-down list to choose the slot number of the
Switch in a stack.
Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch. In stacking mode, the first number
represents the slot and t he second the port number. * means all ports (on the same Switch).
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to
set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Sel ect this to activate TRTCM on the port.
Commit
Rate Specify the Commit Information Rate (CIR) for this port.
Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate (PIR) for this port.
DSCP Select a pre-defined DSCP profile. The Switch assigns the DSCP values defined in the profile to
packets based on the color they are m arked via TRTCM.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
411
Figure 301 IP Application > DiffServ > 2-rate 3 Color Marker > DSCP Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
42.4 DSCP-to-IEEE 802.1p Priority Settings
You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802.1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic
based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802.1p mapping table.
Table 198 IP Application > DiffServ > 2-rate 3 Color Marker > DSCP Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on
the color they are marked via TRTCM.
Green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority.
Yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority.
Red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile. Click the profile name to change
the settings.
Green This field displays the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority.
Yellow This field displays the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority.
Red This field displays the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click the Delete button to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
Cancel Click this to revert the fields to the previous configuration.
Chapter 42 Differentiated Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
412
The following table shows the default DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping.
42.4.1 Configuring DSCP Settings
To chang e the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping, click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to
display the screen as shown next.
Figure 302 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 199 Default DSCP-IEEE 802.1p Mapping
DSCP VALUE 0 – 7 8 – 15 16 – 23 24 – 31 32 – 39 40 – 47 48 – 55 56 – 63
IEEE 802.1p 01234567
Table 200 IP Application > DiffServ > DSCP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
0 … 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number.
To set the IEEE 802.1p priority mapping, select the priority level from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses thes e
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
413
CHAPTER 43
DHCP
This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature.
43.1 DHCP Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers
to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Switch as a DHCP
server or a DHCP relay agent. When configured as a server, the Switch provides the TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If you configure the S witch as a relay agent, then the Switch forw ards
DHCP requests to DHCP serv er on your network. If y ou don’t configure the Switch as a DHCP serv er
or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers
or else the client computers must be configured manually.
43.1.1 DHCP Modes
The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
• If you configure the S witch as a DHCP serv er, it will maintain the pool of IP addresses along with
subnet masks, DNS server and default gateway information and distribute them to your LAN
computers.
• If there is already a DHCP server on y our network, then y ou can conf igure the Sw itch as a DHCP
relay agent. When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network, it contacts
the DHCP server for the necessary IP information, and then relays the assigned information back
to the computer.
43.1.2 DHCP Configuration Options
The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens. The screen you
should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on
your network. Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria:
•Global - The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server.
•VLAN - The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis. The Switch can be configured as a
DHCP server for one VLAN and at the same time the Switch can be configured to relay DHCP
requests for clients in another VLAN.
43.2 DHCP Configuration
Click IP Application > DHCP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click the link
next to DHCPv4 to open screens where you can enable and configure DHCPv4 server/relay settings
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
414
and create option 82 profiles. Click the link next to DHCPv6 to open screens where you can
configure DHCPv6 settings.
Figure 303 IP Application > DHCP
43.3 DHCPv4 Status
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel. The DHCP Status screen
displays.
Figure 304 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.3.1 DHCPv4 Server Status Detail
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel and then click an existing index
number of a DHCP server configur ation to view the screen as shown. Use this screen to view details
regarding DHCP server settings configured on the Switch.
Table 201 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch’s DHCP server mode.
Index Th is is the index number. Click an index number to change the settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID for which the Switch is a DHCP server.
Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address.
IP Pool Size This field displays the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to clients.
Relay Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch’s DHCP relay mode.
Relay Mode This field displays:
•None - if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent.
•Global - if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay age n t only.
•VLAN - followed by a VLAN ID or multiple VLAN IDs if it is configured as a relay
agent for specific VLAN(s).
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
415
Figure 305 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Server Status Detail
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.4 DHCPv4 Relay
Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same
broadcast domain. During the initial IP address leasing, the Switch helps to relay network
information (such as the IP address and subnet mask) between a DHCP client and a DHCP server.
Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network, network information
renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch.
Table 202 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Server Status Detail
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Start IP Address This field displays the starting IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP
server instance.
End IP Address This field displays the last IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP
server instance.
Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance.
Default Gateway This field displays the default gateway value sent to clients from this DHCP server
instance.
Primary DNS
Server This field displays the primary DNS server value sent to clients from this DHCP server
instance.
Secondary DNS
Server This field displa ys t he second ary DNS serv er v al ue sent t o clie nts fro m this DHCP serv er
instance.
Lease Time This field displays the amount of time that the IP address is valid.
Address Leases This section displays information about the IP addresses this DHCP server issued to
clients.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each DHCP request handled by the Switch.
IP Address This is the IP address issued t o a DHCP client.
Timer This field displays the time remaining before the DHCP client has to renew its IP address.
Hardware Address This field displays the MAC address of the DHCP client.
It may also display SELF OCCUPIED ADDRESS if the IP address cannot be used for
DHCP because it is already assigned to the Switch itself.
Hostname This field displays the system name of the client.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
416
The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay. This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP
requests from all domains to the same DHCP server. You can also configure the Switch to relay
DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients.
43.4.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information
The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP
server by adding Relay Agent Information. This helps provide authentication about the source of
the requests. The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information. Please
refer to RFC 3046 for more details.
The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field (also known as the
Option 82 field) to DHCP requests. The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP
request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server.
43.4.1.1 DHCPv4 Relay Agent Information Format
A DHCP Relay Agent Information option has the following format.
i1, i2 and iN are DHCP relay agent sub-options, which contain additional information about the
DHCP client. Yo u need to define at least one sub-option.
43.4.1.2 Sub-Option Format
There are two types of sub-option: “Agent Circuit ID Sub-option” and “Agent Remote ID Sub-
option”. They have the following formats.
The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub-option and 2 identifies this as an
Agent Remote ID sub-option. The next field specifies the length of the field.
43.4.2 DHCPv4 Option 82 Profile
Use this screen to create DHCPv4 option 82 profiles. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in
the navigation panel and click the Option 82 Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Table 203 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Format
Code
(82)
Length
(N)
i1 i2
...
iN
Table 204 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
1
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
Slot ID, Port ID, VLAN ID, System Name or String
Table 205 DHCP Relay Agent Remote ID Sub-option Format
SubOpt Code Length Value
2
(1 byte)
N
(1 byte)
MAC Address or String
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
417
Figure 306 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 206 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes. You can use up to 32
ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed.
Circuit-ID Use this section to configure the Circuit ID sub-option to include information that is specific
to the relay agent (th e Swit ch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch add the Circuit ID sub-option to client DHCP requests
that it relays to a DHCP server.
slot-port Select this option to have the Switch add the number of port that the DHCP client is
connected to.
vlan Select this option to have the Switch add the ID of VLAN which the port belongs to.
hostname This is the system name you configure in the Basic Setting > General Setup screen.
Select this opti on for the Switch to add the system name to the cl ient DHCP re ques ts that i t
relays to a DHCP server.
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the client DHCP
requests. Spaces are allowed.
Remote-ID Use this section to configure the Remote ID sub-option to include information that identifies
the relay agent (the Switch).
Enable Select this option to have the Switch append the Remote ID sub-option to the option 82 field
of DHCP requests.
mac Select this option to have the Switch add its MAC address to the client DHCP requests that it
relays to a DHCP server.
string Enter a string of up to 64 ASCII characters for the remote ID information in this field.
Spaces are allowed.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigati on panel t o sa ve y our
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
418
43.4.3 Configuring DHCPv4 Global Relay
Use this screen to configure global DHCPv4 relay. Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the
navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 307 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.4.4 DHCPv4 Global Relay Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports on the Switch. To open
this screen, click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port.
Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile. Click the name to change the settings.
Circuit-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Circuit ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Circuit ID sub-option.
Remote-ID
Enable This field displays whether the Remote ID sub-option is added to client DHCP requests.
Field This field displays the information that is included in the Remote ID sub-option.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clea r the selected checkbox(es).
Table 206 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Option 82 Profile (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 207 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable DHCPv4 relay.
Remote DHCP
Server 1 .. 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCPv4 server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82
Profile Select a pre-defined DHCPv4 option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports. The
Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or R emote ID sub-option specifi ed in the profile to
DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to th e Switch’s run-time me mory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
419
Figure 308 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 208 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > Global > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comm a (,) or hyphen (-) for a
range. For example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for ports 1 to 24 for the Switch in slot 1 and port 28 for the Switch
in slot 2, for example.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified
port(s). The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option
specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Note: The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP >
DHCPv4 > Global screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable,
to clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change
the settings.
Port This field displays the port (s) to which the S witch applies t he settings. In stacking mode,
the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s).
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the entry(ies) that you want to remove, then click the Delete button to remove
the selected entry(ies) from the tabl e.
Cancel Click this to clear the check boxes above.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
420
43.4.5 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example
The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the
VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains. There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both
domains.
Figure 309 Global DHCP Relay Network Example
Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown. Make sure you select a DHCP option 82 profile
(default1 in this example) to set the Switch to send additional information (such as the VLAN ID)
together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server. This allows the DHCP server to assign the
appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID.
Figure 310 DHCP Relay Configuration Example
43.5 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings
Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients.
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 in the navigation panel, then click the VLAN link In the
DHCP Status screen that displays.
Note: You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN th at you want to
configure DHCP settings for on the Switch. See Section 6.5 on page 65 for
information on how to do this.
VLAN1 VLAN2
192.168.1.100
DHCP Server:
EXAMPLE
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
421
Figure 311 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 209 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply.
DHCP Status Select whe ther the Switch should function as a DHCP Server or Relay for the specified
VID. If you select Server then fields related to DHCP relay configuration are grayed out
and vice versa.
Server Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP server for this
VLAN.
Client IP Pool
Starting
Address
Specify the first of the cont iguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Size of Client
IP Pool Specify the size, or count of the IP address pool. The Switch can issue from 1 to 253 IP
addresses to DHCP clients.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the subnet mask for the client IP pool.
Default
Gateway Enter the IP address of the default gateway device.
Primary/
Secondary
DNS Server
Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients
along with the IP address and the subnet mask.
Lease Time Select Infinite to have the binding always valid. Select the second radio button to set up
the binding’s valid days, hours and minutes.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
422
43.5.1 DHCPv4 VLAN Port Configure
Use this screen to apply a different DHCP option 82 profile to certain ports in a VLAN. To open this
screen, click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port.
Figure 312 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
Relay Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP relay for this
VLAN.
Remote
DHCP Server
1 .. 3
Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to all ports in this
VLAN. The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-option specified in
the profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these changes
if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply.
Type This field displays Server or Relay for the DHCP mode.
DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration, this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the
IP address pool.
For DHCP relay configuration, this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entr ies.
Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 209 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
423
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.5.2 Example: DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
The following example displays two VLANs (VIDs 1 and 2) for a campus network. Two DHCP servers
are installed to serve each VLAN. The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the
dormitory rooms (VLAN 1) to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192.168.1.100. Requests from
the academic buildings (VLAN 2) are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of
172.16.10.100.
Table 210 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv4 > VLAN > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN you want to configure here.
Port Enter the number of port(s) to which you want to apply the specified DHCP option 82
profile.
You can enter multiple ports separated by (no space) comm a (,) or hyphen (-) for a
range. For example, enter “3-5” for ports 3, 4, and 5. Enter “3,5,7” for ports 3, 5, and 7.
In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Enter 1/1-1/24,2/28 for ports 1 to 24 for the Switch in slot 1 and port 28 for the Switch
in slot 2, for example.
Option 82 Profile Select a pre-defined DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the specified
port(s) in this VLAN. The Switch adds the Circuit ID sub-option and/or Remote ID sub-
option specified in the profile to DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Note: The profile you select here has priority over the one you select in the DHCP >
DHCPv4 > VLAN screen.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected entry or, if not applicable,
to clear the fields above.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change
the settings.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the port(s) belongs.
Port This field displays the port(s) to which the Switch a pplies the settings.
Profile Name This field displays the DHCP option 82 profile that the Switch applies to the port(s) in this
VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Select the c onfiguration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
424
Figure 313 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs
For the example network, configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown.
Figure 314 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example
43.6 DHCPv6 Status
Click IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 in the navigation panel to see information on the
DHCPv6 server. The DHCP Status screen displays.
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
DHCP:
192.168.1.100
DHCP:
172.16.10.100
EXAMPLE
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
425
Figure 315 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.7 DHCPv6 Information
Use this screen to configure DHCPv6 and DNS server settings on the Switch. Click IP Application
> DHCP > DHCPv6 > Information in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 316 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 > Information
Ta ble 211 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch’s DHCP server mode.
Index The Dynamic Host Configurati on Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server -client
protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes
and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients
exchange DHCP messages using UDP.
VID This is the index number of a DHCPv6 server information
DHCP Server This field displays the VLAN ID to which the DHCP server belongs.
Information This field displays Yes when the entry supports display of the refresh time and DNS
server; it shows No when it does not.
Prefix
Delegation This field displays Yes when the entry supports the prefix delegation; it shows No when
it does not. The prefix delegation is used by an IPv6 device to generate its IP address.
DHCP Relay A DHCPv6 relay agent is on the same network as the DHCPv6 cl ients and helps forward
messages between th e DHCPv6 server (that’s in another network) and the DHCPv6
clients.
This field displays Yes when the Switch supports DHCPv6 Relay and No when it does
not. Yes means the Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server. No
means the Switch does not forward DHCP requests to a DHCP server.
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
426
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
43.8 DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 device to use the received IPv6 prefix (for example, ‘2001:db2::/
48’) to generate its IP address. The Switch passes the the IPv6 prefix information to its connected
hosts (according to VLAN) so that they can generate their IPv6 addresses.
Use this screen to configure DHCPv6 client and IPv6 prefix settings for a specific VLAN on the
Switch. Click IP App lication > DHCP > DHCPv6 > Prefix Delegation in the navigation panel to
display the screen as shown.
Table 212 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 > Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable the Switch to get DHCPv6 and DNS server settings.
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which the DHCPv6 server belongs here.
Refresh Time Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information
retrieved from a DHCPv6 server. The allowed range is 600 to 4294967295 seconds.
DNS Server Specify the IPv6 address of the DNS server for the DHCP clients to use here.
An 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons
(:). This is an example IPv6 address ‘2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000’.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Lead ing zeros in a block can be omitted. So
‘2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000’ can be written as
‘2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0’.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double
colon can only appear on ce in an IPv6 address. So
‘2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015’ can be written as
‘2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015’, ‘2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015’,
‘2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15’ or ‘2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15’.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigati on panel t o sa ve y our
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change its
settings.
Active This field displays whether the DHCPv6 is activated or not.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN to which the DHCPv6 server belongs.
Refresh Time This field displays the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing
information retrieved from a DHCPv6 server. It displays disable if Refresh Time is not
configured.
DNS Server This fie ld displays the IPv6 address of the DNS server that the DHCP clients will use. It
displays disable when it is not configured.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clea r the selected checkbox(es).
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
427
Figure 317 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 > Prefix Delegation
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 213 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 > Prefix Delegation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Client DUID Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for
identificati on when they are exch anging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the
MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number
registered with the IAN A . Type the client DUID for the devices connected to the Switch in
this field.
Client Name Type a name to identify the DHCPv6 client in this field.
VID Type the ID number of the VLAN to which the DHCPv6 client belongs here.
Prefix Address IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length
specifies how many most signif icant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the
network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For example,
‘2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32’ is a prefix address with prefix length.
/32 means that the first 32 bits (‘2001:db8’) from the left is the network prefix.
Type the prefix address in this field. For example, type ‘2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0’
Prefix Length Type the prefix length in this field. For example, type 32.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigati on panel t o sa ve y our
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays a sequential number for each entry. Click an index number to change its
settings.
Client DUID This field displays the client DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) which uniquely identifies the
client.
Client Name This field displays a name to identify the DHCPv6 client.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN to which the DHCPv6 client belongs.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clea r the selected checkbox(es).
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
428
43.9 DHCPv6 Relay
A DHCPv6 relay agent is on the same network as the DHCPv6 clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCPv6 server (that’s in another network) and the DHCPv6 clients.
The DHCPv6 relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Rela y-F orward DHCPv6 messages. The remote- ID option carries a user-defined string,
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay -Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCPv6 server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Use this screen to configure DHCPv6 relay settings for a specific VLAN on the Switch. Click IP
Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 > DHCPv6 Relay in the navigation panel to display the screen
as shown.
Figure 318 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6 > DHCPv6 Relay
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 214 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6> DHCPv6 Relay
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which the DHCPv6 server that will assign IP information
belongs here.
Helper Address Enter the IPv6 address of the DHCPv6 server that will assign IP information here.
An 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons
(:). This is an example IPv6 address ‘2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000’.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Lead ing zeros in a block can be omitted. So
‘2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000’ can be written as
‘2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0’.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double
colon can only appear on ce in an IPv6 address. So
‘2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015’ can be written as
‘2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015’, ‘2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015’,
‘2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15’ or ‘2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15’.
Options
Chapter 43 DHCP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
429
Interface ID Select this option to have the Switch add the interface-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests
from the clients in the specified VLAN before the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Remote ID Enter a string of up to 64 printable characters to be carried in the remote-ID option. The
Switch adds the remote-ID option in the DHCPv6 requests from the clients in the specified
VLAN before the Switch forwards them to a DHCPv6 server.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses these changes if
it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top na vigati on panel t o sa ve y our
changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
VID This field displays the VLAN ID number. Click the VLAN ID to change the settings.
Helper Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the remote DHCPv6 server for this VLAN.
Interface ID This fiel d displa ys whether the interface- ID opti on is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients
in this VLAN.
Remote ID This field displays whether the remote-ID option is added to DHCPv6 requests from clients in
this VLAN.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Check the entry(ies) that you want to remove and then click the Delete button.
Cancel Click Cancel to clea r the selected checkbox(es).
Table 214 IP Application > DHCP > DHCPv6> DHCPv6 Relay (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
430
CHAPTER 44
VRRP
This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP) on the Switch.
44.1 VRRP Overview
Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway
(this Switch). The default gatew a y can become a single poin t of failure. Virtual Router R edun dancy
Protocol (VRRP), defined in RFC 2338, allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure
that the default gateway of a host is always available.
In VRRP, a virtual router (VR) represents a number of physical layer-3 devices. An IP address is
associated with the virtual router. A layer-3 device having the same IP address is the preferred
master router while the other Layer-3 devices are the backup routers. The master router forwards
traffic for the virtual router. When the master router becomes unavailable, a backup router assumes
the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and takes over.
The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches (A and B) implementing one
virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink gateway G. Host X is
configured to use VR1 (192.168.1.20) as the default gateway. If switch A has a higher priority, it is
the master router. Switch B, having a lower priority, is the backup router.
Figure 319 VRRP: Example 1
If switch A (the master router) is unavailable, switch B takes over. Traffic is then processed by
switch B.
172.16.1.100
172.16.1.1
172.16.1.10
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
431
44.2 VRRP Status
Click IP App lication > VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as shown
next.
Figure 320 IP Application > VRRP Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.3 VRRP Configuration
The following sections describe the different parts of the VRRP Configuration screen.
44.3.1 IP Interface Setup
Before configuring VRRP, first create an IP interface (or routing domain) in the IP Setup screen
(see the Section 6.5 on page 65 for more information).
Table 215 IP Application > VRRP Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of a rule.
Network This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain that is
associated to a virtual router.
VRID This field displays the ID number of the virtual router.
VR Status This field displays the status of the virtual router.
This field is Master indicating that this Switch functions as the master router.
This field is Backup indicating that this Switch functions as a backup router.
This field displays Init when this Switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the Uplink
Status field displays Dead.
Uplink Status This field display s the status of the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway.
This field is Alive indicating that the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway is up.
Otherwise, this field is Dead.
This field displays Probe when this Switch is check for the link state.
Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the
refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Inte rval.
Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling.
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
432
Click IP Application, VRRP and click the Configuration link to display the VRRP Configuration
screen as shown next.
Note: You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs.
Note: Routing domains with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table indicated.
Figure 321 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: IP Interface
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 216 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: IP Interface
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an entry.
Network This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain.
Authentication Select None to disable authentication. This is the default setting.
Select Simple to use a simple password to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on this
interface.
Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field, enter a password key (up to eight
printable ASCII character long) in this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation pane l to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table.
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
433
44.3.2 VRRP Parameters
This section describes the VRRP parameters.
44.3.2.1 Advertisement Interval
The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still up
and running. The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement interval.
By default, a Hello message is sent out every second.
If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval
expires, it is assumed that the master router is down. Then the backup router with the highest
priority becomes the master router.
Note: All routers participating in the virtual ro uter must use the same advertisement
interval.
44.3.2.2 Priority
Configure the priority level (1 to 254) to set which backup router to take over in case the master
router goes down. The backup router with the highest priority will take over. The priority of the
VRRP router that owns the IP address(es) associated with the virtual router is 255.
44.3.2.3 Preempt Mode
If the master router is unav ailable, a backup router assumes the role of the master router. However,
when another backup router with a higher priority joins the network, it will preempt the lower
priority backup router that is the master. Disable preempt mode to prevent this from happening.
By default, a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the master
router regardless of the preempt mode.
44.3.3 Configuring VRRP Parameters
After you set up an IP interface, configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration
screen.
Figure 322 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: VRRP Parameters
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
434
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
44.3.4 Viewing VRRP Summary
View the VRRP configuration summary at the bottom of the screen.
Figure 323 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: Summary
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 217 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: VRRP Parameters
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable this VRRP entry.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification
purposes.
Network Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies.
Virtual Router ID Select a virtual router number (1 to 7) for which this VRRP entry is created.
You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network.
Advertisement
Interval Specify the number of seconds between Hello message transmissions. The default is
1.
Preempt Mode Select this option to activate preempt mode.
Priority Enter a number (be twe en 1 and 2 54) to set the priorit y lev el. The bigger the number,
the higher the priority.
This field is 100 by default.
Uplink Gateway Ent er the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation.
The Switch checks the link to the uplink gat eway.
Response Ping Select this option to have the Switch respond to a ping that is sent to the virtual IP
address.
Primary Virtual IP Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation.
Secondary Virtual IP This field is optional. Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual router in dotted
decimal notation. This field is ignored when you enter 0.0.0.0.
Add Click this to create a new e ntry or to update an exi sting one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Table 218 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of an entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Active This field shows whether a VRRP entry is enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
435
44.4 VRRP Configuration Examples
The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the Switch.
44.4.1 One Subnet Network Example
The figure below shows a simple VRRP network with only one virtual router VR1 (VRID =1) and two
switches. The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G (172.16. 1.100). The host
computer X is set to use VR1 as the default gateway.
Figure 324 VRRP Configuration Example: One Virtual Router Network
You want to set switch A as the master router. Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP
Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below.
Name This field displays a descriptive name of an entry.
Network This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface.
VRID This field displays the ID number of a virtual router.
Primary VIP This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router.
Uplink Gateway This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway.
Priority This field displays the priority level (1 to 255) of the entry.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 218 IP Application > VRRP Configuration: Summary (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
172.16.1.100
172.16.1.1
172.16.1.10
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
436
Figure 325 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A
Figure 326 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B
After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration, the VRRP Status screens for both switches
are shown next.
Figure 327 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Sta t us on Switch A
Figure 328 VRRP Example 1: VRRP Status on Switch B
44.4.2 Two Subnets Example
The following figure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic. Hosts in
the two network groups use different default gateways. Each switch is configured to backup a
virtual router using VRRP.
You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup for
virtual router VR2. On the other hand, switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1.
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
437
Figure 329 VRRP Configuration Example: Two Virtual Router Network
You need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2 on each switch, while
keeping the VRRP configuration in example 1 for virtual router VR1 (refer to Section 44.4.2 on
page 436). Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures below.
Figure 330 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A
Figure 331 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B
After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration, the VRRP Status screens for both switches
are shown next.
172.16.1.100
172.16.1.1
172.16.1.10
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
Chapter 44 VRRP
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
438
Figure 332 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Status on Switch A
Figure 333 VRRP Example 2: VRRP Status on Switch B
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
439
CHAPTER 45
Load Sharing
45.1 Load Sharing Overview
The Switch learns the next-hop(s) using ARP and determines routing path(s) for a destination. The
Switch supports Equal-Cost MultiP ath (ECMP) to forward packets destined to the same device (A for
example) through different routing paths (1, 2 and 3) of equal path cost. This allows you to
balance or share traffic loads between multiple routing paths when the Switch is connected to more
than one next-hop. ECMP works with static routes or a routing protocol, such as OSPF.
With ECMP, packets are routed through the paths of equal cost according to the hash algorithm
output.
45.2 Configuring Load Sharing
Click IP Application > Load Sharing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 334 IP Application > Load Sharing
1
2
3
A
B
Chapter 45 Load Sharing
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
440
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 219 IP Application > Load Sharing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this option to enable Equal-Cost MultiPath (ECMP) routing on the Switch.
Criteria Sele ct the criteria the Switch uses to determine the routing path for a packet.
Select src-ip to have the Switch use a hash algorithm to convert a packet’s source IP
address into a hash value which acts as an index to a route path.
Select src-dst-ip to have the Switch use a hash algorithm to convert a packet’s source and
destination IP addresses into a hash value which acts as an index to a route path.
Aging Time Specify the time interval (from 0 to 86400 in increments of 10) in seconds at which the
Switch sends an ARP request to update a resolved next-hop’s MAC address.
Discover Time Specify the time interval (from 0 to 86400 in increments of 10) in seconds at which the
Switch sends an ARP request to update an unresolved next-hop’s MAC address.
Maximum Paths Set the maximum number of paths for one ECMP (Equal-Cost MultiPath) route. The
maximum number varies by Switch. A smaller number of maximum-paths means more
ECMP routes are allowed and a larger number of maximum -paths means fewer ECMP routes
are allowed.
The number of paths for a static route for ECMP cannot be bigger than the maximu m- path s
value configured here.
Throughput may be influenced while configuring ECMP maximum-paths.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
441
CHAPTER 46
ARP Setup
46.1 ARP Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
46.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch,
the Switch looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the
target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is
either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the
broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts
the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference
and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
46.1.2 ARP Learning Mode
The Switch supports three ARP learning modes: ARP-Reply, Gratuitous-ARP, and ARP-Request.
46.1.2.1 ARP-Reply
The Switch in ARP-Reply learning mode updates the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP
requests sent by the Switch. This can help prevent ARP spoofing.
In the following ex amp le, the S w i tc h does not have IP address and MAC address mapping
information for hosts A and B in its ARP table, and host A wants to ping host B. Host A sends an
ARP request to the Switch and then sends an ICMP request after getting the ARP reply from the
Switch. The Switch finds no matched entry for host B in the ARP table and broadcasts the ARP
request to all the devices on the LAN. When the Switch receives the ARP reply from host B, it
updates its ARP table and also forwards host A’s ICMP request to host B. After the Switch gets the
Chapter 46 ARP Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
442
ICMP reply from host B, it sends out an ARP request to get host A’s MAC address and updates the
ARP table with host A’s ARP reply. The Switch then can forward host B’s ICMP reply to host A.
46.1.2.2 Gratuitous-ARP
A gratuitous ARP is an ARP request in which both the source and destination IP address fields are
set to the IP address of the device that sends this request and the destination MAC address field is
set to the broadcast address. There will be no reply to a gratuitous ARP request.
A device may send a gratuitous ARP packet to detect IP collisions. If a device restarts or its MAC
address is changed, it can also use gratuitous ARP to inform other devices in the same network to
update their ARP table with the new mapping information.
In Gratuitous-AR P learning mode, the Switch updates its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a
gratuitous ARP request.
46.1.2.3 ARP-Request
When the Switch is in ARP-Request learning mode, it updates the ARP table with both ARP replies,
gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests.
AB
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ICMP Reply
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Reply
Chapter 46 ARP Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
443
Therefore in the following example, the Switch can learn host A’s MAC address from the ARP
request sent by host A. The Switch then forwards host B’s ICMP reply to host A right after getting
host B’s MAC address and ICMP reply.
46.2 ARP Setup
Click IP Application > ARP Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. Click
the link next to ARP Learning to open a screen where you can set the ARP learning mode for each
port. Click the link next to Static ARP to open a screen where you can create static ARP entries on
the Switch.
Figure 335 IP Application > ARP Setup
46.2.1 ARP Learning
Use this screen to configure each port’s ARP learning mode. Click the link next to ARP Learning in
the IP Application > ARP Setup screen to display the screen as shown next.
AB
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ARP Request
ARP Reply
ICMP Request
ICMP Reply
ICMP Reply
Chapter 46 ARP Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
444
Figure 336 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 220 IP Application > ARP Setup > ARP Learning
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This field appears only in stacking mode. Click the drop-down list to choose the sl ot number
of the Switch in a stack.
Port This field displays the port number. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot
and the second the port number.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first
to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
ARP Learning
Mode Select the ARP learning mode the Switch use s on the port.
Select ARP-Reply to hav e the Sw itch update the ARP ta ble only wi th the ARP re plies t o the
ARP requests sent by the Switch.
Select Gratuitous-ARP to hav e the Switc h update its ARP table with ei ther an ARP reply or
a gratuitous ARP request.
Select ARP-Request to have the Switch update the ARP table wi th both ARP replies,
gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests.
Apply Click Apply to save y our changes to th e Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch l ose s these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 46 ARP Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
445
46.2.2 Static ARP
Use this screen to create static ARP entries that will display in the Management > ARP Table
screen and will not age out. Click the link next to Static ARP in the IP Application > ARP Setup
screen to display the screen as shown.
Figure 337 IP Application > ARP Setup > Static ARP
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 221 IP Application > ARP Setup > Static ARP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without
deleting it by clearing this check box.
Name Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
IP Address Enter the IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC
address below.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above.
VID Enter the ID number of VLAN to which the dev ice belongs.
Port Enter the number of port to which the device connects. In stacking mode, the first number
represents the slo t and the second the port number.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This save s your change s to the Sw itch’ s run-t ime memory. The Switch loses these change s
if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save
your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
Index This field displays the index number of an entry. Click an index number to change the
settings.
Active This field displays Yes when the entry is activated and NO when it is deactivated.
Name This field displays the descriptive name for this entry. This is for identification purpos e s
only.
IP Address This is the IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC
address below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the correspondi ng IP address above.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs.
Chapter 46 ARP Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
446
Port This field displays the port to which the device connects.
Select an entry’ s check bo x to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the che ck box in the
table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the check boxes.
Table 221 IP Application > ARP Setup > Static ARP (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
447
CHAPTER 47
Maintenance
This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmw are
and configuration files.
47.1 The Maintenance Screen
Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files. Click Management >
Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 338 Management > Maintenance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 222 Management > Maintenance
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current This field displays whic h configuration (Configuration 1 or Configuration 2) is currently
operating on the Switch.
Firmware
Upgrade Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen.
Restore
Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen.
Backup
Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen.
Erase
Running-
Configuration
Click Clic k Her e to rese t th e cu rrent confi guration of the Switch. No te th at th is wil l not rese t
the configuration to the factory default settings.
Save
Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
448
47.2 Firmware Upgrade
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your
computer before uploading to the device.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
The Switch supports dual firmware images, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2. Use this screen to
specify which image is updated when firmware is uploaded using the web configurator and to
specify which image is loaded when the Switch starts up.
Click Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next.
Figure 339 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade (Standalone mode)
Reboot
System Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch.
Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch.
Click Stacking Default to reboot the system and load stacking configurations on the Switch.
Click Fac tory Default to reboot the system and load the factory default configuration on the
Switch.
Note: Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current
configuration on the Switch.
Tech-Support Click Click Here to see the Tech-Support screen. You can set CPU and memory thresholds
for log reports and download related log reports for issue analysis. Log reports include CPU
history and utilization, crash and memory.
Table 222 Management > Maintenance (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
449
Figure 340 Management > Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade (Stacking mode)
The top of firmware upgrade screen shows which firmware version is currently running on the
Switch. Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File
Path text box or click Browse to locate it. Firmware upgr ades are only applied after a reboot. Click
Upgrade to load the new firmware. Select the Config Boot Image drop-dow n list box if y ou w ant
to reboot the Switch and click Apply to apply the new firmware immediately. Click Upgrade to load
the new firmware.
After the firmware upgr ade process is complete, see the System Inf o screen to verify your current
firmware version number.
Table 223 Management > Maintenance> Firmware Upgrade
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Slot (Stacking
mode) This is the slot index number.
Name This is th e name of the Switch that you’re configuring.
Status (Stacking
mode) This field displays the current stacking status on t h e Switch.
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
450
47.3 Restore a Configuration File
Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore
Configuration screen.
Figure 341 Management > Maintenance > Restore Configuration
Click the Choose File button to upload the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to
restore in the File Path text box. After you have specified the file, click Restore. "config" is the
name of th e configuration file on the Switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically
renamed when you restore using this screen.
Version The Switch has two firmware sets, Firmware 1 and Firmware 2, residing in flash.
•Running shows the version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation date
of the firmware currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2). Th e
firmware information is also displayed at System Information in Basic Settings.
•Firmware 1 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date.
•Firmware 2 shows its version number (and model code) and MM/DD/YYYY creation
date.
Current Boot
Image This displays which firmware is currently in use on the Switch (Firmware 1 or Firmware
2).
Config Boot
Image Select which firmware (Firmware 1 or Firmware 2) should load after rebooting. Click
Apply and reboot the Switch to see changes including in the Current Boot Image field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory . The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
(Stacking mode) Click the drop-down list to choose the slot number of the Switch in a stack to upgrade the
firmware on this slot. Or select All to upgrade the firmware for all slots.
Firmware Choose to upload the new firmware to (Firmware) 1 or (Firmware) 2.
Choose File Click this and locate the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the
Switch.
Upgrade Click Upgrade to load the new firmware. Firmware upgrades are only applied after a
reboot. To reboot, go to Management > Maintenance > Reboot System. You may also
click Config 1, Config 2, or Factory Default (Config 1, Config 2 and Factory Default
are the configuration files you want the Switch to use when it restarts).
Table 223 Management > Maintenance> Firmware Upgrade (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
451
47.4 Backup a Configuration File
Backing up your S witch configurations allows y ou to create various “sn apshots” of your device from
which you may restore at a later date.
Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen.
Figure 342 Management > Maintenance > Backup Configuration
Follow the steps below to back up the current S witch configur ation to y our computer in this screen.
1Click Backup.
2If the current configur ation file is open and/or downloaded to your computer automatically, you can
click File > Save As to save the file to a specific place.
If a dialog box pops up asking whether you want to open or sa ve the file, click Save or Save File to
download it to the default downloads folder on your computer. If a Save As screen displays after
you click Save or Save File, Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in
drop-down list bo x and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save
the configuration file to your computer.
47.5 Erase Running-Configuration
Follow the steps below to clear current configuration on the Switch. Note that this will NOT reset the
Switch back to its factory defaults. For example, if your S witch is set to stacking mode and you click
erase running-configuration, after the the Switch restarts, it will remain in stacking mode. If you
want to change the Switch to its factory default mode, click Factory Default button in Reboot
System. See (Section 47.7.1 on page 452).
1In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Erase Running-Configuration
to clear all Switch configuration information you configured on the Switch..
2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations.
Figure 343 Erase Running-Configuration: Confirmation
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
452
3In the web configurator, click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take
effect. If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address
(192.168.1.1).
47.6 Save Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to configuration one on the
Switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings permanently to configuration two on the
Switch.
Alternatively, click Save on the top right-hand corner in any screen to save the configuration
changes to the current configuration.
Note: Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently. All
unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch.
47.7 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off. It also
allows you to load configuration one (Config 1),configuration two (Config 2), stacking default, or
factory default when you reboot. Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch.
1In the Maintenance screen, click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load
configuration one. The following screen displays.
Figure 344 Reboot System: Confirmation
2Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. This does not
affect the Switch’s configuration.
Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch.
Click Factory Default and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load default configuration settings on
the Switch.
47.7.1 Load Stacking Default
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the stacking defaults. The master Switch login
information will not be reset.
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
453
1In the click the Stacking Default button to clear all Switch configuration information you
configured and return to the stacking defaults.
2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the stacking defaults.
Figure 345 Load Stacking Default: Start
3In the web configurator, click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take
effect. If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address
(192.168.1.1).
47.7.2 Load Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults.
1In the cli ck the Factory Default button to clear all Switch configur ation information you configured
and return to the factory defaults.
2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults.
Figure 346 Load Factory Default: Start
3In the web configurator, click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take
effect. If you want to access the Switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address
(192.168.1.1).
47.8 Tech-Support
The Tech-Support feature is a log enhancement tool that logs useful information such as CPU
utilization history, memory and Mbuf (Memory Buffer) log and crash reports for issue analysis by
customer support should you have difficulty with your Switch. The Tech Support menu eases your
effort in obtaining reports and it is also available in CLI command by typing “Show tech-support”
command.
Click Menu > Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support to see the following screen.
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
454
Figure 347 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
Y ou may need W ordP ad or similar software to see the log report correctly. The table below describes
the fields in the above screen.
Table 224 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
LABEL DESCRIPTION
CPU Type a number ranging from 50 to 100 in the CPU threshold box, and type another
number ranging from 5 to 60 in the seconds box then click Apply.
For example, 80 for CPU threshold and 5 for seconds means a log will be created wh en
CPU utilization reaches over 80% and lasts for 5 seconds.
The log report holds 7 days of CPU log data and is stored in volatile memory (RAM). The
data is lost if the S witch is turned off or in event of power outage. After 7 days, the logs
wrap around and new ones replace the earliest ones.
The higher the CPU threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less data
technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Mbuf Type a number rangi ng from 50 to 100 i n the Mbuf ( Memory Buffer) t hreshold bo x. The
Mbuf log report is stored in flash (permanent) memory.
For example, Mbuf 50 means a log will be created when the Mbuf utilization is over
50%.
The higher the Mbuf threshold number, the fewer logs will be created, and the less data
technical support will have to analyze and vice versa.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes t o t he Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
All Click Download to see all the log report and system status. This log report is stored in
flash memory. If the All log report is too large, you can download the log reports
separately below.
Crash Click Download to see the crash log report. The log will include information of the last
crash and is stored in flash memory.
CPU history Click Download to see the CPU history log report. The 7-da ys log is stored in RAM and
you will need to save it, otherwise it will be lost in event of Switch shutdown or power
outage.
Memory Section Click Download to see the memor y se ction log repo rt. This log report i s stored in flash
memory.
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
455
47.9 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP
commands. First, understand the filename conventions.
47.9.1 Filename Conventions
The configuration file (also known as the romf ile or ROM) contains the factory default settings in the
screens such as password, Switch setup, IP Setup, and so on. Once you have customized the
Switch’s settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
Z y NOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System, sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system
firmware and has a “bin” filename extension.
You can store up to two images, or firmware files of the same device model, on the Switch. Only
one image is used at a time.
• Run the boot image <1|2> command to specify which image is updated when firmw are is loaded
using the web configurator and to specify which image is loaded when the Switch starts up.
• You can also use FTP commands to upload firmware to any image.
The Switch supports dual firmw are images, ras-0 and ras-1. You can switch from one to the other
by using the boot image <index> command, wher e <index> is 1 (ras-0) or 2 (ras-1). See the CLI
Reference Guide for more information about using commands. The system does not reboot after it
switches from one im ag e to the other.
47.9.1.1 Example FTP Commands
ftp> put firmware.bin ras-0
This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the Switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg
Mbuf Click Download to see the Mbuf log report. The log includes Mbuf over threshold
information. This log report is stored in flash memory.
ROM Click Download to see the R ead Only Memory (ROM) lo g report. This report is stored in
flash memory.
Table 224 Management > Maintenance > Tech-Support
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 225 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE INTERNAL
NAME EXTERNAL
NAME DESCRIPTION
Configuration File config .cfg This is the configuration (config) filename on the Switch.
Uploading the config file replaces the specified
configuration file system, including your Switch
configurations, system-related data (including th e
default password), the error log and the trace log.
Firmware ras-0
ras-1
*.bin This is th e generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the
Switch. ras-0 is image 1; ras-1 is image 2.
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
456
This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on your
computer.
If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source,
you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes “config”, “ras-0”, and “ras-1”. Be sure
you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use.
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong
model firmware may damage your device.
47.9.2 FTP Command Line Procedure
1Launch the FTP client on your computer.
2Enter open, followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch.
3Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username (the default is “admin”).
4Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
6Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch, for example, put firmware.bin ras-0
transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the Switch and renames it to “ras-0”.
Similarly, put config.cfg config tr ansfers the configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to
the Switch and renames it to “config”. Likewise get config config.cfg transfers the configur ation
file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to “config.cfg”. See Table 225 on page 455 for
more information on filename conventions.
7Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.
47.9.3 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.
Table 226 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Host Address Enter th e address of the host server.
Login Type Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for
anonymous access. Anonymous logins wi ll work only if your ISP or service
administrator has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.
Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode. Configuration
and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.
Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Lo cal Direct ory Specify the default local directo ry (path).
Chapter 47 Maintenance
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
457
47.9.4 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address. If
it does not match, the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
458
CHAPTER 48
Access Control
This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch.
48.1 Access Control Overview
A console port and FTP are allowed one session each, Telnet and SSH share nine sessions, up to fiv e
Web sessions (five different usernames and passwords) and/or limitless SNMP access control
sessions are allowed.
A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi-
login is disabled. See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling
multi-login.
48.1.1 What You Can Do
•Use the Access Control screen (Section 48.2 on page 458) to display the main screen.
•Use the SNMP screen (Section 48.3.4 on page 465) to configure your SNMP settings.
•Use the Trap Group screen (Section 48.3.5 on page 466) to specify the types of SNMP traps that
should be sent to each SNMP manager.
•Use the User Information screen (Section 48.3.7 on page 469) to create SNMP users for
authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups.
•Use the Logins screens (Section 48.4 on page 471) to assign which users can access the S witch
via web configurator at any one time.
•Use the Service Access Contro l screen (Section 48.10 on page 479) to decide what services
you may use to access the Switch.
•Use the Remote Management screen (Section 48.11 on page 480) to specify a group of one or
more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
48.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Use this screen to display the main screen. Click Management > Access Control in the
navigation panel to display the main screen as shown.
Table 227 Access Control Overview
Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP
One session Share up to nine
sessions One session Up to five accounts No limit
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
459
Figure 348 Management > Access Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
48.3 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and
monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the
network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage
and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1), SNMP version 2c or
SNMP version 3. The next figure illustr ates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available
if TCP/IP is configured.
Figure 349 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch (the Switch). An
agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
Table 228 Management > Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Click this link to configure your SNMP settings.
Logins Click this link to assign which users can acce ss the Switch via web configurator at any
one time.
Service Access
Control Click this link to decide what services you may use to access the Switch.
Remote Management Click this link to specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an
administrator may use a service to manage the Switch.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
460
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a Switch. Examples of variables include number of packets
received, node port status and so on. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agen ts to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
48.3.1 SNMP v3 and Security
SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management. SNMP managers can be required to
authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions.
Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers.
Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages. When the contents of the SNMP messages
are encrypted, only the intended recipients can read them.
48.3.2 Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The Switch supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• RFC 1157 SNMP v1
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
• RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
• RFC 1155 SMI
• RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
• RFC 1757 RMON
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP, RFC 2012
SNMPv2 MIB for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
Table 229 SNMP Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent.
In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it
initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
461
48.3.3 SNMP Traps
The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. The following tables outline the
SNMP traps by category.
An OID (Object ID) that begins with “1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15” is defined in private MIBs. Otherwise,
it is a standard MIB OID.
Ta ble 230 SNMP System Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
coldstart coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 This trap is sent when the Switch is
turned on.
warmstart warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 This trap is sent when the Switch
restarts.
fanspeed zyHwMonitorFanSpeedOutOfR
ange 1.3.6.1. 4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.1 This trap is s ent when the fan speed goes
above or below the normal operating
range.
poe
(For PoE
models
only)
zyPoePowerPortOverload 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.1This trap is sent when the port is turned
off to supply power due to overloading.
zyPoePowerPortShortCircuit 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.2 This trap is sent when the port is turned
off to supply power due to short circuit.
zyPoePowerPortOverSystemB
udget 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.59.4.3 This trap is sent when the port is turned
off to supply power because the
requested power exceeds the total PoE
power budget on the Switch.
temperature zyHwMonitorTemperatureOut
OfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.2 This trap is sent when the temperature
goes above or below the normal
operating range.
voltage zyHwMonitorPowerSupplyVolt
ageOutOfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.3 This trap is sent when the voltage goes
above or below the normal operating
range.
reset zySysMgmtUncontrolledSyste
mReset 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.1 This trap is sent when the Switch
automatically resets.
zySysMgmtControlledSystem
Reset 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.2 This trap is sent when the Switch resets
by an administrator through a
management interfac e.
zySysMgmtBootImageInconsi
stence 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.49.2.3 This trap is sent when the index number
of image which is loaded when t he Switch
starts up is different from what is
specified via the CL I.
RebootE vent 1.3.6.1.4.1.89 0.1.5.1.1.2 This tr ap is sent when the S witch re boots
by an administrator through a
management interfac e.
timesync zyDateTimeTrapTimeServerNo
tReachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.82.3.1 This trap is sent when the Switch’s date
and time is not manually entered or the
specified time server is not reachable.
intrusionloc
kzyPortIntrusionLock 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.61.3.2 This trap is sent when intrusion lock
occurs on a port.
loopguard zyLoopGuardLoopDetect 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.45.2.1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts
down a port.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
462
errdisable zyErrdisableDetect 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.24.4.1 This trap is sent when an error is
detected on a port, such as a loop occurs
or the rate limit for specific control
packets is exceeded.
zyErrdisableRecovery 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.24.4.2 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases
the action taken on a port, such as
shutting down the port or discarding
packets on the port, after the specified
recovery interval.
dyinggasp zyHwMonitorDyingGasp 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.5 The trap is sent when the device power
goes below the normal value.
powersourc
ezyHwMonitorPowerSourceAbn
ormal 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.10 This trap is sent when the power source
has an error.
zyHwMonitorPowerSourceAbn
ormalRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.26.2.11 This trap is sent when the power source
recovers to a normal status.
loginrecord zyAccessControlLoginRecord 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.1 This trap is sent when users log in.
zyAccessControlLogoutRecord 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.2 This trap is sent when users log out.
zyAccessControlLoginFail 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9.4.3 This trap is sent when users fail in login.
Ta ble 230 SNMP System Traps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 231 SNMP Stacking Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Channel zyStackingChannelUp 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.1 sta cking channel up
zyStackingChannelDown 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.2 stacking channel down
Slot zyStackingSlotAttach 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.3 stacking slot attached success
zyStackingSlotDetach 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.4 sta cking slot detached
Master zyStackingNewMaster 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.5 backup takeover as master
Upgrade
Firmware zyStackingUpgradeFirmwareFai
l1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.6 Upgrade Firmware fail with correspond slot ID.
Backup zyStackingNewBackup 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.7 New Backu p with correspond slot ID.
zyStackingBackupTakeover 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.8 Replaced master with correspond slot ID.
Master zyStackingNewMasterFromTake
over 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.9 New master from taking over with correspond
slot ID.
Fail zyStackingSyncConfFail 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.10 Sync. configuration fail with correspond slot ID.
zyStackingSysRestoreConfFail 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.11 Stacking backup takeover resotre configuration
fail.
zyStackingSlotInitFail 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.12 Stacking Slot init fail.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
463
Change zyStackingSlotChangeIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.13 Stacking change slot index.
zyStackingPriorityChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.14 Staking prority change.
zyStackingTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.9
7.4.15 Staking topology change.
Ta ble 231 SNMP Stacking Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 232 SNMP InterfaceTraps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
linkup linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet
link is up.
linkdown linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet
link is down.
autonegotiation zyPortAutonegotiationFailed 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.61.3.1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet
interface fails to auto-negotiate with
the peer Ethernet interface.
lldp lldpRemTablesChange 1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1 The trap is sent when entries in the
remote database have any updates.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP), defined as IEEE 802.1ab,
enables LAN devices t hat support
LLDP to exchange their configured
settings. This helps eliminate
configuration mismatch issues.
transceiver-
ddm zyTransceiverDdmiTemperature
OutOfRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.1 This trap is sent when the
transceiver temperature is above or
below the normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxPowerOutO
fRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.2 This trap is sent when the
transmitted optical power is above or
below the normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiRxPowerOutO
fRange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.3 This trap is sent when the received
optical power is above or below the
normal operating range.
zyTransceiverDdmiVoltageOutOf
Range 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.4 This trap is sent when the
transceiver supply voltage is above
or below the normal operating
range.
zyTransceiverDdmiTxBiasOutOfR
ange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.84.3.5 This trap is sent when the
transmitter laser bias current is
above or below the normal operating
range.
storm-control zyPortStormControlTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.78.2.1 This trap is sent when storm control
is detected on a specific port. A
packet filter action has been applied
on the interface.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
464
zuld zyZuldUnidirectionalDetected 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.110.3.1 This trap is sent when a
unidirectional link is detected.
zyZuldBidirectionalRecovered 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.110.3.2 This trap is sent when the port which
is shut down by ZULD becomes
active again.
Ta ble 232 SNMP InterfaceTraps (continued)
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
Ta ble 233 AAA Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
authentication authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/
or password.
zyAaaAuthenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.8.3.1 This trap is sent when authentication
fails due to incorrect user name and/
or password.
zyRadiusServerAuthenticationSe
rverNotReachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.1 This trap is sent when there is no
response me ssage from the RADIUS
authentication server.
zyTacacsServerAuthenticationSe
rverUnreachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.83.2.1 This trap is sent when there is no
response message from the TACACS+
authentication server.
authorization zyAaaAuthorizationFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.8.3.2 This trap is sent when management
connection authorization failed.
accounting zyRadiusServerAccountingServe
rNotReachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.71.2.2 This trap is sent when there is no
response me ssage from the RADIUS
accounting server.
zyTacacsServerAccountingServe
rUnreachable 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.83.2.2 This trap is sent when there is no
response message from the T ACACS+
accounting server.
Ta ble 234 SNMP IP Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
ping pingProbeFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe
fails.
pingTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.2 This trap is sent when a ping test (consisting
of a series of ping probes) fails.
pingTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.80.0.3 This trap is sent when a ping test is
completed.
traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails.
traceRouteTestCompleted 1.3.6.1.2.1.81.0.3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is
completed.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
465
48.3.4 Configuring SNMP
From the Access Control screen, display the SNMP screen. You can click Access Control to go
back to the Access Control screen.
Figure 350 Management > Access Control > SNMP
Ta ble 235 SNMP Switch Traps
OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
stp STPNewRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17. 0.1 This trap is sent wh en th e STP roo t switc h
changes.
zyMrstpNewRoot 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.52.3.1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root
switch changes.
zyMstpNewRoot 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.53.3.1 This trap is sent when the MSTP root
switch changes.
STPTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP topology
changes.
zyMrstpTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.52.3.2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology
changes.
zyMstpTopologyChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.53.3.2 This trap is sent when the MSTP root
switch changes.
mactable zyMacForwardingTableFull 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.48.2.1 This trap is sent when more than 99% of
the MAC table is us ed.
rmon RmonRisingAl arm 1.3.6.1.2.1. 16.0.1 This trap is sent when a variable goes ov er
the RMON "rising" threshold.
RmonFallingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2 This trap is sent when the variable falls
below the RMON "falling" threshold.
cfm dot1agCfmF aultAlarm 1.3.111.2.802.1.1. 8.0.1 The trap is sent when the Swi tch detects a
connectivity fault.
classifier zyAclV2ClassifierLogNotifica
tion 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.15.3.105.4.1 This trap is sent when the Switch detects
classifier log information.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
466
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
48.3.5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group
From the SNMP screen, click Trap Group to view the screen as shown. Use the Trap Group
screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager.
Table 236 Management > Access Control > SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community (password) values.
Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch. The SNMP version on the Switch must match the
version on the SNMP manager. Choose SNMP version 2c (v2c), SNMP version 3 (v3) or
both (v3v2c).
Note: SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string, which is the password for the incoming Get- and
GetNext- requests from the management station.
The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or
lower.
Set Communi t y Enter the Set Community string, which is the password for the incoming Set- requests
from the management station.
The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or
lower.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string, which is the password sent with each trap to the
SNMP manager.
The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or
lower.
Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch.
Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages.
IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to.
Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps.
Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap.
Note: This username must match an existing account on the Switch (configured in the
Management > Access Contro l > SNMP > User screen).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the n on-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
467
Figure 351 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
48.3.6 Enabling/Disabling Sending of SNMP Traps on a Port
From the SNMP > Trap Group screen, click Port to view the screen as shown. Use this screen to
set whether a trap received on the port(s) would be sent to the SNMP manager.
Table 237 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trap Destination
IP Select one of your c onfigured trap destinatio n IP addresses. These are the IP addresses of
the SNMP managers. You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP
Setting screen.
Use the rest of the scre en to select which traps the Switch sends to th at SNMP manager.
Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager.
Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station. See
Section 48.3.3 on page 461 for individual trap descriptions.
The traps are grouped by category. Selecting a category automatically sele cts all of the
category’s traps. Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the
Switch to send to the SN MP station. Clearing a category’s check box automatically clears
all of the category’s trap check boxes (the Switch only sends traps from selected
categories).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-ti me memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
468
Figure 352 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port (Standalone mode)
Figure 353 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port (Stacking mode)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 238 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Option Select the trap type you want to configure here.
Slot Select the slot number that represents the Switch in a stack.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
469
48.3.7 Configuring SNMP User
From the SNMP screen, click User to view the screen as shown. Use the User screen to create
SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups.
An SNMP user is an SNMP manager.
Figure 354 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Port This field displays a port number. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot
and the second the port number.
1/* Settings in this row apply to all ports for the Switch represented by the slot ID (in stacking
mode).
Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports. Use this
row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this check box to enable the sending of SNMP traps on this port. The Switch sends
the related traps received on this port to the SNMP manager.
Clear this chec k b ox to disable t he sending of SNMP traps on this port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation
panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 238 Management > Access Control > SNMP > Trap Group > Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 239 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Information Note: Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this screen to
create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager.
Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
470
Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for SNMP
communication from this user. Choose:
•noauth -to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager.
This is equiv alent to the Get, Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c . This is the lowest
security level.
•auth - to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this
user.
•priv - to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this
user. This is the highest security level.
Note: The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher
than the security level settings on the Switch.
Authentication Select an authenti cation algorithm. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash
Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data. SHA authentication is
generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication.
Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user. You can choose
one of the following:
•DES - Data Encryption Standard is a widely used (but breakable) method of data
encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data.
•AES - Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also
uses a secret key. AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data.
Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets.
Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View-based Access Control Model (VACM) group. SNMP
managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs. Specify in which
SNMP group this user is.
admin - Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration, including
the management of admin is trator accounts.
readwrite - Members of this group have read and write rights, me aning that the user can
create and edit the MIBs on the Switch, except the user account and AAA configuration.
readonly - Members of this group have read rights only, meaning the user can collect
information from the Switch.
Add Click this to create a new entry or to update an existing one.
This saves your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned o ff or loses powe r, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is a read-only number identifying a login account on the Switch. Click on an index
number to view more details and edit an existing account.
Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch.
Security Level This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and/or encryption for
SNMP communication wit h this user.
Authentication This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this
user.
Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user.
Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Table 239 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
471
48.4 Setting Up Login Accounts
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the Switch via web
configurator at any one time.
• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes. The username for
the Administrator is always admin. The default administrator password is 1234.
Note: It is highly recommended that you change the defaul t administrator password
(1234).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin) is someone who can view but
not configure Switch settings.
Click Management > Access Control > Logins to view the screen as shown.
Figure 355 Management > Access Control > Logins
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 239 Management > Access Control > SNMP > User (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 240 Management > Access Control > Logins
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default
administrator user name. Only the administrator has read/write access.
Old Password Ty pe the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
472
48.5 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure
communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure
encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 356 SSH Communication Example
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These users have read-only access. You can give users
higher privileges via the CLI. For more information on assigning priv ileges see the Ethernet Switch CLI
Reference Guide.
User Name Set a user name (up to 32 ASCII characters long).
Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to
confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Privilege Type the privilege l ev el for this user. At the time of writing, users may ha ve a privi lege
level of 0, 3, 13, or 14 representing different configuration rights as shown below.
• 0 - Display basic system information.
• 3 - Display configuration or status.
• 13 - Configure features except for login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the
authentication method sequence and authorization settings, multiple logins,
administrator and enable passwords, and configuration information display.
• 14 - Configure login accounts, SNMP user accounts, the authentication method
sequence and authorization settings, multiple logins, and administrator and enable
passwords, and display configuration information.
Users can run command lines if the session’s privilege level is greater than or equal to
the command’s privilege level. The session privilege ini tially comes fr om the privilege
of the login account. For example, if the user has a privilege of 5, he/she can run
commands that requires privilege level of 5 or less but not more.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 240 Management > Access Control > Logins (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
473
48.6 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
Figure 357 How SSH Works
1Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host
key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and
sends the result back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server
public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption
method to use.
3Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established
between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name
and password) to the server to log in to the server.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
474
48.7 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods (DES,
3DES and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file
transfer on port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.
48.7.1 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system)
that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH.
48.8 Introduction to HTTPS
HT TPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol
that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol
that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot
read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data
integrity (you know if data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web
configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the Switch) must always authenticate
itself to the SSL client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch),
whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so.
Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL-client must send the
Switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a Certificate Authority
(CA) that is a trusted CA on the Switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1HT TPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the
Switch’s WS (web server).
2HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the Switch’s WS (web
server).
Figure 358 HTTPS Implementation
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
475
Note: If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen, then the Swit ch blocks
all HTTP connection attempts.
48.9 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch, then in your browser enter “https://
Switch IP Address/” as the web site address where “S witch IP Address” is the IP address or domain
name of the Switch you wish to access.
48.9.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages
48.9.1.1 Internet Explorer 6
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you
trust the server certificate.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the web
configurator login screen; if you select No, then web configurator access is blocked.
Figure 359 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer 6)
48.9.1.2 Internet Explorer 7 or 8
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a screen with the message "There is a
problem with this website's security certificate." may display. If that is the case, click Continue to
this website (not recommended) to proceed to the web configurator login screen.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
476
Figure 360 Security Certificate Warning (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
After you log in, you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error. Cl ick on
Certificate Error next to the address bar and click View certificates.
Figure 361 Certificate Error (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
Click Install Certificate... and follow the on-screen instructions to install the certificate in your
browser.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
477
Figure 362 Certificate (Internet Explorer 7 or 8)
48.9.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server, a This Connection is Untrusted screen
may display. If that is the case, click I Understand the Risks and then the Add Exception...
button.
Figure 363 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox)
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
478
Confirm the HT TPS serv er URL matches. Click Confirm Security Exception to proceed to the web
configurator login screen.
Figure 364 Security Alert (Mozilla Firefox)
48.9.3 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the S witch main screen
appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar or next to the website
address denotes a secure connection.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
479
Figure 365 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection
48.10 Service Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch. You
may also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each service in
the Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go back to the main
Access Control screen.
Figure 366 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
EXAMPLE
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
480
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
48.11 Remote Management
From the Access Control screen, display the Remote Management screen as shown next.
Y o u can specify a group of one or m ore “trusted computers” from which an administrator ma y use a
service to manage the Switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen.
Figure 367 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
Table 241 Management > Access Control > Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here.
Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch.
Service Port For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS services, you may change the default service port by
typing the new port number in the Service Port field. If you change the default port number
then you will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new port number for
that service.
Timeout Type how many minutes (from 1 to 255) a management session can be left idle before the
session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long
idle timeouts may have security risks.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 48 Access Control
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
481
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 242 Management > Access Control > Remote Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Entry This is the client set index number. A “client set ” is a group of one o r more “trusted
computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Swit ch.
Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to
temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Start Address
End Address
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this
Switch.
The Switch checks if the client IP addre ss of a computer requesting a service or protocol
matches the range set he re. The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does no t
match.
Telnet/FTP/
HTTP/ICMP/
SNMP/SSH/
HTTPS
Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted
computers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel
to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
482
CHAPTER 49
Diagnostic
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen. You can use this screen to help you identify problems.
49.1 Diagnostic
Click Management > Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to
check system logs, ping IP addresses or perform port tests.
Figure 368 Management > Diagnostic
Chapter 49 Diagnostic
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
483
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 243 Management > Diagnostic
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ping Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv4 address, and select which traffic flow (in-
band or out-of-band) the Switch is to send ping frames.
If you select in-band, the Switch sends the frames to all ports except the management
port (labelled MGMT).
If you select out-of-band, the Switch sends the frames to the management port
(labelled MGMT).
Otherwis e, select - to send ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to ping an IPv6 address. You can also select vlan and
specify the ID number of the VLAN to which the Switch is to send ping requests.
Otherwis e, select - to send ping requests to all VLANs on the Switch.
Count Enter the number of ICMP Echo Request (ping) messages the Switch continuously sends.
IP Address/
Host Name Type the IP address or host name of a device that you want to ping in order to test a
connection.
Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address.
Trace Route Test
IPv4 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv4
address, and select in-band or out-of-band on which the Switch traces the path.
Otherwis e, select - to trace the path on any VLAN.
IPv6 Select this option if you want to trace the route packets take to a device with an IPv6
address.
T TL Enter the Time To Live (TTL) value for the ICMP Echo Request packets. This is to set the
maximum number of the hops (routers) a packet can travel through. Each router along
the path will decrement the TTL value by one and forward the packets. When the TTL
value becomes zero and the destination is not found, the router drops the packets and
informs the sender.
Wait Time Specify how many seconds the Switch waits for a response to a probe before running
another traceroute.
Queries Specify how many times the Switch performs the traceroute function.
IP Address/
Host Name Enter the IP address or host name of a device to which you want to perform a
traceroute.
Click Trace Route to have the Switch perform the traceroute functio n. This determines
the path a packet takes to the specified device.
Ethernet Port Test Ente r a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test.
Cable Diagnostics Enter a port number and click Diagnose to perform a physical wire-pair test of the
Ethernet connections on the specified port(s). The following fields display when you
diagnose a port.
Port This is the number of the physical Ethernet port on the Switch.
Channel An Ethernet cable usually has four pairs of wires. A 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port only
use and test two pairs, while a 1000BASE-T port requires all four pairs.
This displays the descriptive name of the wire-pair in the cable.
Chapter 49 Diagnostic
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
484
Pair s tatus Ok: The physical connection between the wi re-pair is okay.
Open: There is no physic al connection (an o p en circuit detected) between the wire-pair.
Short: There is an short circuit detected between the wire- p air.
Unknown: The Switch failed to run cable diagnostics on the cable connected this port.
Unsupported: The port is a fiber port or it is not active.
Cable length
(m) This displays the total length of the Ethernet cable that is connected to the port when the
Pair status is Ok and the Switch chipset supports this feature.
This shows N/A if the Pair status is Open or Short. Check the Distance to fault.
This shows Unsupported if the Switch chipset does not support to sh ow the cable
length.
Distance to
fault (m) This displays the distance between the port and the location where the cable is open or
shorted.
This shows N/A if the Pair status is Ok.
This shows Unsupported if the Switch chipset does not support to show the distance.
Table 243 Management > Diagnostic (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
485
CHAPTER 50
System Log
50.1 Overview
A log message stores the information for viewing.
50.2 System Log
Click Management > System Log in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to
check current system logs.
Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages
automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log
message first.
Figure 369 Management > System Log
The summary table shows the time the log message was recorded and the reason the log message
was generated. Click Refresh to update this screen. Click Clear to clear the whole log, regardless
of what is currently displayed on the screen. Click Download to save the log to your computer.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
486
CHAPTER 51
Syslog Setup
This chapter explains the syslog screens.
51.1 Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
51.2 Syslog Setup
Click Management > Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen. The syslog feature
sends logs to an external syslog server. Use this screen to configure the device’s system logging
settings and configure a list of external syslog servers.
Table 244 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Critical: The system condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warni ng condition on the system .
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condi tion on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
Chapter 51 Syslog Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
487
Figure 370 Management > Syslog Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 245 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog sett ing
Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate.
Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category.
F acil ity The log facility all ows you t o send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigat ion panel to save your chan ges to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Syslog Server
Setup
Active Select th is ch eck box to hav e th e de vi ce se n d logs to this syslog s erver. Clear the che ck
box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it
(you can edit the entry later).
Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server.
Log Level Select the severity level(s) of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog
server. The lower the number, the more critical the l ogs are.
Chapter 51 Syslog Setup
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
488
Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch lose s
these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top
navigat ion panel to save your chan ges to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry. Click this number to edit the entry.
Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server. No displays if
the device is not to send logs to the syslog server.
IP Address This field displays the IP address of the sysl og server.
Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Select an entry’s check box to select a specific entry. Otherwise, select the check box in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies).
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this scre en afresh.
Table 245 Management > Syslog Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
489
CHAPTER 52
Cluster Management
This chapter introduces cluster management.
52.1 Clustering Management Status Overview
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch, called the cluster
manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able
to communicate with one another.
In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches
on the upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Table 246 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster
members 24
Cluster Member Models Cluster member models must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster
management implementation.
Cluster Manager The cluster manager is the Switch through which you manage the
cluster member switches.
Cluster Members Cluster members are the switches being managed by the cluster
manager switch.
Chapter 52 Cluster Management
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
490
Figure 371 Clustering Application Example
52.2 Cluster Management Status
Click Management > Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following
screen.
Note: A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 372 Management > Cluster Management
Chapter 52 Cluster Management
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
491
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
52.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select
an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web
configurator home page. Th is cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that
you'd see if you accessed it directly are different.
Table 247 Management > Cluster Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and
not via the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)
Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.
The Number of
Member This field displays the number of swi tc hes that make up this cluster. The following fields
describe the cluster member switches.
Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each number in
the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web configurator
(see Figure 373 on page 492).
MacAddr This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Model This field displays the model name.
Status This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example, the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was
set as the manager and so left the member list, et c.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after the
link between cluster member and manager goes down)
Chapter 52 Cluster Management
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
492
Figure 373 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
52.2.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
Y o u can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch
as shown in the following example.
Figure 374 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 Switch FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:58:46 1970
User (192.168.0.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in
ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 6173152 Jul 01 12:00 ras-0
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 6173152 Jul 01 12:00 ras-1
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 33554432 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 ras-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File sent OK
ftp: 297 bytes received in 0.00Seconds 297000.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK
ftp> put 410AAGB0.bin ras-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR ras-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File received OK
ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
Chapter 52 Cluster Management
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
493
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
52.3 Clustering Management Configuration
Use this screen to configure clustering management. Click Configuration from the Cluster
Management screen to display the next screen.
Figure 375 Management > Clustering Management > Configuration
Table 248 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User Enter “admin”.
Password The web configurator password default is 1234.
ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster membe r switch’s firmware
and configuration file.
410AAGB0.bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster
member switch.
ras-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the cluster
manager switch.
config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen in the
cluster manager switch.
EXAMPLE
Chapter 52 Cluster Management
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
494
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 249 Management > Clustering Management > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clustering Manager
Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster can
only have one manager. Other (directly connected) swi tches that are set t o be cluster
managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a switch that was
previously a cluster member is later set to becom e a cluster manager, then its Status is
displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Statu s screen appears in the mem ber
summary list below.
Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 32 printable
characters (spaces are allowed).
VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN. All
switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same
cluster. Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering
Candidates list. This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port-based
VLAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Clustering
Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
List A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The switches must
be directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers
will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list. Switches that are not in the same
management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Password Each cluster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a member in
the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password. If that
switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards, then it cannot
be managed from the Cluster Manager. Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster
Management Status screen.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those switches
to select them. Then enter their comm o n web configurator password.
Add Click Add to save your change s to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses
these changes if it is turned off or lose s power, so use the Save link on the top
navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done
configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.
The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.
Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch.
MacAddr This is the cluster memb er switch’s hardware MAC address.
Name This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
Model This is the cluster member switch’s model name.
Select an entry ’ s ch eck bo x to selec t a specifi c entry. Otherwise, select the chec k bo x in
the table heading row to select all entries.
Remov e Click the Remove button to remove the selected cluster member switch(es) from the
cluster.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
495
CHAPTER 53
MAC Table
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.
53.1 MAC Table Overview
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are
forwarded or filtered across the Switch’ s ports. When a device (which may belong to a VLAN group)
sends a packet which is forw arded to a port on th e S witch, the MAC address of the device is shown
on the Switch’s MAC Table. It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the
Switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
The Switch uses the MAC Table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port from which this source MAC address
came.
2The Switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address
already learned in the MAC Table.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to
that port.
• If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to
all ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion then the Switch sends an ARP to
request the MAC address. The Switch then learns the port that replies with the MAC address.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the
same as the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Figure 376 MAC Table Flowchart
Chapter 53 MAC Table
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
496
53.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Click Management > MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen. Use this
screen to search specific MAC addresses. You can also directly add dynamic MAC address(es) into
the static MAC forwarding table or MAC filtering table from the MAC table using this screen.
Figure 377 Management > MAC Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 250 Management > MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Condition Select All to display all MAC addresses in the MAC table.
Select Static to only display static MAC address(es) in this screen.
Select MAC and enter a v alid MAC address (six hexadecimal char acter pairs) to display the
MAC address information in this screen.
Select VID and type a VLAN identification number to display all MAC addresses in the
VLAN.
Select Port and type the number of a port to display all MAC addresses learned from the
port.
Sort by Select this to display and arrange the data accordin g to MAC address (MAC), VLAN group
(VID) or port number (Port). The information is then displayed in the summary table
below.
Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC
address(es) you select the criteria he re into the static MAC forwarding table (see Section
8.2 on page 124). The type of the MAC address(es) will be changed to “static”.
Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC
address(es) you make the se arch here into the static MA C filtering table (see Section 10.1
on page 130). The MAC address(es) will be remov ed from the MAC table and all tr affic sent
from the MAC address(es) wil l be blocked by the Switch.
Search Click this to search data in the MAC table according to your input criteria.
Transfer Click this to perform the MAC address tr ansferri ng you se lected in the Transfer Type field.
Chapter 53 MAC Table
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
497
Cancel Click this to begin configuring the se arch criteria afresh.
Index This is the incoming frame index number.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VID This is the VL AN group to which this frame belongs.
Port This is the port from which the above MAC a ddress was learned. In stacking mode, the fi rst
number represents the slot and the second the port number.
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
Table 250 Management > MAC Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
498
CHAPTER 54
IP Table
This chapter introduces the IP table.
54.1 IP Table Overview
The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the Switch’s ports. When
a device (which may belong to a VLAN group) sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the
Switch, the IP address of the device is shown on the Switch’s IP Table. The IP Table also shows
whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (belonging to the Switch).
The Switch uses the IP Table to determine how to forward packets. See the following figure.
1The Switch examines a received packet and learns the port from which this source IP address
came.
2The Switch checks to see if the packet's destination IP address matches a source IP address already
learned in the IP Table.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this IP address, then it forwards the packet to
that port.
• If the Switch has not already learned the port for this IP address, then the packet is flooded to
all ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestionthen the Switch sends an ARP to
request the MAC address. The Switch then learns the port that replies with the MAC address.
• If the Switch has already learned the port for this IP address, but the destination port is the
same as the port it came in on, then it filters the packet.
Figure 378 IP Table Flowchart
Chapter 54 IP Table
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
499
54.2 Viewing the IP Table
Click Management > IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 379 Management > IP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 251 Management > IP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Sort by Click one of the followin g buttons to disp lay and arrange the data according to that button
type. The information is then displayed in the summary table below.
IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address.
VID Clic k this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.
Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number.
Index This field displays the index number.
IP Address This is the IP address of the devic e from which the incomin g packets came.
VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs.
Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned. This field displays CPU to
indicate the IP address belongs to the Switch. In stacking mode, the first number represents
the slot and the second the port number.
Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (belonging to
the Switch).
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
500
CHAPTER 55
ARP Table
This chapter introduces ARP Table.
55.1 ARP Table Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
55.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch,
the Switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address, it sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the Switch puts all ones in the
target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is
either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the
broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts
the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference
and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
55.2 The ARP Table Screen
Click Management > ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use the ARP
table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s) and remove specific dynamic ARP entries.
Chapter 55 ARP Table
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
501
Figure 380 Management > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 252 Management > ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Conditio n Specify h ow you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush.
Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table.
Select IP Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the
specified IP address.
Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified
port.
Flush Click Flush to remove th e ARP entries according to the condit ion you specified.
Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults.
Index This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address This is the IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC
address below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above.
VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs.
Port This field displays the port to which the device connects. CPU means this IP address is the
Switch’s management IP address. In stacking mode, the first number represents the slot
and the second the port n umber.
Age(s) This field displays how long (in seconds) an entry can still remain in the ARP table before it
ages out and needs to be relearned. This shows 0 for a static entry.
Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic (learned by the Switch) or static (manually
configured in the Ba sic Setting > IP Se tu p or IP Application > ARP Setup > Static
ARP screen).
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
502
CHAPTER 56
Routing Table
This chapter introduces the routing table.
56.1 Overview
The routing table contains the route information to the network(s) that the Switch can reach.
56.2 Viewing the Routing Table Status
Use this screen to view routing table information. Click Management > Routing Table in the
navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 381 Management > Routing Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 253 Management > Routing Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number.
Destinati on This fi eld displays the destination IP routing domain.
Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device.
Interface This field displays the IP address of the Interface.
Metric This field displays the cost of the route.
Type This field displays the method used to learn the ro ute.
STATIC - added as a static entry.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
503
CHAPTER 57
Path MTU Table
This chapter introduces the IPv6 Path MTU table.
57.1 Path MTU Overview
The largest size (in bytes) of a packet that can be transferred over a data link is called the
maximum transmission unit (MTU). The Switch uses Path MTU Discovery to discover Path MTU
(PMTU), that is, the minimum link MTU of all the links in a path to the destination. If the Switch
receives an ICMPv6 Packet Too Big error message after sending a packet, it fragments the next
packet according to the suggested MTU in the error message.
57.2 Viewing the Path MTU Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 path MTU information on the Switch. Click Management > Path MTU
Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 382 Management > Path MTU Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 254 Management > Path MTU Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Path MTU
aging ti me This field displays h ow long an entry remains in the Path MTU table before it ages out and
needs to be relearned.
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Destination
Address This field displays the destination IPv6 address of each path/entry.
MTU This field displays the maximum transmission unit of the links in the path.
Expire Th is field displays how long (in minutes) an entry can still remain in the Path MTU table
before it ages out and needs to be relearned.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
504
CHAPTER 58
Configure Clone
This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports.
58.1 Configure Clone
Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port
or ports. Click Management > Configure Clone to open the following screen.
Chapter 58 Configure Clone
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
505
Figure 383 Management > Configure Clone (Standalone)
Chapter 58 Configure Clone
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
506
Figure 384 Management > Configure Clone (Stacking)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 255 Management > Configure Clone
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source/
Destination
Port / Slot
(Stacking)
In stacking mode, a port is defined by a slot ID representing the Switch in the stack and a
port number.
Select the source port and slot (in stacking mode) under the Source label. This port’s
attributes are copied.
Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label. These are the ports which
are going to have the same attr ibutes as the source port. You can enter individual ports
separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a h yphen. Fo r example, 2, 4, 6 indicates
that ports 2, 4 and 6 are the destination ports. 2-6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the
destination ports.
In stacking mode, you can select multiple destination slots.
Basic Setting Select which port settings (configured in the Basic Setting menus) should be copied to the
destination port(s).
Chapter 58 Configure Clone
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
507
Advanced
Application Select which port settings (configured in the Advanced Application menus) should be
copied to the destination ports.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch’s run-time memory. The Switch loses these
changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 255 Management > Configure Clone (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
508
CHAPTER 59
IPv6 Neighbor Table
This chapter introduces the IPv6 neighbor table.
59.1 IPv6 Neighbor Table Overview
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor table. If there is an address to be resolved or verified,
the Switch sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch receives a neighbor
advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’ s link -layer address in the neighbor table. You can
also manually create a static IPv6 neighbor entry using the Basic Setting > IPv6 > IPv6
Configuration > IPv6 Neighbor Setup screen.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults other table to determine the next hop.
Once the next hop IPv6 address is known, the Switch looks into the neighbor table to get the link-
layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Switch cannot find an
entry in the neighbor table or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address
resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
59.2 Viewing the IPv6 Neighbor Table
Use this screen to view IPv6 neighbor information on the Switch. Click Management > IPv6
Neighbor Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 385 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 256 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the index number of each entry in the table.
Interface This field displa ys the ID number of the IPv6 interface on whic h the IPv6 address is created or
through which the neighboring device can be reache d.
Neighbor
Address This field displays the IPv6 address of the Switch or a neighboring device.
MAC This field displays the MAC address of the IPv6 interface on which the IPv6 address is
configure or the MAC address of the neighboring device.
Chapter 59 IPv6 Neighbor Table
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
509
Status This field dis p lays whether the neighbor IPv6 interface is reachable. In IPv6, “reachable”
means an IPv6 packet can be correctly forwarde d to a neighbor node (host or router) and the
neighbor can successfully receive and handle the packet. The available options in this field
are:
• reachable (R): The interface of the neighboring device is reachable. (The Switch has
received a response to the initial request.)
• stale (S): The last reachable time has expired and the Switc h is w a it ing for a respons e to
another initial request. The field displays this also when the Switch receives an
unrequested response from the neighbor’s interface.
• delay (D): The neighboring interface is no longer known to be reachable, and traffic has
been sent to the neighbor recently. The Switch delays sending request packets for a short
to give upper-layer protocols a chance to determine reachability.
• probe (P): The Switch is sending request packets and waiting for the neighbor’ s response.
• invalid (IV): The neighbor address is with an invalid IPv6 address.
• un known (?): The status of the neighboring interface can not be determined for some
reason.
• incomplete (I): Address resolution is in progress and the link-layer address of the
neighbor has not yet been determined. The interface of the neighboring device did not
give a complete response.
Type This field displays the type of an address mapping to a neighbor interface. The available
options in this field are:
• other (O): none of the following type.
• local (L): A Switch interface is using the address.
• dynamic (D): The IP address to MAC address can be successfully resolved using IPv6
Neighbor Discovery protocol. Is it similar as IPv4 ARP (Address Resolution protocol).
• static (S): The interface address is statically configured.
Table 256 Management > IPv6 Neighbor Table (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
510
CHAPTER 60
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•Switch Access and Login
•Switch Configuration
60.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Switch does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure the Switch is turned on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC
models).
2Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch.
3Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4Turn the Switch off and on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
5Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch (in AC models or if the AC
power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
The ALM LED is on.
1Turn the Switch off and on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
2Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch (in AC models or if the AC
power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
3If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
Chapter 60 Troubleshooting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
511
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 3.3 on page 35.
2Check the hardware connections. See Section 3.1 on page 30.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4Turn the Switch off and on (in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
5Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch (in AC models or if the AC
power supply is connected in AC/DC models).
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
60.2 Switch Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Switch.
1The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2Use the console port to log in to the Switch.
3Use the MGMT port to log in to the Switch, the default IP addr ess of the MGMT port is 192.168.0.1.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.6 on page
44.
I forgot the username and/or password.
1The default username is admin and the default password is 1234.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.6 on page
44.
I cannot see or access th e Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default in-band IP address is 192.168.1.1.
Chapter 60 Troubleshooting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
512
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and hav e forgotten it, see the troubleshooting su ggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Switch.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
3.3 on page 35.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch. (If you know that there are routers
between your computer and the Switch, skip this step.)
5Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Switch with the default IP address.
See Section 4.6 on page 44.
6If the problem continues, contact the vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the Switch using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Switch,
check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Switch.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is
admin, and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps
Lock] is not on.
2You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close other Telnet
session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet. If you have configured a secured client IP
address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for
details.
3Disconnect and re-connect the cord to the Switch.
4If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 4.6 on page
44.
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device .
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Jav a pe rmission s (en a bled by default).
Chapter 60 Troubleshooting
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
513
I cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation
panel.
The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. Adjust the value in your computer and
then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation
panel.
There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet, HTTP and SSH.
Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management > Diagnostic screen to
check for unauthorized access to your Switch. To avoid unauthorized access, configu re the secured
client setting in the Management > Access Control > Remote Management screen for telnet,
HTTP and SSH (see Section 48.11 on page 480). Computers not belonging to the secured client set
cannot get permission to access the Switch.
60.3 Switch Configuration
I lost my configuration settings after I restart the Switch.
Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch’s
nonvolatile memory each time you make changes. Click Save
at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the
configuration permanently. See also Section 47.6 on page 452 for more information about how to
save your configuration.
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
514
APPENDIX A
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/code numbers and services, visit
the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information
about port numbers.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
Table 257 Commonly Used Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IP SEC AH (Authentication Header) t unneling
protocol uses this service.
AIM/New-ICQ TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It is also used as
a listening port by ICQ.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP
UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from White
Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches web
names (for example www.zyxel.com) to IP
numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that
can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast
transfer of files, including large files that may not be
possi ble by e- mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server
protocol for the world wide web.
Appendix A Common Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
515
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-
commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for
diagnostic or routing purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when
sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exc hange algorithm is used for key
distribution and management.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this
protocol.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/server
distributed file service that provides transparent file
sharing for network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery
mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out
ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote
host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer
get e-mail from a POP3 se rver through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-P oint Tunneling Protocol enables secure
transfer of data over public networks. This is the
control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables
secure transfer of data over public networks. This is
the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time
sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
RTELNET TCP 107 Rem ote Tel net.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol
(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-
exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables
you to move messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
Table 257 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix A Common Services
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
516
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access
data on many different types of database systems,
including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX
systems and network servers.
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX
server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol
common on the Internet and in UN IX environm ents.
It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary
function is to allow users to log into remote host
systems.
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file
transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP
(User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 257 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
517
APPENDIX B
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutiv e blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet pre fi x.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 258 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
518
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 259 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local conne cted link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connec ted link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site .
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
Table 260 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
519
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-b it (6-
byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP
server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when
IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own
Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Switch is set to automatically
obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 1another address which
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Table 260 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
Table 261
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56
Table 262
EUI-64 02: 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
520
combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a
routable global IP address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol
that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other
configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages
using UDP.
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for
identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC
address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with
the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses an d IA_T A is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCP serv er on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Rela y-F orward DHCPv6 messages. The remote- ID option carries a user-defined string,
1. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
T1
T2
Renew Rebind
Rebind
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
to S2
to S2
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
521
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay -Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Switch uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Switch passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The
hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement
message.
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router adv ertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement
from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router
list. The Switch maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the Switch configures a link-local address automatically, and then
sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the Switch also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Switch
receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the
neighbor cache. When the Switch uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and
receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’ s information to the neighbor cache,
prefix list and destination cache. The Switch creates an entry in the default router list cache if the
router can be used as a default router.
When the Switch needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the
next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Switch uses the prefix list to
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
522
determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing
through a router. If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop . Otherwise, the
Switch determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP
address is known, the Switch looks into the neighbor cache to get the link -lay er address and sends
the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the S witch cannot find an en try in the neighbor cache
or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps
reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (I GMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to u pdate the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equiv alent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
523
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
3Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
4Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
524
5Click Start and then OK.
6Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also en abled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3Click OK to save the change.
Appendix B IPv6
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
525
4Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
526
APPENDIX C
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device.
See http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also
http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.cn
India
• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.in
Kazakhstan
•ZyXEL Kazakhstan
Appendix C Customer Support
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
527
• http://www.zyxel.kz
Korea
• ZyXEL Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• ZyXEL Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.co.th
Vietnam
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Austria
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Appendix C Customer Support
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
528
Belarus
•ZyXEL BY
• http://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• ZyXEL Communications B.V.
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria
•ZyXEL България
• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o
• http://www.zyxel.cz
Denmark
• ZyXEL Communications A/S
• http://www.zyxel.dk
Estonia
•ZyXEL Estonia
• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.fi
France
•ZyXEL France
• http://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Hungary
• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE
• http://www.zyxel.hu
Appendix C Customer Support
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
529
Italy
• ZyXEL Communications Italy
• http://www.zyxel.it/
Latvia
•ZyXEL Latvia
• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
Lithuania
• ZyXEL Lithuania
• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml
Netherlands
•ZyXEL Benelux
• http://www.zyxel.nl
Norway
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.no
Poland
• ZyXEL Communications Poland
• http://www.zyxel.pl
Romania
•ZyXEL Romania
• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• ZyXEL Russia
• http://www.zyxel.ru
Slovakia
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• http://www.zyxel.sk
Spain
• ZyXEL Communications ES Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.es
Sweden
• ZyXEL Communications
Appendix C Customer Support
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
530
• http://www.zyxel.se
Switzerland
•Studerus AG
• http://www.zyxel.ch/
Turkey
•ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
• http://www.zyxel.com.tr
UK
• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.uk
Ukraine
•ZyXEL Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
Latin America
Argentina
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Brazil
• ZyXEL Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Ecuador
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East
Israel
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
Middle East
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
Appendix C Customer Support
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
531
• http://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America
USA
• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• http://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania
Australia
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.za
Appendix C Customer Support
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
532
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
533
APPENDIX D
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2015 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or tr ansmitted in any form or by an y means, elec tronic, mec hanical, mag netic, o ptical, che mical, phot ocopying , manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
United States of America
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) EMC Statement
• This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
• Changes or modificat ions not expres sly approv ed by the par ty responsi ble for compl iance could v oid the user’ s author ity to ope rate the
equipment.
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rule s.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Canada The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Industry Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
European Union
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
CE EMC statement
This is Clas s A Product. I n domestic en vironment t his product may cause r adio inte rference in wh ich case the us er may be re quired to take
adequate measures.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
534
List of National Codes
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North
America or 230V AC in Europe).
• DO NOT remove the plug and connect it to a power ou tlet by itself; alw ays attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting
it to a power outlet.
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power
adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• DO NOT use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and
electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household
waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Do not obstruct the device ventillation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge for your device. Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage.
• Fuse Warning! Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating.
• The POE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely
indoors.
• This eq ui p men t m ust be ground ed. Ne ver defeat the g r ound c on d uc to r or o p erate the equipment in t he ab sen c e of a su it ab ly i nstalled
ground conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding
is available.
• When connecting or disconnecting power to hot-pluggable power supplies, if offered with your system, observe the following
guidelines:
- Install the power supply before connecting the power cable to the power supply.
- Unplug the power cable before removing the power supply.
- If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cables from the power
supply.
• The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the equipment or where the plug on the
power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
- For PERMANENTLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the equipment;
- For PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CR Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Sweden SE
Ireland IE Switzerland CH
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Appendix D Legal Information
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
535
Environment Statment
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information
WEEE Directive
The symbol belo w means that ac cording to local regulat ions y our product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate
collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable developm ent.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll
entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum
Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu
sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des
ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la
collecte sép arée de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la
santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteri a deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti
domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello
smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente
e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här
produkten når slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och
mänsklig hälsa genom att göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
536
Environmental Product Declaration
Appendix D Legal Information
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
537
台灣
以下訊息僅適用於產品銷售至台灣地區
這是甲類的資訊產品,在居住的環境中使用時,可能會造成射頻干擾,在這種情況下,使用者會被要求採取某些適當的對策。
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
安全警告
為了您的安全,請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸
任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時,不要安裝,使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備,並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式,會有爆炸的風險,請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔,空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC,歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞,請從插座拔除,若您還繼續插電使用,會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線,若有毀損,請直接聯絡您購買的店家,購買一個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外,此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 設備必須接地,接地導線不允許被破壞或沒有適當安裝接地導線,如果不確定接地方式是否符合要求可聯繫相應的電氣檢驗機構檢驗。
• 如果您提供的系統中有提供熱插拔電源,連接或斷開電源請遵循以下指導原則
- 先連接電源線至設備連,再連接電源。
- 先斷開電源再拔除連接至設備的電源線。
- 如果系統有多個電源,需拔除所有連接至電源的電源線再關閉設備電源。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分,以下警語將適用 :
- 對永久連接之設備, 在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置;
- 對插接式之設備, 插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific
period (the Warranty Period) from the date o f purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the
authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase , should the prod uct have indi cations of failu re due to faulty workmanshi p and/or material s, Zy XEL will, at its disc retion, repair or
replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to
restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has
been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subj ected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought
the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and ZON (ZyXEL One Network)are registered trademarks of ZyXEL Communications, Inc.
Other tr ademar ks men tioned i n thi s public ation ar e used for ide ntific ation p urposes only an d ma y be p roperti es of their r espect iv e owners.
Appendix D Legal Information
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
538
Open Source Licenses
This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are
provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under
those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it.
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
539
Index
Numbers
802.1P priority 72
802.3az 340
A
access control
limitations 458
login account 471
remote management 480
service port 479
SNMP 459
accounting
setup 257
address learning, MAC 112, 114
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 441, 500, 504,
506
administrator password 471
age 150
aggregator ID 177, 180
aging time 64
anti-arpscan 372
blocked hosts 374
host threshold 375
status 373
trusted hosts 374
applications
bridging 22
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 23
switched workgroup 22
ARP
how it works 441, 500
table 500
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) 441, 500
ARP inspection 265, 297
and MAC filter 297
configuring 298
syslog messages 298
trusted ports 298
ARP scan 372
authentication
and RADIUS 254
setup 257
authorization
privilege levels 260
setup 257
automatic VLAN registration 102
B
back up, configuration file 451
basic settings 56
binding 265
binding table 265
building 265
BPDU 378
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) 378
BPDU guard 378
and Errdisable Recovery 378
port status 378
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) 133
Bridge Protocol Data Units 378
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) 133
C
CDP 310
certifications
viewing 537
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) 101
changing the password 42
Cisco Discovery Protocol, see CDP
CIST 136
CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree) 134
Class of Service (CoS) 404
classifier 201, 205
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
540
and QoS 201
editing 206, 207
example 208
overview 201
setup 201, 205, 206, 207
viewing 206, 207
cloning a port See port cloning
cluster management 489
and switch passwords 494
cluster manager 489, 494
cluster member 489, 494
cluster member firmware upgrade 492
network example 489
setup 493
specification 489
status 490
switch models 489
VID 494
web configurator 491
cluster manager 489
cluster member 489
command interface 25
Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) 134
Common and Internal Spanning Tree, See
CIST 136
configuration 398
change running config 452
configuration file 44
backup 451
restore 44, 450
saving 452
configuration, saving 43
console port
settings 33
contact information 526
copying port settings, See port cloning
copyright 533
CPU management port 117
CPU protection
configuration 328
overview 325
current date 62
current time 62
customer support 526
D
daylight saving time 62
default gateway 421
default IP address 33
DHCP 413
client IP pool 421
configuration options 413
modes 413
relay agent 413
relay example 423
server 413
setup 420
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 413
DHCP relay option 82 296
DHCP snooping 265, 295
configuring 297
DHCP relay option 82 296
trusted ports 295
untrusted ports 295
DHCP snooping database 296
DHCP Unique IDentifier 427
DHCPv6
DHCP Unique IDentifier 427
diagnostics 482
Ethernet port test 483
ping 483
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) 404
DiffServ 404
activate 406
and TRTCM 410
DS field 404
DSCP 404
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping 411
network example 404
PHB 404
disclaimer 533
documentation
related 2
double-tagged frames 219
DS (Differentiated Services) 404
DSCP
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping 411
service level 404
what it does 404
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) 404
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
541
DUID 427
dynamic link aggregation 175
E
EEE 340
egress port 120
Energy Efficient Ethernet 340
error disable detect 326, 330
error disable recovery
configuration 331
overview 325
Ethernet broadcast address 441, 500
Ethernet OAM 381
Ethernet port test 483
Ethernet ports
default settings 31
external authentication server 254
F
Fan Module 34
fan speed 59, 60
FCC interference statement 533
file transfer using FTP
command example 455
filename convention, configuration
configuration
file names 455
filtering 130
rules 130
filtering database, MAC table 495
firmware 58
upgrade 448, 492
flow control 72
back pressure 72
IEEE802.3x 72
forwarding
delay 150
frames
tagged 111
untagged 111
front panel 30
FTP 25, 455
file transfer procedure 456
restrictions over WAN 457
G
GARP 102
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) 102
GARP terminology 102
GARP timer 64, 102
general setup 61
getting help 45
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) 62
Green Ethernet 340
GVRP 102, 111
and port assignment 111
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) 102
H
hardware installation 26
hardware monitor 58, 59, 60
hardware overview 30
hello time 149
hops 150
HTTPS 474
certificates 474
implementation 474
public keys, private keys 474
HTTPS example 475
I
IEEE 802.1p, priority 65
IEEE 802.1x
activate 187, 192, 256
reauthentication 189
IEEE 802.1x, port authentication 185
IGMP
version 227
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) 227
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
542
IGMP filtering 227
profile 235
profiles 231, 237, 238, 241, 242
IGMP leave timeout
fast 233
mormal 233
IGMP snooping 228
MVR 244
IGMP throttling 233
ingress port 120
Installation
Rack-mounting 27
installation
freestanding 26
precautions 27
Installing the Fan Module 34
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
introduction 21
IP
interface 65, 66, 67, 431
routing domain 65
setup 65
IP address 66, 67
IP source guard 265
ARP inspection 265, 297
DHCP snooping 265, 295
static bindings 265
IP subnet mask 66, 67
IP table 498
how it works 498
IPv4 static route
configuration 397
IPv6 24, 517
addressing 517
EUI-64 519
global address 518
interface ID 519
link-local address 517
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 24, 517
ping 24, 517
prefix 427, 517
prefix length 427, 517
stateless autoconfiguration 519
unspecified address 518
IPv6 static route
configuration 398
L
L2PT 307
access port 308
CDP 307
configuration 308
encapsulation 307
LACP 307
MAC address 307
mode 308
overview 307
PAgP 307
point to point 307
STP 307
tunnel port 308
UDLD 307
VTP 307
LACP 175, 310
system priority 182
timeout 183
Layer 2 protocol tunneling, see L2PT
LEDs 35
limit MAC address learning 197
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP) 175
link aggregation 175
dynamic 175
ID information 176
setup 177, 180
status 177
traffic distribution algorithm 177
traffic distribution type 180
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP ) 343, 344
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) 343
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discov ery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices) 344
local port mirroring 162
lockout 43
login 37
password 42
login account
Administrator 471
non-administrator 471
login accounts 471
configuring via web configurator 471
multiple 471
number of 471
login password 472
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
543
loop guard 299
how it works 300
port shut down 300
probe packet 300
loop guard, vs STP 299
M
MAC (Media Access Control) 58
MAC address 58, 441, 500
maximum number per port 197, 198
MAC address learning 64, 112, 114, 124, 197
specify limit 197
MAC authentication 186
aging time 193
MAC filter
and ARP inspection 297
MAC freeze 197
MAC table 495
how it works 495
viewing 496
MAC - b ase d VLAN 122
maintanence
configuration back up 451
firmware 448
restoring configuration 450
maintenance 447
current configuration 447
main screen 447
Management Information Base (MIB) 460
management port 33, 120
default IP address 33
managing the device
good habits 25
using FTP. See FTP.
using SNMP. See SNMP.
using Telnet. See command interface.
using the command interface. See command
interface.
using the web configurator. See web configur ator.
man-in-the-middle attacks 297
max
age 150
hops 150
maximum transmission unit 503
Memory Buffer 453
MGMT port 33
MIB
and SNMP 460
supported MIBs 460
MIB (Management Information Base) 460
mini GBIC ports 32
connection speed 32
connector type 32
transceiver installation 32
transceiver removal 33
mirroring ports 162
monitor port 165, 166
MSA (MultiSource Agreement) 32
MST Instance, See MSTI 136
MST region 135
MSTI 136
MST ID 136
MSTI (Multiple Spanning Tree Instance) 134
MSTP 132, 134
bridge ID 155
configuration 147, 151
configuration digest 155
forwarding delay 150
Hello Time 155
hello time 149
Max Age 155
max age 150
max hops 150
MST region 135
network example 134
path cost 151
port priority 151
revision level 150
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol) 132
MTU 503
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 63
multicast 227
802.1 priority 231, 237, 238, 241, 242
and IGMP 227
IGMP throttling 233
IP addresses 227
overview 227
setup 230, 231, 237, 238, 239, 241, 242
multicast group 235
multicast VLAN 248
Multiple Spanning Tree Instance, See MSTI 134
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
544
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 133
Multiple Spanning Tr ee Protocol, See MSTP. 132
Multiple STP 133
Multiple STP, see MSTP 134
MVR 244
configuration 246
group configuration 248
network example 244
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration) 244
N
network management system (NMS) 459
NTP (RFC-1305) 62
O
OAM 381
details 383
discovery 381
port configuration 381
remote loopback 381
remote-loopback 389
Operations, Administration and Maintenance 381
other documentation 2
P
PAGP 310
password 42
administrator 471
Path MTU 503
Path MTU Discovery 503
PHB (Per-Hop Behavior) 404
ping, test connection 483
policy 211, 402
and classifier 211, 402
and DiffServ 210
configuration 211, 402
example 213
overview 210
rules 210
policy routing
benefits 400
cost savings 400
load sharing 400
overview 400
policy-based routing 400
Port Aggregation Protocol, see PAgP
port authentication 185
and RADIUS 254
IEEE802.1x 187, 192, 256
MAC authentication 186
port based VLAN type 64
port cloning 504, 506
advanced settings 504, 506
basic settings 504, 506
port details 52
port isolation 120
port mirroring 162, 166
direction 166, 170
egress 166, 170
ingress 166, 170
port redundancy 175
port security 195, 199
address learning 197
limit MAC address learning 197
MAC address learning 195, 199
overview 195, 199
setup 195, 199, 301, 308
port setup 69
port status 51
port details 52
port VLAN trunking 103
port-based VLAN 117
all connected 120
port isolation 120
settings wizard 120
ports
“standby” 175
diagnostics 483
mirroring 162
speed/duplex 72
power
voltage 59, 61
power module
disconnecting 34
power status 59, 61
PPPoE IA
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
545
trusted ports 318
untrusted ports 318
priority level 65
priority, queue assignment 65
product registration 537
protocol based VLAN 114
and IEEE 802.1Q tagging 114
example 116
hexadecimal notation for protocols 113, 115
isolate traffic 114
priority 113, 115
PVID 101, 111
PVID (Priority Frame) 101
Q
QoS
and classifier 201
queue weight 216
queuing 215
SPQ 216
WFQ 216
WRR 216
queuing method 215, 217
R
RADIUS 254
advantages 254
and authentication 254
Network example 253
server 254
settings 254
setup 254
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, See RSTP. 132
reboot
load configuration 452
reboot system 452
reflector port 162
registration
product 537
related documentation 2
remote management 480
service 481
trusted computers 481
remote port mirroring 162, 167
Removing the Fan Module 34
resetting 44, 451, 452, 453
to factory default settings 451, 452, 453
restoring configuration 44, 450
RFC 3164 486
RMirror 162
monitor port 168
reflector port 168
source 168
RMirror, see also remote port mirroring 167
Round Robin Scheduling 216
routing domain 65, 431
routing table 502
RSTP 132
rubber feet 26
S
save configuration 43, 452
Secure Shell See SSH
service access control 479
service port 480
sFlow 312
collector 314
configuration 312
datagram 312
overview 312
poll interval 314
sample rate 314
UDP port 315
sFlow agent 312
sFlow collector 312
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
SNMP 25, 459
agent 459
and MIB 460
authentication 470
communities 466
management model 459
manager 459
MIB 460
network components 459
object variables 460
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
546
protocol operations 460
security 470
setup 465
traps 466
users 469
version 3 and security 460
versions supported 459
SNMP traps 461
supported 461, 463, 465
source-based routing 400
Spanning Tree Protocol, See STP. 132
SPQ (Strict Priority Queuing) 216
SSH
encryption methods 474
how it works 473
implementation 474
SSH (Secure Shell) 472
SSL (Secure Socket Layer) 474
standby ports 175
static bindings 265
static MAC address 124
static MAC forwarding 112, 114, 124
static multicast address 127
static multicast forwarding 127
static route
overview 396
static routes 398
static trunking example 183
Static VLAN 107
static VLAN
control 109
tagging 109
status
LED 35
link aggregation 177
port 51
power 59, 61
STP 141, 145, 154
VLAN 104
VRRP 431
STP 132, 310
bridge ID 141, 146
bridge priority 139, 144
configuration 138, 142, 147
designated bridge 133
forwarding delay 140, 144
Hello BPDU 133
Hello Time 139, 141, 144, 146
how it works 133
Max Age 140, 141, 144, 146
path cost 132, 140, 145
port priority 140, 145
port state 133
root port 133
status 141, 145, 154
terminology 132
vs loop guard 299
subnet based VLANs 111
and DHCP VLAN 113
and priority 112
configuration 112
switch lockout 43
switch reset 44
switch setup 63
syslog 298, 486
protocol 486
settings 486
setup 486
severity levels 486
system information 56
system reboot 452
T
TACACS+ 254
setup 256
TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access-
Control System Plus) 253
tagged VLAN 101
Tech-Support 453
temperature indicator 58, 59, 60
time
current 62
time zone 62
Time (RFC-868) 62
time server 62
time service protocol 62
format 62
trademarks 537
transceiver
installation 32
removal 33
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
547
traps
destination 466
TRTCM
and bandwidth control 408
and DiffServ 410
color-aware mode 406
color-blind mode 406
setup 408
trunk group 175
trunking 175
example 183
trusted ports
ARP inspection 298
DHCP snooping 295
PPPoE IA 318
Tunnel Protocol Attribute, and RADIUS 261
Tw o Rate Three Color Marker (TRTCM) 405
Tw o Rate Three Color Marker, see TRTCM 405
Type of Service (ToS) 404
U
UDLD 310
UniDirectional Link Detection, see UDLD
untrusted ports
ARP inspection 298
DHCP snooping 295
PPPoE IA 318
user profiles 253
V
Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA
ventilation holes 26
VID 69, 101, 104, 105, 221
number of possible VIDs 101
priority frame 101
VID (VLAN Identifier) 101
Virtual Router
status 431
Virtual Router (VR) 430
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 430
VLAN 63, 101
acceptable frame type 111
automatic registration 102
ID 101
ingress filtering 111
introduction 63
number of VLANs 104
port number 105
port settings 109
port-based VLAN 117
port-based, all connected 120
port-based, isolation 120
port-based, wizard 120
static VLAN 107
status 104, 105
tagged 101
trunking 103, 111
type 64, 103
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) 63
VLAN mapping 303
activating 303
configuration 305
example 303
priority level 303
tagged 303
traffic flow 303
untagged 303
VLAN ID 303
VLAN number 66, 67, 69
VLAN stacking 219, 221
configuration 221
example 219
frame format 221
port roles 220, 223
port-based Q-in-Q 223
priority 221
selective Q-in-Q 225
VLAN Trunking Protocol, see VTP
VLAN, protocol based, See protocol based VLAN
VLAN, subnet based, See subnet based VLANs 111
VRID (Virtual Router ID) 431
VRRP 430
advertisement interval 433
authentication 432
backup router 430
configuration example 435
Hello message 433
how it works 430
interface setup 431
Index
GS3700/XGS3700 Series User’s Guide
548
master router 430
network example 430, 435
parameters 433
preempt mode 433, 434
priority 433, 434
status 431
uplink gateway 434
uplink status 431
Virtual Router 430
Virtual Router ID 434
VRID 431
VSA 260
VTP 310
W
warranty 537
note 537
web configurator 25, 37
getting help 45
layout 38
login 37
logout 45
navigation panel 39
weight, queuing 216
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) 216
WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) 216
WRR (Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 216
Z
ZON Neighbor Management 49
ZON Utility 49
ZULD 390
example 390
probe time 393
status 391
ZULD (ZyXEL Unidirectional Link Detection) 390
Z y NOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) 455
ZyXEL Unidirectional Link Detection 390
ZyXEL Unidirectional Link Detection (ZULD) 390